Copyright: Microsoft Exchange Administrator Help  (c) 1995-1998 Microsoft Corporation.
Citation: (c) 1995-1998 Microsoft Corporation.


Directory Name

Type a maximum of 64 characters.


Display Name

Type a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters. If no name is provided, the system prompts for a value.


General (Address Book View)

  Overview

Use the General property page for the Address Book view to specify the display name and to make any notes about this Address Book view for future reference. The directory name can be modified only if you are creating a new Address Book view.

 Display name

 Directory name

  Administrative note


Group By (Address Book View)

  Overview

Defines how recipient objects in the Address Book view are grouped. You can group recipient objects using any of the attributes that appear in the Group items by box.

Note

Address Book views appear in the first-level hierarchy of the Administrator window. They also appear in the Show Names from the box in the Microsoft Outlook Address Book.

 Group items by

 Then by


Group items by

Select an attribute you want to use to group items.


Then by

Select additional attributes you want to use to group items.


Show this view in the client address book

If selected, the Address Book view and all its containers appear in the Address Book.


Promote entries to parent containers

Use the Promote entries to parent containers to determine if recipient objects are included in the parent Address Book View containers. For example, if you have containers that group mailboxes by country (USA), state (California), and city (Los Angeles), you must determine whether to include the mailbox under only the city container (Los Angeles) or under all the containers (USA, California, and Los Angeles).

If you select this option, recipient objects appear in all containers, regardless of how the containers are related or arranged. If you do not select this option, recipient objects appear only in the lowest level container. In this case, the recipient objects would appear in only the city container and not in the state or country containers.


Promote entries to parent containers
Remove Empty Containers Button

Empty containers are not removed automatically. Use the Remove Empty Containers button to remove all empty containers from the Address Book view. If you move all recipient objects from one container to another, the empty container remains until you delete it.


Advanced (Address Book View)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to determine whether recipient objects should appear in one or more parent containers and which Address Book View containers you want to show in Microsoft Outlook. You can also delete empty containers within an Address Book view.

 Promote entries to parent containers

 Show this view in the client address book

 Remove Empty Containers button


Permissions (Address Book Views)
Permissions (Address Book View)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Address Book. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning the user or group a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

You can use search control restrictions in the Permissions property page to control which Address Book views users see. For example, if you are hosting multiple companies on a single Microsoft Exchange Server, you can prevent users of one company from viewing the Address Book views of another company. You do this by creating a Windows NT group for each company you are hosting and setting the Search role for each Windows NT group.

  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the container object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this container and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this container and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this container.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this container.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of this container. Use this right to restrict access to Address Book View containers.


Group By (Address Book Container)
Group By (Address Book View Container)

  Overview

Changes the way subcontainers are grouped for certain Address Book views. For example, if you have a container that groups items by country and subcontainers that group items by state and city, you may not want a state grouping in certain situations. For example, the country, state, and city groups work well for countries that have states, such as USA, Washington, Seattle. However, for countries, such as Greece, that do not have states, you would want only the city grouping. You can remove the state grouping in this instance so that Greece contains only a city grouping.

  This container

  Sub-containers

  Grouping value


This container

Displays the attribute used to group the currently selected Address Book View container. This attribute cannot be changed.


Sub-containers

Select the grouping attribute you want to use to create subcontainers for this Address Book View container.


Grouping value

Displays the grouping attribute for the currently selected Address Book View container. This attribute cannot be changed.


Add

You can move recipient objects between containers. When you do this, the attribute that defined the recipient object in the original container is changed to the value of the attribute of the new container.

Select New Container to create another Address Book View container.


General (Extension)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the following Extension options:

  Display Name

  Version

  Extension Name

  Administrative Note


Display Name

Sets the display name for the Extension. You can type up to a 256 character name.


Version

Displays the version number of the Extension (MS Mail, Internet, or Schedule+ Free/Busy) .Dll.


Extension Name

Displays the .Dll file name for the Extension.


Permissions (Extension)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this extension object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

To view the Rights box, select Tools and Options from the Administrator program. In the Permissions property page, select the Display rights for roles on Permissions page option.

  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


General (Extension for Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector)

Use the General property page to specify the following Extension options:

  Display Name

  Version

  Extension Name

  Administrative Note


Permissions (Extension for Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this extension object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. For extension objects, Microsoft Exchange provides Admin, Permissions Admin, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for extension object permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object.
  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button


General (E-Mail Address Generators Container)

The Address Types container holds various e-mail address generators. These generators control the automatic generation of various e-mail addresses. By default, Microsoft Exchange provides the following e-mail address generators:

cc:Mail

Internet

MS Mail

X.400

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Display Name

Sets the name as it will appear in the directory and property pages. You can type up to a 256 character name.


Directory Name

The directory name is created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server and it cannot be changed.


General (E-Mail Address Generator)

  Overview

Use the General property page to provide the path to the dynamic-link library (.dll) file that generates e-mail addresses.

  Display Name

  Version

  Address Generator Name

  Administrative Note


Version

Displays the version number of the e-mail address generator .dll.


Address Generator Name

Displays the file name of the e-mail address generator .dll.


Permissions (E-Mail Address Generator)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on an e-mail address generator. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an e-mail address generator. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this e-mail address generator.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this e-mail address generator.
Delete	Delete this e-mail address generator.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this e-mail address generator.


General (Details Templates Container)

The Details Templates container holds various foreign language template containers, which in turn contain details templates in the corresponding languages. Details templates let you customize a variety of Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server.


General (Details Templates Container - All Languages)

The Details Templates Language containers contain details templates in various foreign languages (U.S./English, German, and so forth). Details templates let you customize a variety of Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory names created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory names cannot be changed.


General (All Templates)

Use the General property page to view or modify the name of a template, to view the directory name, and to provide an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Client Local Help File Name

  Import 16 Bit Help File

  Import 32 Bit Help File

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you installed Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory names cannot be changed.


Client Local Help File Name

Name of the template Help file that will be created on client computers, regardless of the name of the Help file you choose to import and associate with this template.

Importing a new template Help file permanently overwrites the template Help file shipped with Microsoft Exchange Server. As a precaution, you should access all details and One-Off Address Templates from a client computer, thereby creating copies of the associated Help files in the TEMP directory of that computer. You can then save the Help files and import them as needed.


Import 16 Bit Help File

Opens the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box and allows you to select the Help file that will be displayed on computers using Windows 16-bit operating systems.


Import 32 Bit Help File

Opens the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box and allows you to select the Help file that will be displayed on computers using Windows 32-bit operating systems.


Permissions (All Templates)

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on a template. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on a template. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this template.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this template.
Delete	Delete this template.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this template.


Templates (All Templates)

Use details templates to customize Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes. You can use the Templates property page to view all the fields and controls that make up an existing Microsoft Exchange Server dialog box. You can modify existing controls, add new controls, or remove controls for all templates except one-off address templates. You can also test the appearance of the dialog box before accepting your changes.

Click an area in the following graphic for more information.


X Column

Displays the X coordinate (in dialog units) for the new control. This is the distance from the left side of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


Y Column

Displays the Y coordinate (in dialog units) for the new control. This is the distance from the top of the dialog box to the upper left corner of the control.


W Column

Displays the width (in dialog units) of the new control.


H Column

Displays the height (in dialog units) of the new control.


Control Column

Displays the name of the different controls (such as group boxes and edit boxes) that make up the template you are customizing. You can create new controls, modify existing controls, or remove a control.


Value Column

Displays the value of the control listed in the Control column. For example, a Label control might have the value &First Name. In the resulting dialog box, this control appears as First Name.


New Button

Creates a new control on the template. You are prompted to choose the type of control. You are then provided with a set of options that let you define the appearance and function of the control.


Edit Button

Modifies the existing control you have selected. A dialog box appears containing a set of options that let you define the appearance and function of the control.


Remove Button

Removes the selected existing control from the template.


Move Up Button

Moves the selected existing control up in the list.


Move Down Button

Moves the selected existing control down in the list.


Test Button

Tests the appearance of the dialog box. When you are satisfied with its appearance, choose OK to accept your changes.


Original Button

Returns all controls on the template to their original values.


MS-DOS Templates (All Templates)

Use details templates to customize Microsoft Exchange Server dialog boxes. You can use the MS-DOS Templates property page to view all the fields and controls that make up an existing Microsoft Exchange Server dialog box. You can modify existing controls, add new controls, or remove controls for all templates except one-off address templates. You can also test the appearance of the dialog box before accepting your changes.

Click an area in the following graphic for more information.


General (One-Off Address Templates Container)

One-off address templates are templates that you use to address messages to mailboxes that are not in your global address list or in your personal address book. They are called one-off because they are often used to send one piece of mail off to an address and are not used again. (However, you can use this template to send mail and then add the addressee to your personal address book.)

The template appears in Microsoft Outlook any time you are prompted to provide an e-mail address for a recipient.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Displays the directory name created when you install Microsoft Exchange Server. This name cannot be changed.


Post Office (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

Use the Post Office property page to configure connection parameters for the Microsoft Exchange Server Connector for Lotus cc:Mail. You can limit message size, establish a LAN connection to a cc:Mail post office, and assign an Administrator's mailbox for receiving messages that the Connector for cc:Mail cannot interpret.

  Administrator's Mailbox

  Name

  Password

  Path

  Import Export version

  Post office language

 Permit ADE to propagate entries synched to cc:Mail to downstream post offices

 Preserve forwarding history on messages sent from cc:Mail to Microsoft Exchange

  Message Tracking


Administrator's Mailbox (Connector for cc:Mail)
Administrator's Mailbox

The recipient in your organization that will receive connector-related administrative messages.

Choose Change to open the Address Book. From the Address Book, you can select a recipient to act as the administrator. The recipient can be a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.


Name

The name of the cc:Mail post office (up to 256 characters).


Password

The password for the cc:Mail post office (up to 10 characters).


A code page is an encoding of a standard set of characters within a specific locale. Encoding provides a consistent way for messaging systems to exchange and process data.


Post office language

Selecting a language code page used for text sent to and from the connector. Encoding provides a consistent way for messaging systems to exchange and process data. The code page also determines the language the connector uses for sending text strings, such as status messages, to cc:Mail.


Import/Export version

Select the version of cc:Mail Import.exe and Export.exe that you are using.

Database version	Import.exe/Export.exe version
Lotus cc:Mail Post Office Database version 6.	Lotus cc:Mail Import version 5.15 and Export version 5.14.
Lotus cc:Mail Post Office Database version 8.	Lotus cc:Mail Import/Export version 6.0.


Path

The network path to the cc:Mail post office in uniform naming convention (UNC) format.

Note

Before you can connect to a NetWare server, your Windows NT Server must be running the Gateway Service for NetWare. When typing a network path to a NetWare server, use the UNC format (\\servername\sharename\path for a Windows NT Server or \\servername\volumename\path for a NetWare server). For example, a cc:Mail post office located on a NetWare server with server name SERVER1, volume name SYS, and directory name CCDATA would require the network path \\SERVER1\SYS\CCDATA.


Message Size

You can configure the maximum size of outgoing messages transported through the Connector for cc:Mail using the General property page. This is useful when you do not want users to send messages with large attachments that might affect server performance. If the message size is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with a non-delivery report (NDR).

Choose No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent. Choose Maximum to set the message size from 1 to 2,097,151K.


Preserve forwarding history on messages sent from cc:Mail to Microsoft Exchange

Retains the message forwarding history as an attached file (Forward.txt) for messages sent from cc:Mail to Microsoft Exchange Server


Permit ADE to propogate entries synched to cc:Mail to downstream post offices
Permit ADE to propagate entries synched to cc:Mail to downstream post offices

Allows directory synchronized entries added to the cc:Mail directory from Microsoft Exchange Server to be propagated to cc:Mail post offices indirectly connected by ADE.


Enable message tracking

Tracks messages through the connector for troubleshooting. When message tracking is enabled, message activities are maintained in a log by the system attendant on Microsoft Exchange Server. The log becomes a trace of the processing of each message as each component receives, processes, and delivers it to the next component. The mail tracking log is stored in \EXCHSRVR\TRACKING.LOG.


Import Container (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

When you configure directory synchronization, you must identify an import container. You use an import container to store imported addresses from the cc:Mail post office on a Microsoft Exchange Server. Imported addresses from cc:Mail to Microsoft Exchange Server include:

User names

Bulletin board names

Mailing lists

Imported addresses are represented as custom recipients in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. Addresses from cc:Mail that contain text in the cc:Mail Administrator program comments field display the same text in the notes attribute for the custom recipient. When text in either the notes field or the comments field is edited, the updates will be incorporated after the next directory synchronization cycle.

Use the Import Container property page to set filter options for importing cc:Mail addresses. When you filter an import container, you can specify individual cc:Mail addresses that you want to import to Microsoft Exchange Server.

  Container

  Run dir sync now

  Import all directory entries

  Only import directory entries of these formats

  Do not import directory entries of these formats

  New

  Edit

  Remove


Directory Import Container

Displays a graphical representation of all recipient containers in your site. Select the recipient container where you want to import directory information and create recipients.


Container

Select the recipient container where you want to import directory information and create recipients.


Run dir sync now

Immediately starts the directory synchronization processes between Microsoft Exchange Server and a cc:Mail post office. To schedule regular directory synchronization cycles, use the Schedule property page.


Import all directory entries

Imports all directory entries from the cc:Mail post office to Microsoft Exchange Server.


Only import directory entries of these formats

Imports cc:Mail addresses that correspond to the specified formats. For example, to accept addresses from the cc:Mail post office PO1 exclusively using the wildcard character asterisk, type * at PO1.


Do not import directory entries of these formats

Excludes cc:Mail addresses that correspond to a specified format. For example, to exclude addresses from the cc:Mail post office PO1 exclusively using the wildcard character asterisk, type * at PO1.


Edit

Modify an existing address format to include or exclude during directory synchronization.


New

Specify a new address format to include or exclude during directory synchronization.


Remove

Delete an address format.


Administrator's Mailbox (Connector for cc:Mail)

Select the recipient in your organization that will receive Connector for cc:Mail administrative messages. The recipient can be a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Show Names From The

Displays the name of the Address Book currently selected. Click the down arrow to display a list of Address Books you can select.


Type Name or Select From List

Type the name of the mailbox, custom recipient, distribution list, or mailbox agent. You can also select the appropriate name from the list.


Properties Button

Displays the Properties dialog box, which you use to view the various properties of the selected mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent.


Find Button

Displays the Find dialog box, which you use to locate a mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent in the selected Address Book.


Export Containers (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

You use export containers to specify the Microsoft Exchange Server recipients that you want exported to the cc:Mail post office directory. Directory synchronization exports mailboxes, public folders, distribution lists, mailbox agents, and custom recipients to the cc:Mail directory. The address names exported are the names generated by the cc:Mail e-mail address generator.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Recipient Containers

Lists all recipient containers in the currently selected site.


Export These Recipients

Lists all recipient containers that directory information will be exported from.


Add Button

Adds the selected container to the list of recipient containers that directory information will be exported from.


Remove Button

Removes the selected container from the list of recipient containers that directory information will be exported from.


Site

Lists all sites in your organization. When you select a site, a list of all recipient containers in the site appears in the Recipient Containers box.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to limit the directory information sent to cc:Mail. Only objects (from the selected containers) with a trust level equal to or less than the level specified in the Trust Level box will be sent. The default is 100.


Export Custom Recipients

Clear the Export Custom Recipients check box if you do not want to send information about Microsoft Exchange Server custom recipients.


Schedule (Connector for cc:Mail)
Dirsync Schedule (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

You can schedule the time when Microsoft Exchange Server sends address list updates to and receives address list updates from the cc:Mail post office. The default is to never launch a directory synchronization cycle.

  Schedule Grid

  Never

  Always

  Selected times

  1 Hour

  15 Minute


Never

Disables directory synchronization.


Always

Runs directory synchronization every 15 minutes.


Selected times

Runs directory synchronization at a specific time during the week.


1 Hour

Shows the schedule in 1-hour increments.


15 Minute

Shows the schedule in 15-minute increments.


General (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options.

  Computer Name

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Computer Name

The name given to the computer where the Microsoft Exchange Server connector is installed.


Message Size

You can configure the maximum size of outgoing messages transported through the Connector for cc:Mail using the General property page. This is useful when you do not want users to send messages with large attachments that might affect server performance. If the message size is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with a non-delivery report (NDR).

Choose No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent. Choose Maximum to set the message size from 1 to 2,097,151K.


Queues (Connector for cc:Mail)

  Overview

The information store has two queues for monitoring outbound and inbound messages through the connector. The MTS-OUT queue displays outbound messages destined for the connector. The MTS-IN queue displays converted messages traveling inbound from the connector. You can view the queues for all messages pending transfer. You can also return messages to the originator by deleting them from the queue. Use the Queues property page to determine the number of messages in a queue, to view a message in a queue in detail, and to delete a pending message.

  Queue Name

  Details

  Refresh

  Delete


Queue Name

Displays the name of the queue and the number of items in the queue. The MTS-IN queue holds incoming messages waiting to be converted by the connector, then delivered to the information store. The MTS-OUT queue holds outgoing messages that are received from cc:Mail and are waiting to be converted by the Connector for cc:Mail. The MTS-OUT queue holds outgoing messages that are waiting to be sent by the Connector for cc:Mail.


Details

Displays the Details dialog box to view information about a queued message.


Refresh

Updates the display of all the Connector for cc:Mail queues.


Delete

Deletes messages that are interfering with the processing of a queue. Deleted messages are permanently erased from the disk and a non-delivery report (NDR) is sent to the originator.


Details

Use the Details dialog box to view information about a queued message.

  Originator

  Recipients

  MTS-ID

  Message ID

  Destination Host

  Submit Time

  Size

  Delivery Status

  Next Retry Time

  Retries


Retries

Number of times the connector attempted to deliver the message.


Next Retry Time

The time scheduled to resend messages if previous attempts were unsuccessful.


Size

Size of the message in bytes.


Message ID

Identifies the message. For incoming mail, the Message ID is assigned by the connector. On outgoing mail, it is assigned by the MTA.


Recipients

Lists the mailboxes the message was sent to.


MTS-ID

Identifies the message system component that handled the mail. For outgoing Microsoft Exchange Server messages, it identifies the MTA.


Originator

The name of the person who sent the message.


Destination Host

The name of the host server that the message is being sent to.


Submit Time

The time the message was sent.


Delivery Status

Indicates whether or not the delivery attempt was successful.


Directory Import Container

Shows a graphical representation of all recipient containers in your site. Select the recipients container where you want to import directory information and create recipients.


Import Filter

Imports cc:Mail addresses that correspond to the specified formats. For example, to accept addresses from the cc:Mail post office PO1 exclusively using the wildcard character asterisk, type * at PO1.


Command Line Switches

You can start the Administrator program from the command line using a variety of switches. For example, you can start the Administrator program in raw mode by typing the following at the command line:

admin /r

The following table lists the switches you can use when starting the Administrator program from the command line.

Switch	Description
/r	Starts the Administrator program in raw mode. Raw mode provides access to all directory attributes contained in the schema. You can also run the Administrator program in raw mode by creating a RawMode registry entry.
/h	Starts the Administrator program and displays this Help topic.
/s <server name>	Starts the Administrator program and connects to the server you specify for server name.
/m [Site\]MonitorName\Server	Starts the Administrator program and starts the monitor you specify for MonitorName. Site is the directory name of the site that contains the monitor to be run. This is optional. If Site is not specified, the site of the Server will be used. MonitorName is the directory name of the monitor within the site, and Server is the server to which the monitor should connect.
/t	Temporarily suspends monitoring on a server that you are taking down for maintenance or backup. Used with various monitor suspension options.
/i	Runs the command line directory import utility.
/e	Runs the command line directory export utility.


Monitor Suspension Options

You can use the /t command line switch with the following options.

Switch	Description
/t r	Suspends repairs during maintenance, but sends a notification if a problem is found.
/t n	Suspends notification during maintenance, but initiates any repairs specified by the monitor.
/t nr	Suspends both notification and repairs during maintenance.
/t	Resets the monitor to normal mode.
Note

When performing maintenance on a server, you must set the admin /t command to start before the server goes offline. Consider the polling intervals of the monitors, and be sure that each monitor receives a maintenance mode notification before the server goes down.


Command Line Directory Import Utility

Use the command line directory import utility to import directory information from a text file.

Use the following syntax:

admin /i <import file> /d <directory server name> /n /o <options file>

Note

The /i switch is required. All other switches are optional.

Option	Description
<import file>	The name of the file that contains directory information to be imported.
<directory server name>	The name of the server whose directory is to be updated.
/n	Specifies that the progress bar is not displayed during directory import.
/o	Specifies the name of an import options file.
<options file>	The name of a directory import options file containing options that control how directory information is imported.


Directory Import Options File

When running the command line directory import utility with the /o option, the import options file is used to specify the same types of options as the Administrator program's Directory Import dialog box. The import options file is a text file and must be in the following format.

[Import]

DirectoryService=<DS server name>     (default=NULL)

Basepoint=<DN of basepoint object>     (default=NULL, which indicates the local site)

Container=<RDN of container object>     (default=Recipients)

InformationLevel=[None, Minimal, Full]     (default=Minimal)

RecipientTemplate=<DN of default mailbox>     (default=none)

NTDomain=<NT domain where accounts will be created>     (default=none)

OverwriteProperties=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

CreateNTAccounts=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

DeleteNTAccounts=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

ApplyNTSecurity=[Yes, No]     (default=Yes)

GeneratePassword=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

RawMode=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

CodePage=[-1,0,code-page-ID] (Default=0)

ColumnSeparator=<ASCII value of column separator character> (Default=44) (",")

MVSeparator=<ASCII value of multivalue separator character> (Default=37) ("%")

QuoteCharacter=<ASCII value of quoted value delimiter>(Default=34) (")

Note

The RawMode option is primarily intended for developers and should be enabled only by advanced users. Raw mode requires specific information about the directory schema. Files that can be imported normally are likely to fail in raw mode because they don't contain sufficient information. For more details about the directory schema, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Software Developer's Kit.


Command Line Directory Export Utility

Use the command line directory export utility to export directory information to a text file.

Use the following syntax:

admin /e <export file> /d <directory server name> /n /o <options file>

Note

The /e switch is required. All other switches are optional.

Option	Description
<export file>	The name of the file where the exported directory information is to be written.
<directory server name>	The name of the server from which the directory information will be exported.
/n	Specifies that the progress bar is not displayed during directory export.
/o	Specifies the name of an export options file.
<options file>	The name of a directory export options file containing options that control how directory information is exported.


Directory Export Options File

When running the command line directory export utility with the /o option, the export options file is used to specify the same types of options as the Administrator program's Directory Export dialog box. The export options file is a text file and must be in the following format.

[Export]

DirectoryService=<DS server name>     (default=NULL)

HomeServer=<server name>     (default=NULL)

Basepoint=<DN of basepoint object>     (default=NULL, which indicates the organization)

Container=<RDN of container object>     (default=Recipients)

ExportObject=[Mailbox, Remote (custom recipients), DL, Recipients (all recipients), All (all object types)]     (default=Mailbox)

InformationLevel=[None, Minimal, Full]     (default=Minimal)

BasepointOnly=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

RawMode=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

Hiddenobjects=[Yes, No]     (default=No)

Subcontainers=[Yes, No] (default=No)

CodePage=[-1,0,code-page-ID] (Default=0)

ColumnSeparator=<ASCII value of column separator character> (Default=44) (",")

MVSeparator=<ASCII value of multivalue separator character> (Default=37) ("%")

QuoteCharacter=<ASCII value of quoted value delimiter>(Default=34) (")

Note

The RawMode option is primarily intended for developers and should be enabled only by advanced users. Raw mode requires specific information about the directory schema. Files that can be imported normally are likely to fail in raw mode because they don't contain sufficient information. For more details about the directory schema, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Software Developer's Kit.


Creating a Raw Mode Registry Entry

When you run the Administrator program in raw mode, you have access to all directory attributes contained in the schema. There are two ways to run the Administrator program in raw mode. You can start the Administrator program from the command line using the /r command line switch, or you can create a RawMode entry in the Windows NT Registry. Creating a registry entry causes the Administrator program to run in raw mode at all times, whether you start it from the command line or from Windows NT Program Manager.

To create a RawMode registry entry, use the Windows NT Registry Editor to add the following entry:

MSExchangeAdmin

Desktop

RawMode=[0,1]

Where 0 means that the Administrator program will never run in raw mode, and 1 means that it will always run in raw mode.


X Coordinate

Displays the X coordinate (in dialog base units) of the control listed in the Control column. This is the distance from the left side of the dialog box to the upper-left corner of the control.


Y Coordinate

Displays the Y coordinate (in dialog base units) of the control listed in the Control column. This is the distance from the top of the dialog box to the upper-left corner of the control.


Width

Displays the width (in dialog base units) of the control.


Field

Displays the value for the field.


Text

Displays the text to appear in the label.


Height

Displays the height (in dialog base units) of the control.


Length

Displays the maximum number of characters allowed.


Multiline

When selected, allows multiple lines in the field.


Help Context

Displays the context number for the control's Help topic.


Display Horizontal Scroll Bar

When selected, displays a horizontal scroll bar in the list box.


Display Vertical Scroll Bar

When selected, displays a vertical scroll bar in the list box.


Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

Read-only list box that displays all Windows NT accounts with inherited rights for this object.


NT Accounts with Permissions

Displays all Windows NT accounts and groups that have permissions for this object. Select one of these accounts or groups, and then choose a role from the Roles box.


Roles

Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has to an object. Each role is defined by a set of rights that appear as check boxes next to the Roles box. You can define custom roles or use one of the default roles that Microsoft Exchange Server provides.


Add Button

Opens a dialog box where you can select one or more Windows NT accounts and groups to add to the list of accounts and groups with permissions for this object.


Remove Button

Removes the currently selected Windows NT account or group from the list of accounts and groups with permissions for this object.


Show Names From The

Displays the name of the currently selected Address Book. Choose the down arrow in the field to display a list of Address Books that you can select.


Type Name or Select From List

Type the name of the mailbox, custom recipient, distribution list, or mailbox agent. You can also select the name from the list.


Add Button

Adds the selected names to the box on the right of the Add button. When you choose OK, the names in this box are copied to the appropriate fields on the property page.


Properties Button

Displays the Properties dialog box, which you use to view the various properties of the selected mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent.


Find Button

Displays the Find dialog box, which you use to locate a mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent in the selected Address Book.


Never

Select Never if you never want the associated event to occur.


Always

Select Always if you want the event to occur every 15 minutes.


Selected Times

Select Selected Times to designate specific times or blocks of time in the schedule grid.


Detail View

Select 1 Hour to view the schedule grid in one-hour increments, or select 15 Minute to view the schedule grid in 15-minute increments.


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders who this recipient will accept messages from. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and then choose Modify to specify a list of senders who this recipient will accept messages from.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders who this recipient will not accept messages from. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and then choose Modify to specify a list of senders who this recipient will reject messages from.


Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book. You can then select one or more recipients in the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From box or the Reject Messages From box.


E-Mail Addresses

Use the E-Mail Addresses property page to create or modify alternate e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server objects. E-mail addresses are used to identify Microsoft Exchange Server objects to the gateways and connectors that connect Microsoft Exchange Server to other messaging systems. Use the E-Mail Addresses property page to create, modify, or remove one or more of the following types of addresses:

Custom

Microsoft Mail

MacMail

X.400

Internet

Lotus cc:Mail

By default, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates Lotus cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, X.400, and Internet addresses for every recipient object using information that you provide. If you change the recipient information used to create e-mail addresses (such as a mailbox first name, last name, or alias name), the e-mail addresses are not automatically updated. You must manually edit e-mail addresses after they have been generated.

Caution  Many other Microsoft Exchange Server services use these default addresses. Changing or removing the default addresses can cause messaging and message-based services (such as directory replication) to fail.

  E-Mail Addresses

  New button

  Edit button

  View button

  Remove button

  Set As Reply Address


E-Mail Addresses

Lists all existing e-mail addresses for this recipient object.


New Button

Choose New to open the New Entry dialog box, which enables you to create one of several different types of e-mail addresses.


Edit Button

Select an e-mail address in the E-Mail Addresses box, and then choose Edit to open a dialog box where you can edit address information.

Edit is available only if you have Modify permission for the recipient.


View Button

Displays the Address Properties dialog box for the selected e-mail address, which you use to view the components that make up the address.

View appears only when you are viewing recipients from another site. Properties for recipients can only be modified from the site in which they were created.


Remove Button

Removes the selected address from the system.


Set As Reply Address

Designates the selected address as the default reply address when there is more than one address of the same type. When a Microsoft Outlook user receives mail from this recipient and chooses Reply, this address is used.


Diagnostics Logging

Use this property page to browse or edit logging levels for Microsoft Exchange Server events.

Diagnostics logging levels determine which Microsoft Exchange Server events are written to the Windows NT application event log. You can set logging levels to provide information in varying levels of detail. Events can range from significant events (such as an application failure), to moderately important events (such as the receipt of messages across a gateway), to events relevant only to debugging. Usually you log only critical events. However, when problems occur, diagnostics logging enables you to change the logging levels to capture more detailed events.

For more information about diagnostics logging, see Microsoft Exchange Server Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

  Services

  Category

  Logging Level

  Logging Level Options


Services

Name of the Microsoft Exchange Server service. Services are custom components or connectors and can include gateways, mailbox agents, or add-ins.


Category

A group of related application functions. Logging levels are set by category.

Microsoft Exchange Server Maintenance and Troubleshooting includes a complete list of diagnostics logging categories.


Logging Level

Displays the logging level for the service.

The logging level determines which events are written to the Windows NT application event log. When Microsoft Exchange Server generates an event less than or equal to the logging level, the event is logged.


Logging Level Options

None: Only critical events, error events, and events with a logging level of zero are logged. This is the default level.

Minimum: Events with a logging level of 1 or lower are logged.

Medium: Events with a logging level of 3 or lower are logged.

Maximum: Events with a logging level of 5 or lower are logged.


General (Containers)

A container is an object in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory that contains other objects or containers. For example, the Configuration container holds objects such as the DS Site Configuration object, as well as containers such as the Connections container.

Use the General property page to specify a display name for the container. This is the name that appears in the Administrator window. The directory name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server Setup and cannot be changed.

You can also type an optional note of up to 1024 characters in the Administrative Note box.


Permissions (Containers)

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have for this container. When you grant users permissions for this container, they inherit the same level of permissions for all objects below that container in the directory hierarchy.

You delegate permissions to users or groups by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has to an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add button

  Remove button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below the selected object in the directory hierarchy.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the members of a distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As (Servers Container only)	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner (Servers Container only)	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Replication (Servers Container only)	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions for existing objects. For example, without this permission, a user can grant permissions to new mailboxes but cannot modify permissions for existing mailboxes.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Move Down

Moves the selected button down one line in the Toolbar Buttons list and to the right one space on the toolbar.


Move Up

Moves the selected button up one line in the Toolbar Buttons list and to the left one space on the toolbar.


Reset

Restores the default button settings to the toolbar in the active window.


Remove

Moves the selected button in the Toolbar Buttons list to the Available Buttons list and removes the button from the toolbar.


Add

Moves the selected button in the Available Buttons list to the Toolbar Buttons list and adds the button to the toolbar. The added button appears above the currently selected button in the Toolbar Buttons list and to the left of the corresponding button on the toolbar.


Customize Toolbar

Opens the Customize Toolbar dialog box, where you can add, remove, and rearrange buttons on the toolbar. The toolbar includes a set of default buttons. You can remove buttons for commands that you rarely use, add other buttons for commands that you frequently use, and specify the order in which the buttons appear on the toolbar.

  Add

  Remove

  Reset

  Move Up

  Move Down


Backup and Restore

It is important to perform backups to protect your organization’s information and messaging system. You should implement a backup plan that includes:

Choosing backup devices.

Choosing a backup routine.

Performing timely backups.

Verifying and validating backups.

Documenting and archiving backups.

You can use Windows NT Backup to back up and restore Microsoft Exchange Server directories and information stores within your organization. The Backup program enables you to protect data from accidental loss or hardware and media failures by using a tape drive to back up and restore information. The information can be located on any server in any site in your organization, and the backup can be performed locally or over the network.

During backup, users can continue to use the server. When information is being restored, Microsoft Exchange Server services stop and users cannot use the servers until they have been restored.

Note

You can use the At.exe utility provided with Windows NT to schedule times when backups are automatically performed. This utility can also be used to schedule a backup on another Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

For more information about backing up and restoring data, see your Windows NT Server documentation and Microsoft Exchange Server Maintenance and Troubleshooting.


Backup Read Pointer definition
Backup Read Pointer

A logical pointer into the database file that indicates what part of the database file has been processed.


Circular Logging definition
Circular Logging

Automatically overwrites the oldest transaction log files after the information they contain has been committed to the database, thus reducing disk storage space requirements. This feature is turned off by default when Microsoft Exchange Server is installed.


Log File Checkpoint definition
Log File Checkpoint

Indicates the earliest point where a database operation is logged (whether committed or not), but its corresponding changes on database pages are not yet committed to disk. Microsoft Exchange Server replays the transaction log file to restore the database during recovery.


Database Page definition
Database Page

The Microsoft Exchange database server is a sequence of pages, each of which is a 4 KB block of data.


Transaction Log File definition
Transaction Log File

Files used for backup and recovery that store all write transactions performed on the directory and information store databases. Transaction log files are stored in the MDBDATA and DSDATA subdirectories, and their names have the form Edbxxxxx.log, where x is a hexadecimal number from 0 to F. The default size of each complete log file is 5 MB.


Inbound Site definition
Inbound Site

Sites from which local sites receive directory information through a directory replication connector.


Outbound Site definition
Outbound Site

Sites to which the local bridgehead server sends updated directory information.


Global Group definition
Global Group

Group of recipients that can include mailbox users, custom recipients, distribution lists, and mailbox agents.


Link Monitor definition
Link Monitor

Monitors the round-trip time between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and another server or foreign system. Notification occurs if a test message takes longer than expected to make the round trip.


Server Monitor definition
Server Monitor

Monitors the condition of servers and their associated services and clocks in a site. Notification occurs if a service fails to start or shuts down, clients cannot connect to the server, or the server is not on the network. The server monitor can also restart computers or services and synchronize the system times.


MTA Transport Stack definition
MTA Transport Stack

Defines the transport that is used with an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector to connect a Microsoft Exchange Server computer to another system. The server on which the stack is installed processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference the stack.


Role definition
Role

Sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object.


Status Bar definition
Status Bar

Displays information about a selected command and indicates progress during an action. The box on the right displays the total number of objects in the selected container.


Service definition
Service

Extends the functionality of Microsoft Exchange Server. Services include Microsoft Exchange Server components, server gateways, mailbox agents, and add-ins. Each service is represented in the directory by an object that enables the user to administer the service using the Administrator program.


Domain Controller definition
Domain Controller

Refers to the Windows NT Server computer that maintains the security database of all user accounts in a domain. Windows NT Server domains can have one primary domain controller (PDC) and one or more backup domain controllers (BDCs).


Mailbox definition
Mailbox

The delivery location for all incoming mail for a designated owner. Information in a user's mailbox is stored in the private information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A mailbox can contain messages, attachments, documents, and more. Mailboxes are associated with Windows NT user accounts.


Profile definition
Profile

A group of settings that provide Microsoft Exchange Server with essential information about a client's configuration. It contains the delivery location for incoming messages, files, and other items, the location of the user's personal address book, and a list of all the information services that are available. A user may have multiple profiles on a single client for different configurations; however, only one profile can be used at any one time.


Administrator Window definition
Administrator Window

The main user interface of the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. The Administrator window provides the tools needed to manage and configure all objects, including organizations, sites, and servers.


Properties definition
Properties

The attributes of a Microsoft Exchange Server directory object, selected by using property pages for the specified object. For example, to modify the permissions on a mailbox, make changes in the mailbox's Permissions property page.


Multi-Valued Property definition
Multi-Valued Property

A property that has multiple values. For example, an address with multiple values includes MS Mail (PC), X.400, and SMTP addresses.


Local Area Network definition
Local Area Network

A group of computers and other devices dispersed over a relatively limited area and connected by a communications link that enables any device to interact with any other in the network.


Distribution List definition
Distribution List

A collection of recipients that are grouped together and addressed as a single recipient. A message addressed to a distribution list will be delivered to every user in the list. Administrators can create distribution lists that are available in the Address Book. Users can also create personal distribution lists and add them to their personal address book (PAB).


Information Store definition
Information Store

A Microsoft Exchange Server core component. The information store is server-based storage that contains users' mailboxes and public and private folders. It enforces security on the information and maintains information in two databases, the public information store and the private information store.


Schema Attributes definition
Schema Attributes

Properties that describe Microsoft Exchange Server directory objects.


Permissions definition
Permissions

Controls how a particular object is accessed and provides specific authorization to perform an action.


Custom Recipient definition
Custom Recipient

A recipient in a foreign system whose address is in the Address Book.


Address Book definition
Address Book

Makes recipients (mailboxes, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders) in the directory available to users so they can access information. They can also use the Address Book to address messages. The Address Book can contain one or more address lists.


Container definition
Container

In the Administrator program, an object that contains other objects. For example, the Recipients container is composed of recipient objects.


Directory definition
Directory

The directory stores all the information available about an organization's resources and users, including mailboxes, public folders, distribution lists, and servers. Other components use the directory to map addresses and route messages. The directory is automatically replicated to all servers in a site, and it can be configured to be replicated automatically to servers in other sites. All recipient objects in the directory are contained in the Address Book, which users can use like a telephone directory. The directory is based on the International Standards Organization (ISO) X.500 specification.


Recipient definition
Recipient

An object in the directory that can receive messages and information. Recipients are mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and public folders.


Raw Object definition
Raw Object

A unique object that you can create when running the Administrator program in raw mode. A raw object is made up of various schema attributes that you specify.


Public Folder definition
Public Folder

A folder located on Microsoft Exchange Server computers that facilitates the exchange of all types of information between groups of people in an organization. A public folder can include information, such as messages, spreadsheets, graphics, and voice mail. It can be configured for different types of applications, for example, bulletin boards, discussion forums, or customer tracking systems.


Parent definition
Parent

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is superior to another object, the child object. For example, the Server container is the parent object of the server object because the server object is in the Server container. Any permissions on the parent object are inherited by the child object.


Raw Directory definition
Raw Directory

A view of the directory that exposes all of the schema attributes that make up individual objects.


Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) definition
Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI)

A common interface that Microsoft Outlook components use to access data from the server components. Messaging applications and information services that comply with Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) can be used with Microsoft Exchange Server and Outlook to provide additional functionality.


Directory Schema definition
Directory Schema

(The schema). Defines the structure for information in the directory. The schema defines the rules for structuring information, such as which attributes are associated with which objects and which types of values can be associated with which attributes. The schema also defines the relationship between objects. The directory enforces these rules.


Single-Instance Message definition
Single-Instance Message

A message that is sent to more than one mailbox on the same server. Microsoft Exchange Server stores one instance of the message in the server's private information store, which reduces disk storage requirements.


Delegate definition
Delegate

In Microsoft Outlook, a representative with special permissions to manage mail for another user, send mail for another user, or both. These permissions are granted by the other user or by the administrator.

Public Delegate

A public delegate is a recipient who has authority to receive and send messages on behalf of another mailbox. For example, a sales manager can make an administrative assistant a public delegate so that standard messages can be sent in response to product questions. Because the administrative assistant is a public delegate, it appears as if the manager sent the message.


Auto Reply Message definition
Auto Reply Message

A message generated by a rule set in an AutoAssistant. The message is automatically sent to another user in the organization. For example, you can create an auto-reply message if you plan to be out of the office for an extended period and want to notify those sending mail of your absence.


Raw Mode definition
Raw Mode

A mode of running the Administrator program that exposes all of the directory schema attributes that make up individual objects.


Event definition
Event

Any significant occurrence in a system or application. Each event generated by Microsoft Exchange Server is assigned a number from 0 to 5 to describe its significance, with 0 being the most significant and 5 being the least significant.


Add User Or Group

Use the Add Users And Groups dialog box to add Windows NT accounts and groups to the list of users with permissions on a particular object.

  List Names From

  Names

  Add Button

  Members Button

  Search Button

  Add Name


List Names From

Displays the domain name. Click the down arrow to display a list of available domains.


Names

Lists the names in the domain selected in the List Names From box.


Add Button

Copies the name selected in the Names box to the Add Name box.


Members Button

Displays the Local Group Membership dialog box, which lists the members of the group selected in the Names box.


Search Button

Displays the Find Account dialog box, which is used to locate the user or group name that you want to grant permissions to.


Add Name

Lists the user and group names that you want to grant permissions to. You can add a name to this list by selecting the name from the Names box and choosing Add.

Choose OK to copy the user and group names to the Windows NT accounts with permissions box in the Permissions property page.


Local Group Membership

Displays the members of the local group.

  Members of Local Group

  Add Button

  Member Button


Members of Local Group

Lists the members of the group you selected in the Names box of the Add Users and Groups dialog box.


Add Button

Copies the user names you select to the Add Names box on the Add Users and Groups dialog box.


Member Button

Displays the Global Group Membership dialog box, which lists the members of the group selected in the Members of Local Group box.


Find Account

Helps you locate a Windows NT account. You can search all domains or specific domains.

  Find User Or Group

  Search Button

  Search All

  Search Only In

  Search Results

  Add Button


Find User Or Group

Type the user or group name you want to locate and choose Search. The Search Results dialog box displays the user or group name(s) matching your entry.


Search Button

Starts the search process. Find Account searches for the entry you type in the Find User or Group box and displays the name(s) matching your entry in the Search Results dialog box.


Search All

Choose this option to search all organization domains for the user or group name you specified in the Find User or Group box.


Search Only In

Choose this option to search for the user or group name you typed in the Find User or Group box only in the domains you select. To select more than one domain, press and hold [Ctrl] while choosing the appropriate domains.


Search Results

Displays the user or group name(s) matching your entry in the Find User or Group box.


Add Button

Adds the user or group name selected in the Search Results dialog box to the Add Names box on the Add Users and Groups dialog box.


Details

Displays detailed information about the selected message in a queue.

Option	Description
Originator	The full, distinguished name of the message sender.
MTSID	The unique message ID.
Submit Time	The time that the message was submitted to this message transfer agent (MTA).
Priority	The priority (Low, Normal, or High) of the message.
Size	The size (K) of the message.


Change Priority

Allows you to change the priority of the selected message. You can choose Low, Normal, or High. Messages with High priority are transferred first.


New X.400 Connector

Select the type of X.400 connector you want to create. The Connector Type box displays the types of connectors you can create based on the installed MTA transport stacks. Microsoft Exchange Server supports the following X.400 connector types:

X.25

TCP/IP

TP4


New MTA Transport Stack

Allows you to create a new message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. You must create an MTA transport stack before attempting to create an X.400 or Dynamic RAS Connector.

  Type

  Server


Type

Select the type of transport stack you want to install. Before creating a connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, if you want to create an X.400 TP/4 connector, you must first install and configure a TP/4 stack.


Server

Select the server where you want to install the message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. This server processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference that stack.


Directory Import Container

Shows a graphical representation of all recipient containers in your site. Select the recipient container where you want to import directory information and create recipients.


Directory Export Container

Shows a graphical representation of all recipient containers in your site. Select the recipient container that you want to export directory information from.


Clean Mailbox

Specify which messages should be deleted from the selected mailbox. Cleaning the mailbox increases space in the server's private information store.

  Messages—Older than (in days)

  Messages—Greater than (K)

  Sensitivity

  Read items

  Default types

  Custom message types

  Action

  Delete folder associated information


Messages—Older than (in days)

Type a value representing days, then choose the basis for the date. You can choose the date the message was last modified, or the date the message was received. All messages older than the specified value will be deleted.


Messages—Greater than (K)

Type a value representing kilobytes. All messages larger than the specified number of kilobytes will be deleted.


Sensitivity

Select the default sensitivity level that you want to assign to your outgoing mail. Messages can be assigned one of four sensitivity levels. All messages with the selected sensitivity level will be deleted.

Option	Description
Normal	Leaves the item header blank and sends messages with no assigned sensitivity level.
Personal	Contains nonbusiness information.
Private	Prohibits any recipient from modifying your original message when it is replied to or forwarded.
Confidential	Handles the message according to your organization's policy on confidentiality.


Read items

Delete messages whether or not they have been read.

Select	To
Read Items	Deletes all messages that have been read.
Unread Items	Deletes all messages that have not been read.
Read and Unread Mail	Deletes read and unread messages.


Default types

Select to delete mail messages and other messages that contain calendar entries, notes, journal entries, contacts, and tasks.


Custom message types

Select to delete Custom message types. Custom messages are specialized Outlook display forms and user-designed Inter-Personal Message (IPM) templates with a message class syntax of IPM.<messagename>.

Select	To
None	Preserves all custom message classes.
All	Deletes all custom messages.
User defined	Deletes only specified message class.


Action

Indicate what action should be taken on deleted messages.

Delete items immediately deletes all messages that meet the specified criteria.

Move items to deleted items folder moves deleted messages into the selected user's Deleted items folder. Messages in the Deleted items folder can be retrieved, viewed, and moved to other folders.


Delete Folder Associated Information

Select to delete any views, deferred action messages, or other rules that are associated with the mailbox.


Server Browser

The Server Browser shows a graphical representation of the sites in your organization and the servers in each site. This dialog box appears any time you need to indicate a specific Microsoft Exchange Server computer that will be used with a particular task. If you do not see the server you want, double-click a site to expand the list of all servers in that site. Select a server and choose Select to use the specified server for the task you are completing.


Containers

The Containers dialog box shows a graphical representation of all recipient containers in the site you are currently administering.


Windows NT User Extraction

Exports multiple objects to an import file by reading a list of users from a Windows NT domain.

  Windows NT Domain

  Windows NT Domain Controller

  Output Filename


Windows NT Domain

Select the Windows NT Domain for which you want to extract user data.


Windows NT Domain Controller

Select the name of the primary or backup domain controller for the Windows NT domain you selected (in the Windows NT Domain field).


Output Filename

Displays the name of the file containing the extracted data. To specify another output file name, choose Browse to display the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the appropriate output file name.


NetWare User Extraction

Exports multiple objects to an import file by reading a list of users from a NetWare server. The resulting import file can then be used by batch import.

  NetWare Server Name

  NetWare User

  NetWare User Password

  Output Filename


NetWare Server Name

Type the name of the NetWare server containing the user data you want to extract.


NetWare User

Type your NetWare user name.


NetWare User Password

Type your NetWare user password.


Output Filename

Displays the name of the file containing the extracted data. To specify another output file name, choose Browse to display the Microsoft Exchange Administrator dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the appropriate output file name.


Modify Age Limits

Use the Modify Age Limits dialog box to set an age limit for the replica of a public folder that exists on this public information store, or for all replicas of a public folder that exist throughout your organization. Administrators in other sites can override this by setting an explicit age limit for the public folder replica in the site.

Note

If you set an age limit for all public folders in this public information store or for a specific replica, it overrides the age limit you set for all replicas of the selected public folder.

  Folder display name

  Items in this folder replica older than have been removed

  This replica (days)

  All replicas (days)

  Age limit for all folders on this information store (days)


Folder Display Name

The display name of the selected folder. This name appears in the Administrator window.


Items in this folder replica older than have been removed

Shows that items in the selected public folder replica that are older than the displayed value (in days) have expired and been deleted.


This Replica (days)

A value (in days) that represents an age limit for the replica of the selected public folder that exists only on this public information store. The age limit you specify here does not affect other replicas of the public folder that exist on other servers in your organization.


All Replicas (days)

A value (in days) that represents an age limit for all replicas of the selected public folder that exist throughout your organization.


Age limit for all folders on this information store (days)

An age limit for messages in this public folder replica. Because age limits can be set on all folders, on all replicas, and on specific replicas, the effective age limit provides an easy way for you to see the age limit that is currently in effect for this public folder replica.


Primary Windows NT Account

Select the Windows NT account representing the user who will be the primary user of this mailbox on a day-to-day basis. When you make a Windows NT account the primary Windows NT account, it is automatically given mailbox owner permissions, which provides rights to log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.

  Select an Existing Windows NT Account

  Create a New Windows NT Account


Select an Existing Windows NT Account

Opens the Add User or Group dialog box where you can select or type the domain and name of an existing Windows NT account.


Create a New Windows NT Account

Opens the Create Windows NT Account dialog box where you can choose an existing Windows NT domain and type the name of the Windows NT account you wish to create. To create a new Windows NT account, you must be a domain administrator in the selected domain.


Create Windows NT Account

Creates a new Windows NT account that will be the Primary Windows NT account for the mailbox you are currently configuring.

In the NT Domain box, choose an existing Windows NT domain.

In the Account Name box, type the name of the Windows NT account you wish to create. To create a new Windows NT account, you must be a domain administrator in the selected domain.


About Microsoft Exchange Administrator

Displays version and copyright information for your Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator software.

Choose System Info to display the Windows NT Diagnostics dialog box.


New Site Connector

Enter the name of a server in the target site. You must be able to establish a connection to the specified server. Microsoft Exchange Server uses information obtained from the remote server to correctly configure the site connector.

You must have administrative rights in the site you are attempting to connect to. In addition, if the remote site is on a different Windows NT domain, you must have Windows NT administrative rights in that domain.


Separators

Separators are used to distinguish different types of information in the file. Specify the separators that are used in the file you are importing or exporting. There are three types of separators:

  Column

  Quote

  Property


Column

The first line of every import or export file contains column headings describing the information contained in the file. These headings are separated by the column separator. All subsequent lines of the file use the column separator to separate the supplied data fields. You can choose a comma, semicolon, tab, or space.


Quote

Use the quote separator for fields that contain the column separator character. For example, if a recipient's display name is Williams, Adele, you would enclose the field in quotes to indicate that the comma is not intended to be treated as a column separator. For example, "Williams, Adele". You can choose a single quote (') or a double quote (").


Property

Use the property separator for fields with multivalued properties. For example, the Members field of a distribution list might contain the names of multiple recipients. In an import file, the Members field might appear as follows:

adelew%alig%annd%aprilc%billl%chiaras.

You can choose any of the following characters for the property separator:

!, #, $, %, &, *, @.


Custom Recipient E-Mail Address

Allows you to modify the existing e-mail address for this custom recipient, or create an e-mail address of a different type.

  Modify Existing E-Mail Address

  Create New E-Mail Address


Modify Existing E-Mail Address

Choose this option if you want to modify this custom recipient's existing e-mail address.


Create New E-Mail Address

Choose this option if you want to create another type of e-mail address for this custom recipient.


Check Box Control

Creates a check-box control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Text


Edit Control

Creates an Edit Control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Length

  Multiline


Group Box Control

Creates a group box in a template. Use a group box to group related controls and fields on a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Text


Label Control

Creates a label in a template. Labels are text fields that typically identify another control or field.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Text


List Box Control

Creates a list box in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field

  Display Horizontal Scroll Bar

  Display Vertical Scroll Bar


Multi-Valued List Box Control/Multi-Valued Drop Down Control

Creates a multi-valued list box or a multi-valued drop-down control in a template.

  X Coordinate

  Y Coordinate

  Width

  Height

  Field


Page Break Control

Creates a page break in a template. Use a page break if you want the resulting template dialog box to have multiple tabbed pages.

  Text

  Help Context


Attribute Editor Selection

Allows you to choose the editor you want to use to view or modify a particular raw attribute. Certain attributes can be modified based on their text value, or using a more graphical editor. For example, attributes that represent scheduled events can generally be viewed or modified either in text format, or using a graphical schedule page.


Incoming Template Mapping

Maps a string from an incoming Microsoft Mail 3.x directory template to a corresponding Microsoft Exchange Server attribute. For example, you can map the Microsoft Mail phone template field to the recipient Office Telephone attribute.

  Map the String

  To the Attribute


Map the String

Select the incoming Microsoft Mail string you want to map.


To the Attribute

Select the Microsoft Exchange attribute to which you want to map the incoming Microsoft Mail string.


Outgoing Template Mapping

Maps a Microsoft Exchange Server attribute to a corresponding Microsoft Mail 3.x string. For example, you can map the Microsoft Mail phone template field to the recipient Office Telephone attribute.

Maps a Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attribute to outgoing Microsoft Mail-compatible template information. For example, you can map the Microsoft Exchange Office Telephone recipient attribute to the Microsoft Mail phone template field.

  Map the Attribute

  To the String


Map the Attribute

Select the outgoing Microsoft Exchange attribute you want to map.


To the String

Select the Microsoft Mail string to which you want to map the outgoing Microsoft Exchange attribute.


Link Monitor Window

Displays the condition of monitored links. Each line in the display represents one connection. You can sort the display using the column heading buttons. You can also change the width of the columns to make the display easier to read.

Column	Description
Icon	Represents the link status.   Up   Down   Warning state   Not yet monitored
Server	Server to which the ping message was sent and from which it is expected to be returned.
Last Measurement	Time that the last ping message was sent from the sending server. Displayed in local time.
Last Change	Time that the status of the link changed. Displayed in local time.
Last Time	Time that the status of the link changed. Displayed in local time.
Comment	Condition of the link between the sending and destination server as measured by the round-trip time of a ping message sent between them.


Server Monitors Window

Displays one line for each server being monitored. The status of the server, as represented by the icon, reflects the status of all server components. If any component is down, the server is considered to be down.

Column	Description
Icon	Condition of all components of the server.   Up   Down   Warning state   Not yet monitored
Server	The server being monitored.
Last measure	Time the last remote procedure call (RPC) was sent, displayed in local time.
Last change	Time the condition of any component of the server changed.


Comments

Comments describe the status of the link based on bounce thresholds set in the configuration.

Comment	Description
The link is operational.	The ping message was returned in less than or equal to the time specified in the bounce threshold.
Bounced mail took (time).	The last ping message was returned, but the bounce time exceeded the warning threshold on the link property page. The value shows the actual elapsed time.
A message was due on (time).	The last ping message sent has not yet returned, and the elapsed time has already exceeded the warning threshold.
Not monitored yet.	No ping messages have been returned and any sent are not yet late.


Help Finder Dialog Box


Confirm Stop Command

Verify that you want to stop the selected service.


Columns

For property pages that display information in columns, the Columns dialog box allows you to select the columns you want to view, and customize the width and order of the selected columns.

Options	Description
Available columns	Lists the column names displayed in the information store status property pages.
Add	Adds a column to the Show the following columns box.
Remove	Removes a column from the Show the following columns box.
Move Up	Moves a column name up one position in the Show the following columns box.
Move Down	Moves a column name down one position in the Show the following columns box.
Reset	Moves default column names into the Show the following columns box.
Width	Displays the column width in pixels. Type a value (in pixels) in the Width box to change the column width.


Custom Attributes

When searching for a recipient, you can use any previously defined custom attributes as your search criteria. Any recipients with a matching value in the specified custom attribute field will be found.


Find Recipients

Lets you search for recipients anywhere in your organization based on a variety of criteria. You can double-click any recipients found by the search to view the complete set of properties for that recipient.

  Look In

  Find Recipients Containing

  Find Now Button

  Custom Button

  New Search Button


Look In

Displays the container in which the current search will be conducted. Choose Container to open the Find Container dialog box where you can choose a specific recipient container in which to conduct your search.


Find Recipients Containing

Enter information in any of the fields provided. Only those recipients with matching information in the corresponding fields will be returned by the search.


Find Now Button

Searches based on the current search criteria.


Custom Button

Allows you to search for recipients based on any previously defined custom attributes.


New Search Button

Clears all previously set search criteria so you can conduct a new search.


Find Container

Displays a graphical representation of all recipient containers in your organization. Select the recipient container in which you want to conduct your search.


New Information Store

Allows you to create either a new public or private information store on servers where the selected information store type does not currently exist.

  Information Store Type

  Server


Information Store Type

Choose Public to create a new public information store or Private to create a new private information store.


Server

Choose the server on which you want to create the new public or private information store.


New Notification

Provides a list from which you choose a notification type.

Launch a Process

Mail Message

Windows NT Alert


Escalation Editor

Allows you to specify the time delay of the notification process and the notification state (warning or alert). You must indicate the notification destination.

Launch Process

Mail Message

Windows NT Alert


Escalation Editor (Launch Process)

Use the Escalation Editor dialog box to configure notification applications such as a fax application that alerts users who are not logged on to the network.

  Time delay

  Alert only

  Test button

  File button

  Launch process

  Command line parameters

  Append notification text to parameter list


Time delay

Type the amount of time after the monitor enters an alert state or a warning state that you want the notification process to start. Select either Seconds, Minutes, or Hours. The default is 15 minutes.


Alert only

Select to send notification only if the monitor is in an alert state. Clear to send notification if the monitor is in both the warning state and the alert state.


Test button

Verify that the process works as expected.


Launch process

Displays the name of the file selected to start the notification process.


Command line parameters

Type special command-line parameters if appropriate.


File button

Select a file name. This name appears in the Launch process box.


Append notification text to parameter list

Select to attach the standard notification text to the parameters list specified in the Command line parameters box. Clear to avoid attaching any text to the parameter list.


Escalation Editor (Mail Message)

You can use mail messages to alert a specified recipient when a problem occurs. This type of notification is useful for historical tracking and roving users.

  Time delay

  Alert only

  Test button

  Mailbox to notify

  Recipient button


Mailbox to notify

Displays the recipient chosen in the Recipients dialog box.


Recipient button

Select a name from a list of recipients. This name appears in the Mailbox to notify box.


Escalation Editor (Windows NT Alert)

You can use network alerts to send an alert message to a computer. However, an alert message cannot be delivered if the computer is not turned on, if no one is currently logged on to the computer, or if the messaging service is not running. This type of notification is best for monitoring users on the same local area network (LAN) as the monitor.

  Time delay

  Alert only

  Test button

  Computer to alert


Computer to alert

Type the name of the computer to receive the alert message.


Don't Tell Me Again

Controls whether this message box appears again.


New Directory Replication Connector

Creates a new directory replication connector, which describes a relationship between two Microsoft Exchange Server sites that share directory information. Before creating a directory replication connector, be sure that messages can be sent between the two sites (using either a Site Connector, Dynamic RAS Connector, or X.400 Connector).

  Remote Site Name

  Server in Remote Site

  Is the Remote Site Available on This Network?


Remote Site Name

Type the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server site that you intend to replicate directory information with.


Server in Remote Site

Type the name of a server in the remote site.


Is the Remote Site Available on This Network?

Indicate whether the remote site is located on the same physical network as your site.

No

The remote site is not on the same network. You must manually create and configure a directory replication connector in the remote site.

Yes

The remote site is on the same network. You have the option of creating and configuring directory replication connectors in both the local and remote sites concurrently.

Configure Both Sites

If you chose Yes, select this box if you want to create and configure a directory replication connector in the remote site now.


Custom Site Addresses

Use this property page to create or edit a site addressing rule to generate foreign e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site. This address enables users on foreign messaging systems, such as Lotus cc:Mail, to exchange messages with Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

Select the topic that pertains to the address type you want to configure.

cc:Mail Properties

Notes Properties

PROFS Properties

SMTP Properties

SNADS Properties

X.400 Properties


cc:Mail Properties

Use the cc:Mail Properties Address property page to create or edit the cc:Mail site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by the cc:Mail E-mail Address Generator when creating addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

When the Microsoft Exchange Connector for Lotus cc:Mail is installed in a site, the cc:Mail E-mail Address Generator creates the following default address for every recipient, public folder, distribution list, and custom recipient in the site:

CCMAIL (Lastname, Firstname at siteproxy)

Although you cannot modify the address type (CCMAIL), you can modify the site address format. For example, the recipient Maria Black in the site Ferguson will, by default, have the following cc:Mail address:

Black, Maria at Ferguson

Use the following format specifiers to modify the default address format.

Format specifier	Name component
%g	First name
%i	Initials
%s	Last name
%d	Display name
%m	Alias
%#specifier	The number of characters for the user name. For example, the format specifier %3s applied to the last name Black generates Bla.
  Type

  Address


Notes Properties

Use the Notes Properties Address property page to create or edit the Lotus Notes site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by the Lotus Notes E-mail Address Generator when creating addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

When the Microsoft Exchange Connector for Lotus Notes is installed in a site, the Lotus Notes E-mail Address Generator creates the following default address for every recipient, public folder, distribution list, and custom recipient in the site:

NOTES (Display Name/Site/Organization@Domain)

Although you cannot modify the address type (NOTES), you can modify the site address format. For example, the recipient Maria Black in the site Ferguson will, by default, have the following Lotus Notes address:

Maria Black/Ferguson/FergBard@Exchange

Use the following format specifiers to modify the default address format.

Format specifier	Name component
&g	First name
&i	Initials
&s	Last name
&d	Display name
&m	Alias
&#specifier	The number of characters for the user name. For example, the format specifier &3s applied to the last name Black generates Bla.
  Type

  Address


PROFS Properties

Use the PROFS Properties Address property page to create or edit the OfficeVision/VM, PROFS, and CMS site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by the PROFS E-mail Address Generator when creating addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

When the Microsoft Exchange Connector for OfficeVision/VM is installed in a site, the E-mail Address Generator creates the following default address for every recipient, public folder, distribution list, and custom recipient in the site:

PROFS (Site(Alias))

Although you cannot modify the address type (PROFS), you can modify the site address format. For example, the recipient Maria Black with the alias mblack in the site Ferguson will, by default, have the following PROFS address:

FERGUSON(MBLACK)

Note: OfficeVision/VM, PROFS, and CMS do not differentiate between upper- and lower-case characters in addresses.

Use the following format specifiers to modify the default address format.

Format specifier	Name component
&g	First name
&i	Initials
&s	Last name
&d	Display name
&m	Alias
&#specifier	The number of characters for the user name. For example, the format specifier &3s applied to the last name Black generates Bla.
  Type

  Address


SNADS Properties

Use the SNADS Properties Address property page to create or edit the SNADS site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by the SNADS E-mail Address Generator when creating addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

When the Microsoft Exchange Connector for SNADS is installed in a site, the SNADS E-mail Address Generator creates the following default address for every recipient, public folder, distribution list, and custom recipient in the site:

SNADS (Site(Alias))

Although you cannot modify the address type (SNADS), you can modify the site address format. For example, the recipient Maria Black with the alias mblack in the site Ferguson will, by default, have the following SNADS address:

FERGUSON(MBLACK)

Note: SNADS does not differentiate between upper- and lower-case characters in addresses.

Use the following format specifiers to modify the default address format.

Format specifier	Name component
&g	First name
&i	Initials
&s	Last name
&d	Display name
&m	Alias
&#specifier	The number of characters for the user name. For example, the format specifier &3s applied to the last name Black generates Bla.
  Type

  Address


SMTP Properties

Use the SMTP Properties Address property page to create or edit the Internet site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by the Internet E-mail Address Generator when creating Internet addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

When Microsoft Exchange Server is installed in a site, the following default address is created for every recipient, public folder, distribution list, and custom recipient in the site:

SMTP (alias@siteproxy)

Although you cannot modify the address type (SMTP), you can modify the site address format. For example, the recipient Maria Black with the alias mblack in the site Ferguson will, by default, have the following Internet address:

mblack@Ferguson

Use the following format specifiers to modify the default address format.

Format specifier	Name component
%g	First name
%i	Initials
%s	Last name
%d	Display name
%m	Alias
%#specifier	The number of characters for the user name. For example, the format specifier %3s applied to the last name Black generates Bla.
  Type

  Address


X400 Properties
X.400 Properties

Use the X.400 Properties Address property page to create or edit the X.400 site addressing rule for this site. This site address contains site-specific addressing information used by Microsoft Exchange Server when creating X.400 e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients in this site.

  Organization units (ou)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management domain name (a)

  Country (c)


New E-Mail Address

Use New E-Mail Address to create an e-mail address for a Microsoft Exchange Server custom recipient, mailbox, or distribution list. The list varies depending on the connectors and gateways that have been installed. Select the type of entry you want to create, and then choose OK.


General (Microsoft Mail Address Properties)

Creates a Microsoft Mail e-mail address when you want to add an address that identifies a recipient to Microsoft Mail for PC Networks.

  Network Name

  Postoffice Name

  Mailbox Name


Network Name

Type the network name for this postoffice.


Postoffice Name

Type the name of the postoffice where the recipient resides.


Mailbox Name

Type the address that will be used to identify this recipient to a Microsoft Mail (PC) network.


General (Internet Address Properties)

Type the new Internet mail address for the custom recipient and choose OK.


General (X.400 Address Properties)

Use the General property page to specify the X.400 address properties for the new custom recipient.

  Given name (g)

  Surname (s)

  Initials (i)

  Generation qual (q)

  Common name (cn)

  Organization (o)

  Organizational units (ou)

  PRMD (p)

  ADMD (a)

  Country (c)


Country (c)

Select (or type) the country name for the X.400 address.


ADMD (a)

Type the administrative management domain name.


PRMD (p)

Type the private management domain name.


Organizational units (ou)

In the Organizational Units boxes (OU1 to OU4), type the X.400 address attributes (up to 32 alphanumeric characters), if any, required to identify the custom recipient.


Organization (o)

Type the organization name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) in which the X.400 recipient is to be located.


Common name (cn)

Type the common name for the X.400 recipient, if appropriate.


Generation qual (q)

Type the generation qualifier for the X.400 recipient.


Initials (i)

Type the initials for the X.400 recipient.


Surname (s)

Type the last name of the X.400 recipient.


Given name (g)

Type the first name of the X.400 recipient.


Address (Other Address Properties)

Use this dialog box to specify the e-mail address and type for the new custom recipient.

  E-mail address

  E-mail type


E-mail type

Specify which type of e-mail address you entered in the E-mail address box.


E-mail address

Type the e-mail address for the new custom recipient.


Auto Naming (Options)

Use Auto Naming Options to control the way display and alias names for mailboxes and custom recipients are automatically generated. When you create a new mailbox or custom recipient and type in the recipient's first name, initials, and last name, the display and alias names are automatically created based on the auto naming options you select.

Use any of the following variables or characters when setting up display and alias name generation:

Use this	To put this in the Display or Alias Name box
%First	All text from the First Name box
%Last	All text from the Last Name box
%Initials	All text from the Last Name box
,	A comma
.	A period
You can also use a numerical value to indicate how many characters from the First Name, Last Name, or Initials boxes should be used. For example, %1Initial takes only the first character from the Initials box. Similarly, %2First takes the first 2 characters from the First Name box.

  Display Name Generation

  Alias Name Generation


Display Name Generation

Choose the method for automatic display name generation.

Option	Description	Example
None	Disables automatic display name generation.	--
First last	Creates a display name based on the First Name and Last Name boxes.	Ali Gobi
Last, first	Creates a display name based on the Last Name and First Name boxes, and separates the names with a comma.	Gobi, Ali
First initials last	Creates a display name based on the First Name, Initials (first character only, followed by a period), and Last Name boxes.	Ali H. Gobi
Custom	Allows you to enter any combination of the available variables and characters to create a custom display name.	--


Alias Name Generation

Choose the method for automatic alias name generation.

Option	Description	Example
None	Disables automatic alias name generation.	--
First name and last initial	Creates an alias name based on the first name and first character of the last name.	AliG
First initial and last name	Creates an alias name based on the first character of the first name and the entire last name.	AGobi
First initials last	Creates an alias name based on the first character of the first name, initials, and last name.	AHG
Custom	Allows you to enter any combination of the available variables and characters to create a custom alias name.	--


File Format (Options)

Specifies the separators and the character set used in comma-separated value (.csv) files generated by choosing the Save Window Contents command on the File menu.

Note

The File Format property page contains options that are also used as the defaults for directory import and export. However, you can override the default values when using the Directory Import and Directory Export commands.


Permissions (Options)

You can customize the way Permissions property pages are displayed throughout the Administrator program.

  Default Windows NT Domain

  Show Permissions Page for All Objects

  Display Rights for Roles on Permissions Page

  Delete Primary Windows NT Account When Deleting Mailbox

  Try to Find Matching Windows NT Account When Creating Mailbox


Default Windows NT Domain

Choose a default domain from the drop-down list. This domain will be selected by default any time you want to add a user to the list of users with permissions on a particular object.

The domain you enter here is used to validate accounts.

Warning

Be sure that the domain you enter can be authenticated by the domain in which your service account is located.


Show Permissions Page for All Objects

By default, Permissions property pages are hidden. Choose this option to display Permissions property pages for all objects that have one.


Display Rights for Roles on Permissions Page

When checked, displays the list of rights on the Permissions property page. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has.


Delete Primary Windows NT Account When Deleting Mailbox

When checked, deletes the associated Windows NT account when a mailbox is deleted.


Try to Find Matching Windows NT Account When Creating Mailbox

When selected, matches the associated Windows NT account, if any, with a new mailbox.


Showing Permissions Pages for All Objects
Show Permissions pages for all objects

By default, Permissions property pages are hidden. To display Permissions property pages for all objects, use the Options command on the Tools menu, and then select the Permissions tab. Select the Show Permissions page for all objects check box.


Modify Mailbox Manager

Use Modify Mailbox Manager to specify or change the manager for the selected mailbox. The manager can be a mailbox or a custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Select an Internet News Administrator

Use this dialog box to specify or change the Internet news administrator for the newsfeed. The Internet news administrator can be a mailbox or a custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Mailbox Direct Reports

Use Modify Mailbox Direct Reports to add or remove names from the list of people who report to the selected recipient's manager. Direct reports can be mailboxes or custom recipients.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Direct Reports

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Direct Reports

Lists the mailbox and custom recipient names for the employees who report to the selected recipient's manager.


Modify Authorized Originators

Use the Modify Authorized Originators dialog box to select, from a particular address book, the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents from which you will accept messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Accept Messages From

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Accept Messages From

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in the Address Book (selected in the Show Names from the box) from which you will accept messages. Only those names that appear on this list can send the recipient messages. If you want every entity in the Address Book to be able to send the current recipient messages, leave this list blank.


Modify Unauthorized Originators

Use the Modify Unauthorized Originators dialog box to select, from a particular address book, the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents from which you will not accept messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Reject Messages From

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Reject Messages From

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in the address book (selected in the Show Names from the box) from which you will not accept messages.


Modify Send-on-Behalf-of Permission

Use the Modify Send-on-Behalf-of Permission dialog box to specify or change the mailbox users who can send messages on behalf of the selected mailbox user.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Give Send On Behalf Permissions to

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Give Send On Behalf Permissions to

Lists the mailbox users in the Address Book (selected in the Show Names from the box) who can send messages on behalf of the selected user. Please note that only those mailbox names appearing on this list can send messages on behalf of the selected mailbox. If you want every mailbox in the Address Book to be able to send messages on behalf of the current mailbox, leave this list blank.


Modify Alternate Recipient (Mailbox/Delivery Options/Alt Recip/Modify...Help)
Modify Alternate Recipient

Use the Modify Alternate Recipient dialog box to select an alternate recipient for the selected mailbox user. An alternate recipient can be a mailbox, distribution list, custom recipient, or mailbox agent.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Distribution List Owner

Use the Modify Distribution List Owner dialog box to change or specify the owner (administrator) of the selected distribution list. A distribution list owner can add names to, or delete names from the list.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Distribution List Members

Use the Modify Distribution List Members dialog box to add or remove members from the selected distribution list.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Distribution List Members

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Distribution List Members

Lists the members selected for the distribution list. Distribution list members can be mailboxes, mailbox agents, custom recipients, and other distribution lists.


Modify Distribution List Membership

Use the Modify Distribution List Membership dialog box to select the distribution list(s) to which you want to add the current mailbox user as a member.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject or Body Returned

Use the Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject or Body Returned dialog box to select the recipients in other organizations or foreign systems that will receive ping messages sent by this link monitor that you know should be returned as non-deliverable.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Message subject or body returned

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Message subject or body returned

Lists the recipients selected from the Address Book (selected in the Show Names from the box) that will receive ping messages sent by the link monitor. Recipients in other organizations or foreign systems are represented as custom recipients in Microsoft Exchange Server.


Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject Returned

Use the Modify Monitored Recipients - Subject Returned dialog box to select the recipients in other organizations or foreign systems that will receive ping messages sent by this link monitor that you know are deliverable.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Message subject returned from

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Message subject returned from

Lists the recipients selected from the Address Book (selected in the Show Names from the box) that will receive ping messages sent by the link monitor. Recipients in other organizations or foreign systems are represented as custom recipients in Microsoft Exchange Server.


Choose Notification Recipient

Use the Choose Notification Recipient dialog box to choose the mailbox recipient to notify when the server is in warning or alert state. The name you select appears in the Mailbox to notify box on the Notification property page.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


New Requestor

You can set up Microsoft Exchange Server as a directory synchronization (dirsync) requestor to one MS Mail (PC) directory synchronization server. The dirsync requestor functions similarly to an MS Mail directory requestor. Address list updates are sent from the dirsync requestor to the MS Mail (PC) directory server. The MS Mail (PC) directory server compiles a master list of all recent changes to the global address list and sends it to the Microsoft Exchange Server dirsync requestor. The new entries are added to the Microsoft Exchange Server global address list.


Choose Directory Synchronization Requestor Address

Use the Choose Directory Synchronization Requestor Address dialog box to select the address for the dirsync server. The dirsync address must be a custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Local Dirsync Administrator

Use the Choose Local Dirsync Administrator dialog box to select the mailbox user, public folder, or distribution list that will receive directory exchange status and error messages.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Remote Dirsync Requestor Address

Use the Choose Remote Dirsync Requestor Address dialog box to select the appropriate custom recipient for the remote dirsync requestor.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Choose Mailbox for Recipient Template

Use the Choose Mailbox for Recipient Template dialog box to select the mailbox, custom recipient, or distribution list to use as the template when importing new recipients of the same type.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Administrator's Mailbox (Microsoft Mail Connector)

Select the recipient in your organization that will receive connector administrative messages. You can select a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Modify - Not allowed to create

Use the Modify - Not allowed to create dialog box to specify which mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in each Address Book will not be allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Not allowed to create top level folders

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Not allowed to create top level folders

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents not allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.


Modify - Allowed to create

Use the Modify - Allowed to create dialog box to specify which mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents in each Address Book will be allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Add Button

  Allowed to create top level folders

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Allowed to create top level folders

Lists the mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and mailbox agents allowed to create top-level public folders on the information store site. Only those names appearing on this list will be allowed to create top level folders. If you want all users to be able to create top level folders, leave this list blank.


Offline Address Book Container

Use the Offline Address Book Container dialog box to select the recipient's container you want to use to generate the Offline Address Book. Typically, you should use the Global Address List container, which includes a consolidated set of all recipients from all the recipient containers in replicated sites throughout your organization.

When you generate an Offline Address Book, the contents of the container that you choose are converted to a data file and stored in a hidden public folder. When the client downloads the Offline Address Book, the data file is used as the information source.


Public Folder Container

Displays the location of the public folder in the site hierarchy. The Public Folder container is the receptacle for all public folders. You can specify where (under which directory object) you want to store public folders.


Routing Details

Use the Routing Details dialog box to view site addresses and their corresponding connectors. You can also see the address type and the cost of connecting to that address.

  Type

  Cost

  Address

  Remote connectors (hops)


Remote Connectors (hops)

Shows the connectors used to route the message.


Address

Shows the address where the message will be sent.


Cost

Shows the cost of sending a message to this site.


Type

Indicates the type of address space.


Key Management Server Administrators

Use the Key Management Server Administrators dialog box to assign or remove permissions for key management server administrators. You can also change the password that enables access to the Key Management Server Administrators dialog box.

  Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server

  Change Password Button

  Add Administrators Button

  Remove Administrators Button


Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server

Lists the Windows NT account names with access rights to the Key Management server (KM server).


Change Password Button

Displays the Change the Password For The Key Management Server dialog box. Use this dialog box to change the password that enables access to the Key Management Server Administrators dialog box.


Add Administrators Button

Displays the Add Users dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the administrators to which you want to give permissions.


Remove Administrators Button

Removes the selected administrator from the list of Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server.


Add Users

Use the Add Users dialog box to select the users to which you want to assign administrator permissions.

  List Names From

  Names

  Add Names

  Add Button

  Members Button

  Search Button


List Names From

Select the domain containing the user(s) to which you want to assign administrator permissions.


Names

Lists the user names from the domain selected in the List Names From box.


Add Names

Lists the user names you selected from the Names display. When you choose OK the selected user names are copied to Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server on the Key Management Server Administrators dialog box.


Add Button

Moves the selected user name from the Names box to the Add Names box.


Members Button

Displays the Global Group Membership dialog box. Use the dialog box to view the members (by user name) in a group.


Search Button

Displays the Find Account dialog box. Use this dialog box to locate a specific user or group name in a domain.


Global Group Membership

List the members of the global group you selected.

  Members of "group name"


Members of "group name"

List the user names of the members in the group you selected.


Change Priority

Use the Change Priority dialog box to change the priority of a message in the message transfer agent (MTA) queue.

  High

  Normal

  Low


High

Selecting this option gives the message priority in the MTA queue over Normal and Low priority messages.


Normal

Selecting this option gives the message priority in the MTA queue over Low priority messages; however, High priority messages are handled first.


Low

Selecting this option means the message is handled (in the MTA queue) after Normal and High priority messages.


Client Permissions

Defines the extent to which users can work with items in a folder. You can grant permissions to new users or modify permissions for existing users.

Note

To edit or delete items in a public folder or to view the names of other folder users, you must have Owner permission in that folder.

  Name/Role

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button

  Roles

  Create Items

  Read Items

  Create subfolders

  Folder owner

  Folder contact

  Folder visible

  Edit Items

  Delete Items


Name/Role

Displays user names and their respective role.

Users can view only their own access permissions. If you are an individual user, your name is displayed; if you are a member of a distribution list, the distribution list name is displayed; if you are an undefined user, the default permission is displayed.


Add Button

Opens the Add Users dialog box, where you can select the user, distribution list, or public folder name to add to the Name/Role box.


Remove Button

Removes the selected name from the Name/Role box.


Properties Button

Displays information about the selected user.


Roles

Roles are sets of permissions that define the access users have to a folder. Choose a role for the name selected in the Name/Role box. If you modify the standard permissions, the Custom role appears.

Role	Description
Owner	Grants users all permissions in the folder.
Publishing Editor	Grants users permission to create items, read items, edit and delete items, and create subfolders.
Editor	Grants users permission to create items, read items, and edit and delete items.
Publishing Author	Grants users permission to create items, read items, edit and delete their own items, and create subfolders.
Author	Grants users permission to create items, read items, and edit and delete their own items.
Nonediting Author	Grants users permission to create items, read items, and delete their own items.
Reviewer	Grants users permission to read items.
Contributor	Grants users permission to create items.
None	Does not grant users permissions in the folder. Use this as the default permission when you want to limit the folder's audience to the users you add in the Name/Role box.


Create Items

Grants users permission to create new items in the folder.


Read Items

Grants users permission to read items in the folder.


Create subfolders

Grants users permission to create subfolders within the folder.


Folder owner

Grants users folder owner status. Folder owners have all permissions in the folder.


Folder contact

Grants the user folder contact status. Folder contacts receive notifications from the folder such as replication conflict messages, and requests from users for additional permissions or other changes to the folder.


Folder visible

Grants users permission to view this folder in the public folder hierarchy.


Edit Items

Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
None	Prevents users from editing any item.
Own	Grants users permission to edit their own items.
All	Grants users permissions to edit all items.


Delete Items

Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
None	Prevents users from deleting any item.
Own	Grants users permission to delete their own items.
All	Grants users permissions to delete any item.


Custom Recipient E-Mail Address

Use the Custom Recipient E-Mail Address dialog box to specify whether you want to modify the existing e-mail address or create a new one.

  Modify existing e-mail address

  Create new e-mail address


Modify existing e-mail address

Select this option to display the Internet Address Properties dialog box. Use this dialog box to make changes to the existing e-mail address.


Create new e-mail address

Select this option to display the New E-mail Address dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify a new e-mail address.


NT Security Descriptor

Use the NT Security Descriptor dialog box to specify the rights that users or groups have on the mailbox you selected.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This dialog box provides various default roles.

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox. This is different from Send On Behalf Of permission because the person receiving the message can't tell that the message has been sent by someone else.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Logon Rights	Log on to any server in the site using the Administrator program.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.


Mailbox Container
Containers

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container where the mailbox will be located.


Custom Recipient Container
Containers

Shows a graphical representation of all recipients containers in your site. Select the recipients container where the custom recipient will be located.


Do you want to delete?

Choose the appropriate button to delete the selection(s). You can cancel the delete process by choosing No.

  Yes Button

  Yes To All Button

  No Button


Yes Button

Deletes the current selection.


Yes To All Button

Deletes all selected objects.


No Button

Cancels the delete process and closes the Do you want to delete? dialog box.


Select Control Type

Select the type of control you want to create in the current template. You can choose any of the following controls.

Control	Function
Label	Text label. Typically used to describe an adjacent control.
Edit	Editable field. Typically used for text entry.
Page Break	Creates a new property tab in a tabbed dialog box.
Group Box	Defines a set of controls that are bounded by a box.
Check Box	Creates a check-box control. Use a check box to let the user turn options on or off.
List Box	In a dialog box, a type of box that lists available choices, for example, a list of all files in a directory. If all the choices do not fit in the list box, there is a scroll bar.
Multi-Valued List Box Control	Creates a multi-valued list box.
Multi-Valued Drop Down	Creates a multi-valued drop-down control.


Global Group Membership

Use the Global Group Membership dialog box to view the members of the global group you selected. You can also select the group members to which you want to grant permissions.

  Group members

  Add Button


Group members

Lists the members of the global group.


Add Button

Adds the names you select to the Add Names list in the Add Users and Groups dialog box.


Replica Link (Reps - To/From)

Displays replica link information.

Warning  Contact Product Support Services before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Connected Site)

Use the General property page to specify the organization and site name for the connector.

  Organization

  Site


Organization

Displays your organization name. If necessary, you can change the name.


Site

Type a name for the new connected site.


Routing Address (Connected Site)

Use the Routing Address property page to specify the address type, address, and connection cost for the new Internet mail or X.400 Connector.

Internet Mail Service Routing Address

  Type

  Cost

  Address

X.400 Connector Routing Address

  Organization (o)

  Organizational units (ou)

  Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management domain name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Type

The default address type, CCMAIL, enables cc:Mail users to send e-mail to Microsoft Exchange Server users at this site. You cannot modify this setting.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type a custom cc:Mail e-mail address for this site.

The following table provides examples of address formats using the display name Maria S. Black and the site name Ferguson.

To generate the address	Use the format
Maria S. Black at Ferguson	%d at Ferguson
Maria.Black at Ferguson	%g.%s at Ferguson
MBlack at Ferguson	%g1%s at Ferguson
For additional information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Type

The default address type, NOTES, enables Lotus Notes users to send e-mail to Microsoft Exchange Server users at this site. You cannot modify this setting.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type a custom Lotus Notes e-mail address for this site.

The following table provides examples of address formats using the display name Maria S. Black and the site name Ferguson.

To generate the address	Use the format
Maria S. Black at Ferguson	&d at Ferguson
Maria.Black at Ferguson	&g.&s at Ferguson
MBlack at Ferguson	&g1&s at Ferguson
For additional information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Type

The default address type, PROFS, enables IBM PROFS OfficeVision/VM users to send e-mail to Microsoft Exchange Server users at this site. You cannot modify this setting.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type a custom PROFS e-mail address for this site.

The following table provides examples of address formats using the display name Maria S. Black and the site name Ferguson.

To generate the address	Use the format
Maria S. Black at Ferguson	&d at Ferguson
Maria.Black at Ferguson	&g.&s at Ferguson
MBlack at Ferguson	&g1&s at Ferguson
For additional information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Type

The default address type, SNADS, enables SNADS users to send e-mail to Microsoft Exchange Server users at this site. You cannot modify this setting.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type a custom SNADS e-mail address for this site.

The following table provides examples of address formats using the display name Maria S. Black and the site name Ferguson.

To generate the address	Use the format
Maria S. Black at Ferguson	&d at Ferguson
Maria.Black at Ferguson	&g.&s at Ferguson
MBlack at Ferguson	&g1&s at Ferguson
For additional information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Type

The default address type, SMTP, enables users on SMTP messaging systems, such as the Internet, to send e-mail to Microsoft Exchange Server users at this site. You cannot modify this setting.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type a custom Internet e-mail address for this site.

The following table provides examples of address formats using the display name Maria S. Black and the site name Ferguson.

To generate the address	Use the format
Maria_Black@Ferguson	%g_%s@Ferguson
MariaB@Ferguson	%g%s1@Ferguson
MSBlack@Ferguson	%g1%I%s@Ferguson
For additional information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Type

Specify the address type.

For information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Cost

Type a routing cost (1 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 1, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


Address

Type the e-mail address for the site.

You can obtain e-mail address information about the other site using its Site Addressing property page. For information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address (Custom Address Space)

Use the Address property page to create an address space for an address type that does not have a template. The address space represents the format of messages a connector can accept for delivery outside of a Microsoft Exchange Server site. The connector uses the address space to determine which types of messages it will send. An address space is defined by its address type, address, and routing cost.

  Type

  Address

  Cost


Type

Specify the address type for the custom address space. The address type designates the messaging system (for example, SMTP or CCMAIL). Before Microsoft Exchange Server can compare a recipient e-mail address with the custom address space, their address types must be identical.

For more information on address types, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations and Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Cost

Type a routing cost (1 to 100) for the custom address space. Microsoft Exchange Server uses the routing cost to optimize message routing between sites or between an organization and a foreign system, such as cc:Mail.

Routing costs typically range from 1 (the default cost) to 99. If the cost of a route is set to 1, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.

For more information on routing cost, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Address

Type an address for the custom address space. You can use an asterisk (*) to designate a multicharacter wildcard or a percent symbol (%) to designate a single-character wildcard.

For example, if the address type is SMTP and the address *.com, the message transfer agent (MTA) will process only SMTP messages addressed to recipients with the .com domain identifier.

For information and guidelines on e-mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Restrictions (General Address Space)

Use the Restrictions property page to control whether messages from an organization, a site, or a location can travel through the connector. You can prevent a connector from being available by setting options on the Restrictions property page.

  Organization

  This site

  This location


Organization

All messages with this type of address can travel through this connector.


This site

Messages with this type of address from this site are sent only through this connector.


This location

Messages with this type of address from this location (server) are sent only through this connector.


Routing Address (Address Space)

Use the Routing Address property page to specify the new general address and address type for the remote system.

  Type

  Address


Type

Enter the address type. Microsoft Exchange Server supports these address types:

•	Microsoft Mail (PC and AppleTalk)

•	Lotus cc:Mail

•	Internet mail (SMTP)

•	X.400

If third-party gateways are installed, other addresses can also be generated.


Address

Type the general routing address for the remote system. Be sure to indicate the type of address in the Type box.


General (X400 Address Space)
General (X.400 Address Space)

Use the General property page to specify the necessary X.400 address information for the remote system.

  Organization (o)

  Organizational Units (ou)

  Private Management Domain Name (p)

  Administrative Management Domain Name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Organization (o)

Type the site name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) of the remote Microsoft Exchange Server site.

Note

You can use a wildcard (the * or ? character) to specify a group of addresses. For example, type P* to specify all entries that begin with the character P, or SITE?? to specify all entries that contain SITE followed by two alphanumeric characters such as SITE01 and SITE9m.


Organizational Units (ou)

In the Organizational Units boxes (OU1 to OU4), type the X.400 address attributes (up to 32 alphanumeric characters), if any, required to identify the remote site.


Private Management Domain Name (p)

Type the organization name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) of the remote Microsoft Exchange server site.

The PRMD is usually the name of your organization or company and is specified by your X.400 service carrier.


Administrative Management Domain Name (a)

Type the ADMD name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) for the remote site.

The ADMD is usually the name of (and is specified by) your X.400 service carrier. If multiple carriers are used, type a single space in the box.


Country (c)

Select the country where the other site is located.


Cost

Type a routing cost (1 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 1, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


General (MS Mail Address Space)

Use the General property page to specify general address information for the remote Microsoft Mail system.

  Network Name

  Postoffice Name

  Mailbox Name

  Cost


Network Name

Type the network name of the remote Microsoft Mail system.


Postoffice Name

Type the postoffice name on the remote Microsoft Mail system.


Mailbox Name

Type the name of the mailbox in the postoffice on the remote Microsoft Mail system to which you want to connect.


Cost

Type a routing cost (1 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 1, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


General (Internet Address Space)

Use the General property page to specify the e-mail domain and routing cost for the remote system.

  E-mail Domain

  Cost


E-mail Domain

Type the name of the e-mail domain that contains the remote system address (specified on the Routing Address property page).


Cost

Type a routing cost (1 to 100) for messages transferred using this address.

Routing costs typically range from 1 to 99. The default is 1. If the cost of a route is set to 1, other routes are used only if it fails. If the cost of a route is set to 100, it is used only when all other routes fail.


Directory Update Type

Use the Directory Update Type dialog box to specify the type of directory update you want to perform.

  Update only new and modified items

  Refresh all items in the directory


Update only new and modified items

Performs a directory replication update for only those items changed or modified since the last request was made.


Refresh all items in the directory

Causes a new copy of every item for all selected inbound sites to be replicated to the local bridgehead server. This operation may take several hours to complete.


Organization Forms Library Administrator

Creates, replicates, and modifies global forms.

  Folder Name

  Language

  New Button

  Modify Button

  Remove Button

  Permissions Button


Folder Name

Displays the folder name as it appears in the Administrator window and the client folder hierarchy.


Language

Displays the language of the client.


New Button

Displays the Create New Forms Library dialog box, where you define the folder name and language of a new form.


Modify Button

Displays the Modify Forms Library dialog box, where you change the folder name of an existing form.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected form.


Permissions Button

Displays the Forms Library Permissions dialog box, where you modify permissions for specific users.


Create New Forms Library

Allows you to define a new form. In the Library Folder Name box, type the name of the new form. From the Language drop-down list, choose the new form's language.

When you create an organization forms library, you assign a language to it. By default, foreign language clients logged on to Microsoft Exchange Server will attempt to locate forms in the library that match their language. For that reason, forms that you want to be available to all foreign language clients should be individually localized and saved into all existing foreign language libraries. If there is no language-specific organization forms library, the user defaults to the organization forms library on the server.


Modify Forms Library

Allows you to rename an existing forms library. In the Library Folder Name box, type the new name of the form.


Forms Library Permissions

Enables you to control which users can create items and subfolders in the organization forms library.

  Name/Role

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button

  Roles

  Create Items

  Read Items

  Create subfolders

  Folder owner

  Folder contact

  Folder visible

  Edit Items

  Delete Items


Distribution List Membership

Displays a list of members in a distribution list and allows you to add or remove members in the list. You cannot modify a distribution list unless you have Owner permission for it.

  Distribution List

  Members

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Properties Button


Distribution List

Displays the name of the distribution list.


Members

Displays the current list of names that are included in the distribution list.


Add Button

Displays the Add Users dialog box, where you can add additional users to the Members list.


Remove Button

Removes the selected user in the Members list.


Properties Button

Opens the Properties dialog box, where additional information about the selected user in the Members list is displayed.


Schedule+ Distribution List

Use the Schedule+ Distribution List dialog box to select a Schedule+ distribution list for the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector. The Schedule+ Distribution List dialog box lists all the MS Mail (PC) and PROFS postoffices that are exchanging free and busy information with the current site.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Administrator's Mailbox (Schedule+ Free/Busy)
Administrator's Mailbox (Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector)

Use the Administrator's Mailbox dialog box to select the mailbox or distribution list to be used for the administrator's mailbox. Mail addressed to the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector, such as status reports or non-delivery reports (NDRs), is forwarded to this mailbox.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Administrator's Mailbox (Overview)

Some services and connectors allow you to select a mailbox, custom recipient, or distribution list to be used for the administrator's mailbox. Mail addressed to the service or connector, such as status reports or non-delivery reports (NDRs), is forwarded to the administrator's mailbox.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Add Users

Selects user, distribution list, and public folder names from one or more address lists and adds them to the active list.

  Show Names from the

  Type Name or Select from List

  Add Button

  Add Users

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Show Names from the

Select the address list that contains the names you want.


Type Name or Select from List

Type a name or select one from the list. As you type the letters of the name, the address list scrolls to match the letters that you type.


Add
Add Button

Adds the selected names to the Add Users box.


Add Users

Displays the names that you have added. Multiple names are separated with a semicolon (;). When you choose OK, these names are added to the Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To list in the Exchange Server tab.


Properties Button

Displays details about the selected name.


Find Button

Opens the Find dialog box, where you can specify advanced conditions to search for names. When the search is complete, all matching names are displayed in the search results list.

The search options vary according to the selected address list.


Advanced (Internet Address Properties)

Configure advanced options for a custom recipient.

  Override Internet Mail Service settings for this recipient

  MIME

  Message Body

  Plain Text/UUEncode


Override Internet Mail Service settings for this recipient

Overrides the general settings configured for the Internet Mail Service.


Message Body

Select the format to be used for SMTP messages for this custom recipient.


Plain Text/UUEncode

Specify whether outbound messages with attachments will be encoded using UNIX-to-UNIX Encode (UUENCODE) or UUENCODE with the BinHex option for Macintosh files.


MIME

Specifies whether outbound messages with attachments will be encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME).


Internet Mail Service Has Been Installed on This Cluster Node

The Internet Mail Service has been installed on this cluster node.

You must now run Microsoft Exchange Server Setup on all other nodes in the cluster. When you run Setup, choose Update Node to complete the installation of Internet Mail Service on each node.


Internet News Service Has Been Installed on This Cluster Node

The Internet News Service has been installed on this cluster node.

You must now run Microsoft Exchange Server Setup on all other nodes in the cluster. When you run Setup, choose Update Node to complete the installation of Internet News Service on each node.


Service Account Password Has Been Changed

The service account password has been changed on this clustered server. To enable each Microsoft Exchange Server service to start properly on each of the secondary nodes, you must change the password associated with each service.

1.	Go to the Control Panel on the secondary node and choose Services.

2.	Choose a service, and then choose Startup.

3.	Under Log On As, select the service account and type the new password.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each service.


General (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Use the directory replication connector General property page to establish local and remote bridgehead servers. You can also add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Site Name

  Local Bridgehead Server

  Remote Bridgehead Server

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type a name (up to 64 characters) that uniquely identifies this directory replication connector.


Display Name

Type a name (up to 256 characters). This name appears in the Administrator window.


Site Name

Displays the target site name. This name cannot be changed.


Local Bridgehead Server

Type the name of the server that will process incoming and outgoing directory replication information.


Remote Bridgehead Server

Type the name of the server that will communicate with the local bridgehead server to maintain directory consistency.


Permissions (Directory Replication Container)
Permissions (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this directory replication connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this directory replication connector. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory replication connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory replication connector.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory replication connector.


Schedule (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

Determines when requests are sent from a local bridgehead server to a remote bridgehead server for updated directory information. Choose more frequent requests where directory information in the remote site is updated often, but remember that more frequent replication can affect network performance.

The schedule property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks (depending on the detail view you select). You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when an event is to occur.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Never

Disables directory replication.


Always

Runs replication every 15 minutes.


Selected Times

Assign specific replication times in the schedule grid. Select a time or block of time when replication should occur.


Detail View

Choose 1 Hour to display the schedule grid in one-hour increments. Choose 15 Minutes to display the schedule grid in 15-minute increments. These options are enabled only if you choose Selected Times.


Sites (Directory Replication Connector)

  Overview

The Inbound Site and Outbound Site lists are populated only after you completely configure a directory replication relationship between local and remote sites, and directory replication is completed successfully at least once.

  Inbound Sites

  Outbound Sites

  Request Now


Inbound Sites

Select the site from which you want to request updated directory information.


Outbound Sites

Select the site to which you want to send updated directory information.


Request Now

Sends a request for updated directory information to the selected inbound sites.


General (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view and set basic properties for the selected Directory Synchronization object.

The directory synchronization server and requestors, if any, that are associated with this Directory Synchronization object are shown in the Dirsync Connections box.

Note

If you want to configure the Directory Synchronization object for a server or requestor that you have already created, and that server or requestor does not appear in the Dirsync Connections box, you should close the Directory Synchronization object for this Microsoft Exchange Server computer and open the Directory Synchronization object on the correct server.

  Dirsync Connection

  Administrative Note


Dirsync Connection

Displays the dirsync server and requestors, if any, that are associated with this Microsoft directory synchronization object.


Permissions (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the directory synchronization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the directory synchronization object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Delete	Delete this directory synchronization object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory synchronization object.


Delivery Restrictions (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this Directory Synchronization object will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

Tip

You can use delivery restrictions to prevent messages unrelated to directory synchronization from being delivered to the Directory Synchronization object.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will accept messages. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will accept messages.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will not accept messages. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders. Select List, and choose Modify to specify a list of senders from which this recipient will reject messages.


Modify Button

Opens the Address Book so you can select one or more recipients from the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From or the Reject Messages From boxes.


Incoming Templates (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Incoming Templates property page to map incoming template information to Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attributes. For example, you can map Microsoft Mail phone and extension templates to the recipient office phone attribute, so that information stored differently on other systems is displayed consistently in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory.

  Incoming Template Mapping

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Incoming Template Mapping

Lists existing incoming template mappings. The String column displays the incoming string, and the Attribute column displays the internal Microsoft Exchange Server directory attribute to which the incoming string is mapped.


New Button

Opens the Incoming Template Mapping dialog box where you can create a new mapping.


Edit Button

Modifies an existing mapping in the Incoming Template Mapping box. The Incoming Template Mapping dialog box appears, and you can change the existing mapping.


Remove Button

Removes the existing mapping from the entry selected in the Incoming Template Mapping box.


Outgoing Templates (Directory Synchronization)

  Overview

Use the Outgoing Templates property page to map Microsoft Exchange Server directory recipient attributes to outgoing Microsoft Mail-compatible template information. For example, you can map Microsoft Exchange Server location recipient attributes to Microsoft Mail room and office templates so that information stored in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory is distributed correctly to each Microsoft Mail requestor that requests information for a room or office template.

Adding, modifying, or removing template mappings will result in a full export of directory information during the next directory synchronization cycle.

  Outgoing Template Mapping

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Up and Down Buttons


Outgoing Template Mapping

Lists existing outgoing template mappings. The Attribute column displays the internal Microsoft Exchange directory attribute that is being mapped, and the String column displays the string to which it is being mapped.


New Button

Opens the Outgoing Template Mapping dialog box where you can create a new mapping.


Edit Button

Modifies an existing mapping for an entry selected in the Outgoing Template Mapping box. The Outgoing Template Mapping dialog box appears, and you can change the existing mapping.


Remove Button

Removes the existing mapping for an entry selected in the Outgoing Template Mapping box.


Up and Down Buttons

Moves the selected attribute and its associated string up and down the list.

You specify the template mapping order when exporting attributes to the Microsoft Mail postoffice.


General (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Append To Imported Users' Display Name

  Dirsync Address Button

  Address Types

  Requestor Language

  Administrative Note

  Server


Name

Type a name (up to 255 characters) for this requestor. You should use a unique name that identifies this Microsoft Exchange Server site. This name appears in the Connections container in the Administrator window. You cannot change this name once the requestor is set up.


Append To Imported Users' Display Name

If selected, puts the requestor name after each custom recipient that is created by the dirsync process.


Dirsync Address Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select the address of the dirsync server. The dirsync address must be a custom recipient.


Address Types

Select the check box for each address type to request from the dirsync server.

MS Mail (PC) addresses are sent and received by default. If you do not select address types that the dirsync server normally provides, this requestor will request (and receive) Microsoft Mail format e-mail addresses instead.


Requestor Language

The primary language used in your mail system. The default is English.


Server

Select a server in the local site to handle directory exchange messages. The default is the current server.


Permissions (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this directory synchronization (dirsync) requestor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this dirsync requestor. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this dirsync requestor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this dirsync requestor.
Delete	Delete this dirsync requestor.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this dirsync requestor.


Import Container (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

You use the Import Container property page to specify which recipient container receives imported address information and to assign trust levels to objects being imported.

Note

Microsoft Mail and other messaging systems do not have the concept of directory objects or trust levels. When a recipient address is imported from a dirsync server, a recipient object is created in the container with the trust level you specify in the Import Containers property page. If you modify trust levels associated with a recipient object after it is added to the Microsoft Exchange Server directory, those modifications are overwritten during any subsequent directory exchange import cycle that includes this recipient.

By default, all updates received from a dirsync server are placed in the recipient containers and transmitted to all other dirsync servers during the next update cycle. If you want to make address information from more than one dirsync server available to Microsoft Exchange Server recipients, but you do not want to combine information between the dirsync servers, create a separate container for each group of imported recipients.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Import Container

Select one of the available recipient containers in your site. This is the container in which imported address information will be placed.

Caution

Changing the directory import container after directory exchange has begun can cause the loss of directory exchange information.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to assign to incoming directory information.


Container Button

Displays all recipient containers for the site. Select the recipient container where directory information will be imported and choose OK to return to the Import Container property page.

This is available only when setting up a dirsync requestor.


Export Containers (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify the recipient containers from which to export directory information. You can also set a trust level to limit the directory information that is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Recipient Containers

Lists all recipient containers in the currently selected site.


Export These Recipients

Lists all recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Add Button

Adds the selected container to the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Remove Button

Removes the selected container from the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported.


Site

Lists all sites in your organization. When you select a site, a list of all recipient containers in the site appears in the Recipient Containers box.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to limit the directory information sent to the dirsync server. Only objects (from the selected containers) with a trust level equal to or lower than the level specified in the Trust Level box will be sent.


Export Custom Recipients

Clear the Export Custom Recipients check box if you do not want to send information about Microsoft Exchange custom recipients.


Settings (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Settings property page to configure advanced directory exchange functions.

  Dirsync Password

  Participation

  Template Information

  Dirsync Information


Dirsync Password

Type a password for this dirsync requestor to use when sending update messages to the dirsync server.


Participation

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Send Updates to export directory information to the dirsync server

Receive Updates to import directory information from the dirsync server


Template Information

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Send Local Template Information to export address templates to the dirsync server

Receive Template Information to import address templates from the dirsync server

If you select either option, you must configure template mappings in the Microsoft Directory Synchronization object.


Dirsync Information

Select one or both of the following check boxes:

Import On Next Cycle to request every entry (of the requested address types) available on the dirsync server.

Export On Next Cycle to send addresses from the specified containers in the Export Containers property page to the dirsync server.

If you are starting directory exchange for the first time, all local directory information is automatically exported, and all available information from the dirsync server is automatically imported.


Schedule (Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to specify when directory synchronization messages are sent from the server to each requestor. The default is to send one update message each day at midnight. Directory synchronization messages are sent at the beginning of each hour that is selected in the schedule grid. Requestors messages to the server are processed at the time received.

  Schedule Grid


General (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Dirsync Administrator Button

  Copy Administrator On Outgoing Messages

  Forward Incoming Dirsync Messages To Administrator

  Administrative Note

  Server


Name

Type a name (up to 64 characters) for this directory synchronization server.


Dirsync Administrator Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select a user, public folder, or distribution list to receive directory exchange status and error messages.


Copy Administrator On Outgoing Messages

(Optional) Select to view each outgoing update message to each requestor.

Note

This option is typically used for troubleshooting.


Forward Incoming Dirsync Messages to Administrator

(Optional) Select to view each incoming update message from each requestor.

Note

This option is typically used for troubleshooting.


Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer to host the directory exchange process.

Note

Servers are listed in alphabetical order, and the server to which you are currently connected is not selected by default. Make sure you select the intended server from the list.


Permissions (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the directory synchronization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the directory synchronization object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory synchronization object.
Delete	Delete this directory synchronization object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this directory synchronization object.


Schedule (Dirsync Server)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to specify when directory synchronization messages are sent from the server to each requestor. The default is to send one update message each day at midnight. Directory synchronization messages are sent at the beginning of each hour that is selected in the schedule grid. Requestor messages to the server are processed at the time received.

  Schedule Grid


General (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Remote dirsync requestors are internal representations of dirsync requestors that use this server. This internal information is used to authenticate and respond to requestors during directory exchange.

Note

You must first create a custom recipient for each remote dirsync requestor to provide address information about the requestor.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Append to Imported Users' Display Name

  Dirsync Address

  Password

  Requestor Address Type

  Requestor Language

  Export On Next Cycle

  Administrative Note


Name

Type a display name (up to 255 characters) for the remote requestor postoffice. This is the name that appears in the Administrator window.


Append to Imported Users' Display Name

If selected, puts the requestor name after each custom recipient that is created by the dirsync process.


Dirsync Address

Opens the Address Book where you can select the remote dirsync requestor custom recipient that you defined previously. This custom recipient provides address information about the requestor.


Password

Type the password used by the remote dirsync requestor for directory synchronization.


Requestor Address Type

In the Native Address Type box, select MS to send directory synchronization messages in MS Mail (PC) format. The default selection, MS, is used by MS Mail (PC) and all foreign dirsync requestors.

--or--

Select MSA to send directory exchange messages in MS Mail (AppleTalk) format.

Directory exchange update messages to each MS Mail (AppleTalk) requestor do not include updates submitted by that requestor. This avoids multiple entries in the MS Mail (AppleTalk) global address list.


Requestor Language

The primary language used in your mail system. The default is English.


Export On Next Cycle

Select to send all address information to the remote requestor during the next directory exchange cycle.


Permissions (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this remote dirsync requestor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this remote dirsync requestor. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this remote dirsync requestor.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this remote dirsync requestor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this remote dirsync requestor.
Delete	Delete this remote dirsync requestor.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this remote dirsync requestor.


Import Container (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Import Containers property page to specify which recipient container receives imported address information and to assign trust levels to objects being imported.

Note

MS Mail and other messaging systems do not have the concept of directory objects or trust levels. When a recipient address is imported from a remote dirsync requestor during directory synchronization, a recipient object is created in the container with the trust level you specify in the Import Containers property page. If you modify trust levels associated with a recipient object after it is added to the directory, those modifications are overwritten during any subsequent directory synchronization import cycle that includes this recipient.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Import Container

Select an available recipient container in your site. This is the container in which imported address information will be placed.

Caution

Changing the directory import container after directory exchange has begun can cause the loss of directory exchange information.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to assign to incoming directory information.


Container Button

Displays the recipient containers for the site. Choose the recipient container and then choose OK to return to the Import Container property page.


Export Containers (Remote Dirsync Requestor)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify what directory information is exported to the remote dirsync requestor during directory synchronization. By default, no information about the local site is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Recipient Containers

Lists all recipient containers in the currently selected site.


Export These Recipients

Lists all recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Add Button

Adds the selected container to the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Remove Button

Removes the selected container from the list of recipient containers from which directory information will be exported to the remote dirsync requestor.


Site

Lists all sites in your organization. When you select a messaging site, a list of all recipient containers in the site appears in the Recipient Containers box.


Trust Level

Type or select a trust level to limit the directory information sent to the remote dirsync server.

Only objects (from the selected containers) with a trust level equal to or lower than the level specified in the Trust Level box will be sent.


Export Custom Recipients

Select if you do not want to export information about custom recipients.


  Gateway

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Gateway

A gateway provides message transfer and translation between Microsoft Exchange Server and another messaging system.

Note

These Help topics are for gateways in general and may not provide information for your specific gateway.

Use the following property pages to configure a gateway:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Advanced

Import Container

Export Containers


General (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Computer Name

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Computer Name

The name given to the computer where the Microsoft Exchange Server gateway is installed.


Message Size

Use the General property page to specify the maximum size of outgoing messages that can be transported through the gateway. This is useful when you do not want users sending messages with large attachments that might affect performance. If the size limit is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with a non-delivery report (NDR).

Choose No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent. Choose Maximum to set the message size from 1 to 2,097,151K.


Permissions (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this gateway. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this gateway. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this gateway.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the schedule in a gateway.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this gateway.


Schedule (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this gateway becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the gateway will become active.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Address Space (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Address Space property page to define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site or foreign system. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this gateway. You need to configure only the necessary address space options to uniquely identify the route to the site or foreign system. The address space determines which messages will be delivered to the gateway. Gateways process messages according to address type.

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Delivery Restrictions (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this gateway will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Advanced (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify values for message parameters, maximum transfer times, and message transfer quota.

  Message Parameters

  Maximum Transfer Times (min)

  Message Transfer Quota


Message Parameters

  Unread limit (msgs)

Defines the maximum number of messages that can be held in the gateway's outbound queue. The MTA will not deliver any messages to the gateway when the number of messages in the outbound queue exceeds this value.

  Back-off interval (min)

The amount of time the MTA will wait before attempting to send more messages to the gateway's outbound queue.

  Max unread time (min)

The amount of time a message can be queued before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Maximum Transfer Times (min)

  Urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of high importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

  Normal message

Maximum number of minutes a message of normal importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.

  Non-urgent message

Maximum number of minutes a message of low importance can be queued in the gateway's information store folder before it is returned to the sender as non-deliverable.


Message Transfer Quota

  No limit

The amount of data in the gateway's information store outbound queue has no limit.

  Quota (K)

Specifies the largest amount of combined data queued in the gateway's information store outbound queue. The MTA will not deliver messages when this value is exceeded.


Import Container (Gateway)

  Overview

You use the Import Container property page to select an import container for addresses that might be transferred from your gateway. How you use this property page depends on the design of your gateway.

  Import Container

  Trust Level

  Container Button


Export Containers (Gateway)

  Overview

Use the Export Containers property page to specify the recipient containers from which to export directory information. You can also set a trust level to limit the directory information that is exported.

  Recipient Containers

  Export These Recipients

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Trust Level

  Export Custom Recipients


Access Control definition
access control

Allows the owner of a resource to determine who can access the resource and what they can do with it. In Microsoft Exchange Server, permissions can be granted to Windows NT user accounts, mailboxes, distribution lists, and public folders.


Address Book definition
Address Book

The Address Book makes a subset of the directory, including mailboxes, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders available to users so they can access information about the organization just as they would a telephone directory. The Address Book can contain one or more address lists. See global address list and personal address list.


Address List definition
address list

A collection of recipients in the Address Book organized by their recipient container. Examples of address lists are the global address list and the personal address book (.Pab file).


Address Space definition
address space

A set of address information associated with a connector or gateway that identifies certain types of messages and the routes these messages should take. Address spaces are typically a subset of a complete address and they contain only the necessary elements to identify the route that a message should take.


Administrator Program definition
Administrator program

A graphical user interface that enables system administrators to manage and configure all Microsoft Exchange Server objects, including organizations, sites, and computers.


Advanced Security definition
advanced security

Provides users with the ability to protect and verify messages as they are being transferred through a Microsoft Exchange Server organization. Advanced security includes digital signatures and encryption.


Alias definition
alias

A name or label used as an alternative means of addressing e-mail to a user's mailbox. An alias is typically a shortened version of the mailbox owner's name. For example, suzanf might be the alias for Suzan Fine's mailbox.


Authentication definition
authentication

Validation of a user's Windows NT Server logon information. Authentication requires users, processes, and services to enter a unique log on identifier and a password in order to access the system. When a user logs on to an account on a Windows NT Server domain, that authentication may be performed by any server of that domain. See also trust relationships.


AutoAssistants definition
AutoAssistants

In Microsoft Outlook, AutoAssistants are the Inbox Assistant and the Out of Office Assistant, which can be used to create rules for managing and organizing information. The Inbox Assistant can be used to create rules that automatically filter incoming mail and take a variety of actions such as moving mail messages to a particular folder, forwarding messages to another user, or automatically deleting mail. The Out of Office Assistant can be set to respond to e-mail for users when they are out of the office.


Backbone definition
backbone

The network connection between LAN segments. A Microsoft Exchange Server messaging backbone allows users in one Microsoft Exchange Server system to communicate with users in another Microsoft Exchange Server system through one or more messaging protocols such as SNADS, PROFS, and SMTP.


Back End definition
back end

The set of Microsoft Exchange Server components installed on the server. See also front end.


Bridgehead Server definition
bridgehead server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer that acts as the end-point of a messaging connection between two sites configured as an X.400 Connector. This server is responsible for routing messages through that connection.


Certificate definition
certificate

Data used for digital signatures and encryption that binds the user's public key to the mailbox. Every user has two certificates—an encryption certificate that contains the user's public encryption key and is an attribute of the user's mailbox, and a signing certificate that contains the user's public signing key and is contained in the user's security file.


Child Object definition
child object

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is subordinate to another object, the parent object. For example, the server object is a child of the server container because it is in the server container. The child object inherits permissions from the parent object.


Client Installation Point definition
client installation point

A shared directory on a file server to which users can connect in order to install Microsoft Outlook. Once the client installation point has been created, users can run the Setup program to install a copy of the client software on their local hard disk. A client installation point can also be used to set up a network share.


Client/Server Architecture definition
Client/server architecture

Microsoft Exchange Server uses a client/server architecture, where processing is distributed between client and server processes. The client (process) sends requests to a server (process), and the server carries out the instructions or obtains the requested information.


Connector definition
connector

A component provided with Microsoft Exchange Server that allows Microsoft Exchange Server to connect to other messaging systems. For example, the Internet Mail Service enables Microsoft Outlook users to connect to the Internet.


Container definition
container

In the Administrator program, an object that contains other objects. For example, the recipient container is composed of recipient objects.


Custom Recipient definition
custom recipient

Addressing information in the global or personal address book for recipients on other systems.


Digital Signatures definition
digital signatures

A feature of advanced security that enables users to verify the source of information they receive or send. Also verifies that the contents of the message have not been modified during transit.


Directory Hierarchy definition
directory hierarchy

In the Administrator program, the hierarchical structure of objects in the directory that represent each component of the organization, such as the organization itself, recipients, servers, and so on. All objects in an organization or site can be managed by manipulating the structure of the directory hierarchy.


Directory Object definition
directory object

A record such as a server, a mailbox, or a distribution list that is stored in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. Every object in the directory has properties that specify an object's characteristics and who can use and make changes to the object. You can define the properties of objects in the directory using the Administrator program.


Directory Replication definition
directory replication

The process that updates the directories of all Microsoft Exchange Server computers within a site and between sites with the same information. Within a site, directory replication is automatic. Between sites, you can configure directory replication so that only the desired information is replicated to other sites.


Directory Replication Bridgehead Server definition
directory replication bridgehead server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer that acts as the end-point of a directory replication link between its site and a remote site. This server is responsible for requesting directory updates from the replication bridgehead server at the remote site.


Directory definition
directory

The directory stores all the information that is available about an organization's resources and users, including mailboxes, public folders, distribution lists, and servers. Other components use the directory to map addresses and route messages. The directory is automatically replicated to all servers in a site, and it can be configured to be replicated automatically to servers in other sites. All recipient objects in the directory are contained in the Address Book, which users can use like a telephone directory. The directory is based on the International Organization for Standards (ISO) X.500 specification.


Directory Synchronization Component definition
directory synchronization component

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that exchanges directory information between Microsoft Exchange Server, Microsoft Mail 3.x, and other messaging systems using the Mail 3.x directory synchronization protocol.


Directory Synchronization definition
directory synchronization

The process of keeping a Microsoft Exchange Server directory synchronized with directories from MS Mail (PC) and MS Mail (AppleTalk) (now known as Quarterdeck Mail) systems. You can configure directory synchronization so that only the desired information is replicated to other organizations or foreign systems.


Distribution List (DL) definition
distribution list (DL)

A collection of recipients logically grouped together and addressed as a single recipient. A message addressed to a distribution list will be delivered to every user in the list. Administrators can create distribution lists and add them to an Address Book such as the global address list. Users can also create personal distribution lists and add them to their personal address book (PAB). A Microsoft Exchange Server distribution list is similar to a PC Mail group.


Domain definition
domain

A group of servers running Windows NT Server. Optionally, a domain can also include LAN Manager 2.x servers, Windows NT Workstation clients, and other clients such as Windows for Workgroups and MS-DOS clients. All members of a domain share the same user account database and security policy.


Dynamic RAS Connector definition
Dynamic RAS Connector

A tool provided with Microsoft Exchange Server that connects sites on the same local area network (LAN) using RAS.


E-mail Address definition
e-mail address

The address by which Microsoft Exchange Server recipients (mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients) are known to foreign mail systems. Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates an X.400, MS Mail, and Internet address for each recipient. Additional addresses are generated when third-party gateways are installed. An example of an e-mail address is an Internet mail address such as suzanf@fab.com, which conforms to the standards set for SMTP communications.


Encryption definition
encryption

A feature of advanced security that provides confidentiality by allowing users to conceal data. The data is encrypted as it resides on disk and travels over a network connection.


Foreign Mail System definition
foreign mail system

A mail system other than Microsoft Exchange Server.


Form definition
form

Provides a structure for posting and viewing specific information. It may be a send form, such as a purchase requisition or expense report form, used to exchange information with another user, or it may be a post form used for posting and viewing information in an Exchange folder.


Front End definition
front end

The set of Microsoft Outlook components installed on the client computer. See also back end.


Gateway definition
gateway

Third-party gateways translate, transfer, and deliver messages from Microsoft Exchange Server to foreign mail systems such as PROFS and SNADS. These components must be purchased separately.


Global Address List definition
global address list

Contains all recipients, custom recipients, distribution lists, and public folders in the organization. This address list is available by default to every user in the organization.


Home Server definition
home server

The Microsoft Exchange Server computer that contains a user's mailbox, personal address book, or other Microsoft Exchange files that are used frequently.


Host definition
host

An information process on an SMTP messaging system. It is characterized by a domain name. The computer that stores the host has an associated IP address.


Inbox Assistant definition
Inbox Assistant

In Microsoft Outlook, an AutoAssistant that enables users to create rules that automatically filter incoming mail and take a variety of actions such as moving mail messages to a particular folder, forwarding messages to another user, or automatically deleting mail.


Information Store definition
information store

A Microsoft Exchange Server core component. The information store is server-based storage that contains users' mailboxes and public and private folders, and enforces security on this information. It maintains information in two databases, the public information store and the private information store. See also public information store, private information store.


Information Service definition
information service

A utility that enables Microsoft Exchange and other messaging applications to do one or more of the following: send or receive mail using a direct or remote connection; store, share, and/or retrieve information; obtain user address information. Users can specify information services in their profile.


Instance definition
instance

A single representation of an executed program, typically described in relation to other representations of the same program running simultaneously on the same computer. For example, if Microsoft Outlook was already running on a computer when a user started Outlook, two instances of Outlook would be running at the same time.

Instance can also mean a replica of a public folder. An instance of a public folder is a public folder that has been replicated from one Microsoft Exchange Server computer to another.


Internet Mail Connector definition
Internet Mail Service

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that enables Microsoft Outlook users to seamlessly exchange messages with Internet users.


Key definition
key

Used to digitally sign and encrypt data. Each mailbox has two key pairs. One key pair is used for signing and verifying operations, the other pair is used for encrypting and decrypting operations. Each key pair consists of a public key, which is publicly known, and a private key, which is known only to the key's user.


Key Management Component definition
Key Management component

Manages security information that is used to digitally sign and seal messages with Microsoft Exchange Server. The Key Management component generates and maintains the public and private encryption keys, stores public signing keys and private encryption keys, and generates tokens used to enable digital signatures and encryption capabilities for a mailbox. It also revokes security for a user when instructed by the Administrator program. The key management component is installed on the Key Management server (KM server).


Key Management Database definition
key management database

The key management database is unique to each KM server and contains the security key history of all the users. If users in a site are moved from one KM server to another, users must be enrolled in advanced security for the new KM server. Otherwise, users pointing to the new KM server can lose their ability to recover security keys from the KM server they were previously pointing to. This can result in mail that is encrypted with the user’s previous security keys from becoming unreadable.


Key Management Server definition
Key Management server (KM server)

The Microsoft Exchange Server computer that has the key management component installed. Only one KM server can be installed in an organization.


Local Delivery Message definition
local delivery message

A message sent between Microsoft Exchange Server recipients that share the same home server. Local delivery messages are processed by the information store, not by the MTA.


Local Replication definition
local replication

See offline folders.


Mailbox definition
mailbox

The delivery location for all incoming mail messages for a designated owner. Information in a user's mailbox is stored in the private information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A mailbox can contain received messages, message attachments, folders, folder hierarchy, and more. Mailboxes are set up by the administrator.


MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) definition
MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface)

A common interface that Microsoft Outlook components use to access data from server components. Messaging applications and information services that comply with MAPI can be "plugged" into Microsoft Exchange Server and Outlook to provide additional functionality.


Message Handling System (MHS) definition
message handling system (MHS)

An X.400 message handling system is a collection of user agents and message transfer agents (MTAs) that work together to transfer messages from one point to another.


Message Transfer Agent (MTA) definition
message transfer agent (MTA)

Like a postal service, the MTA routes messages to other Microsoft Exchange Server MTAs or gateways, information stores, and other X.400 MTAs in foreign systems. It also maps addresses, routes messages, and converts message formats.

In MS Mail, the Message Transfer Agent is a program that transfers external mail and system mail between postoffices on the network. These programs include the External Mail program, and the directory synchronization agents.

In the X.400 message handling system, a message transfer agent is a server-based process in the message transfer system that is responsible for routing and delivering messages. It is equivalent to a local postal sorting office. See the CCITT X.400 Recommendation for additional information.


Message Transfer Applications definition
message transfer applications

Applications that transfer messages between systems on behalf of many entities, such as gateways.


Message Transfer Protocol definition
Message transfer protocol

In X.400, the P1 protocol that is used to establish communication between two message transfer agents (MTAs).


Messaging-Aware Application definition
messaging-aware application

An application in which basic messaging capabilities add value to the primary function of the application, but messaging is not the primary function of the application, for example, a word processor that can send documents to other users.


Messaging-Based Application definition
messaging-based application

An application that requires full access to all back-end messaging services, including the message database, directory, and transport services, for example, a mail client.


Messaging-Enabled Application definition
messaging-enabled application

An application that has some type of messaging capability as its main function. For example, a forms-routing application that sends an expense report to a series of recipients and records their comments.


Messaging Profile definition
messaging profile

A group of settings that provides Microsoft Exchange Server with essential information about a client's configuration. It contains the delivery location for incoming messages, files, and other items, the location of the user's personal address book, and a list of all the information services that are available. A user may have multiple profiles on a single client for different configurations; however, only one profile can be used at any one time. See also user profile.


Microsoft Mail Connector definition
Microsoft Mail Connector

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that provides seamless connectivity to MS Mail (PC), MS Mail (AppleTalk) (now known as Quarterdeck Mail), and MS Mail (PC) gateways.


Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector definition
Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector

Enables Microsoft Exchange Server to exchange Microsoft Schedule+ free and busy information with MS Mail (PC). The Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector is an extension to the Microsoft Mail Connector.


MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) definition
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)

A message format consisting of a structured message header and structured message body, with specifications for multimedia objects. It includes support for word processing documents, PostScript files, graphic and binary files, video, voice messages, and other messaging types.


MIME-Conformant User Agent definition
MIME-conformant user agent

A user agent that you use to send and receive MIME messages.


Multi-valued Property definition
multi-valued property

A property that has multiple values associated with it. An example of a multi-valued property is an address that has multiple values including MS e-mail, X.400, and SMTP addresses.


Network Share definition
network share

A shared directory on a file server to which users can connect in order to install and run Microsoft Exchange. One network client share can be used by numerous clients if they are using the same network operating system.


Object definition
object

A record in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory such as a site, server, connector, mailbox, or distribution list. All objects in an organization can be managed in the Administrator program. The overall structure of an organization is determined by how objects are linked and how their properties are defined.


Offline Folders definition
offline folders

A feature of Microsoft Outlook that makes public folders and mailbox folders available to users when they are offline. Folders configured for offline availability are stored in an .ost file on the user's disk. When users log on to their home server and the network connection is re-established, Outlook automatically synchronizes the offline copy of the folder that is stored locally on the client with the copy on the server.


Organization definition
organization

A collection of Microsoft Exchange servers, grouped into sites, that are linked together to provide all the information, messaging, and connectivity needed by a workgroup. The organization is the largest administrative unit and encompasses all the Microsoft Exchange Server computers that provide the messaging infrastructure for your company.


Parent Object definition
parent object

An object in the Administrator program directory hierarchy that is superior to another object, the child object. For example, the server container is the parent object of the server object because the server object is in the server container. Any permissions on the parent object are inherited by the child object.


Personal Folder File (.PST File) definition
personal folder file (.pst file)

Contains information intended for private use that can be stored locally on a user's disk or on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. A personal folder can also be designated as the delivery location for mail.


Personal Address Book definition
personal address book

Users can create and maintain the personal address book to keep track of recipient addresses contained in the Address Book that they use frequently. They can also use the personal address book to create and maintain personal distribution lists, and custom recipient addresses for users in outside systems such as the Internet or X.400. The personal address book, also called a .pab file, can be stored on a server or on a user's disk.


Postoffice definition
post office

A common set of data files on a server shared among all users of MS Mail (PC) and MS Mail (AppleTalk) (now known as Quarterdeck Mail).


Private Information Store definition
private information store

In Microsoft Exchange Server, the subcomponent of the information store that maintains all messages exchanged by one person or a group of people. Every user has a personal mailbox on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer that contains personal messages.


Property definition
property

The attributes of a Microsoft Exchange Server directory object that can typically be selected using property pages for the specified object. For example, to modify the permissions on a mailbox, make changes to the mailbox's Permissions property page.


Public Folder definition
public folder

A folder located on Microsoft Exchange Server computers that facilitates the exchange of all types of information between groups of people in an organization. A public folder can include information such as e-mail messages, spreadsheets, graphics, and voice mail and can be configured for different types of applications, for example, bulletin boards, discussion forums, and customer tracking systems. Public folders are stored on Microsoft Exchange Server computers.


Public Folder Affinity definition
public folder affinity

Enables clients in one site to connect to public folders in other sites. Public folder affinity reduces network traffic caused by replication and reduces required storage space.


Public Folder Replication definition
public folder replication

The process of maintaining multiple public folder replicas. Public folder replication allows you to store copies of a public folder on multiple Microsoft Exchange Server computers, guaranteeing that they remain synchronized.


Public Information Store definition
public information store

In Microsoft Exchange Server, the subcomponent of the information store that maintains information stored in public folders.


Recipient definition
recipient

An object in the directory that can receive messages and information. Microsoft Exchange Server recipients are mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.


Recipient Address definition
recipient address

A set of strings that identify a recipient and follow certain standards such as those established for X.400 and SMTP systems.


Remote Procedure Call (RPC) definition
remote procedure call (RPC)

A message-passing facility that is independent of the underlying network and allows a distributed application to call services that are available on various machines in a network. Microsoft Exchange Server uses RPC for client-server communication.


Revocation definition
revocation

A feature of advanced security that warns users when they receive signed messages from users the organization no longer trusts. The KM server manages revocation using a revocation list that contains the serial number and the expiration date of each revoked user's certificate.


Routing definition
routing

The process of transferring and delivering messages to the appropriate recipient.


Routing Cost definition
routing cost

Used by the MTA to determine which route a message will take to reach its destination if there is more than one possible route. This is useful for redundancy and load balancing traffic across connections and between servers.


Routing Table definition
routing table

Contains information that the MTA needs to route messages to their destinations.


Roving User definition
roving user

Users who log on to Microsoft Outlook from different computers in an organization.


Security Context definition
security context

An aspect of Windows NT Server that controls the access a user, a process, or a service has to system services.


Security File definition
security file

An encrypted file (.epf file) that is automatically generated to store advanced security information. Every mailbox has one security file that is used to encrypt and sign messages. It can be stored on a server or on a client's disk.


Schedule File definition
schedule file

A file that Microsoft Schedule+ automatically generates to store scheduling information for users. The schedule file (.scd file) can be stored on a server or on the client's disk. The information in this file is automatically stored in a hidden private folder on the user's home server so other users with the appropriate permissions can access it.


Schema definition
schema

See directory schema.


Service Account definition
service account

A Windows NT Server user account that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to start and run Microsoft Exchange Server services. Microsoft Exchange Server computers use the service account to validate other servers in the site and give them access to Microsoft Exchange Server services. All Microsoft Exchange Server computers in the site must use the same service account or they cannot communicate with each other.


Signing definition
signing

A feature of advanced security that verifies to an e-mail recipient the identity of the sender. Signing also verifies that the content of an e-mail message has not been modified during transit. Signing prevents the originator of a message from attempting to send a message under the premise of another identity.


Site definition
site

One or more Microsoft Exchange Server computers generally corresponding to a single geographical location that share the same directory information (mailboxes, distribution lists, routing tables). All servers in a site must be able to communicate with each other through synchronous remote procedure calls (RPCs).


Site Connector definition
site connector

A tool provided with Microsoft Exchange Server that connects sites on the same local area network (LAN).


SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) definition
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A session protocol used to transfer electronic mail between computers. It is a server-to-server protocol defined in STD 10, RFC 821. The Microsoft Exchange Server Internet Mail Service uses SMTP to transfer messages between a Microsoft Exchange Server site and an SMTP messaging system.


System Attendant definition
system attendant

A general maintenance service that must be running in order for Microsoft Exchange Server processes to run. Some of the tasks the system attendant performs include monitoring the state of messaging connections between servers, assisting in running monitoring tools, generating e-mail addresses for new message recipients, and logging information for message tracking purposes.


Target Server definition
target server

A Microsoft Exchange Server computer that acts as the end-point of a messaging link between two sites configured as a site connector. This server is responsible for routing messages through that link.


Transaction Log File definition
transaction log file

A type of file that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to provide fault tolerance in the event that data needs to be restored. When data is written to the information store or directory databases from memory, it is synchronously written to a transaction log file. Transaction log files can be used to construct data not yet written to the database in the event of a failure such as a power outage or a disk failure, provided the log files do not reside on the disk that failed.


Token definition
token

A random 8-character string used to enable digital signatures and encryption for a user or recover keys for a user. A token is used only once. It secures the connection between the Key Management server (KM server) and the client before digital signatures and encryption have been established.


Trust Relationship definition
trust relationship

Trust relationships are links between Windows NT Server domains that enable pass-through authentication in which a user has only one user account in one domain, yet can access the entire network. User accounts and global groups defined in a trusted domain can be given rights and resource permissions in a trusting domain, even though those accounts don't exist in the trusting domain's database. A trusting domain honors the logon authentication of a trusted domain.


User Agent (UA) definition
user agent

An X.400 or SMTP message system entity that acts on behalf of the user (the person or entity sending and receiving mail). Microsoft Mail is an example of a user agent.


User Account definition
user account

Consists of all the information that defines a user to Windows NT Server. This includes the user name and password required for the user to log on, the groups in which the user account has membership, and the rights and permissions the user has for using the system and accessing its resources.

Important Note: User passwords are known only to the user and cannot be viewed by the system administrator. Should a user forget a password, the user must set up his or her profile and personal folder file again. Any information associated with the user's original .pst file will be permanently lost.


User Profile definition
user profile

A group of settings used by Windows NT Server and Windows 95 that provides the operating system with essential information about a client's configuration.


View definition
view

A combination of settings in Microsoft Outlook for displaying and organizing the contents of a folder. Views allow users to view messages in folders by date, sender, recipient name, or file size by using a customized view.


X.25 Public Carrier definition
X.25 public carrier

A public data switching network that uses the X.25 communications protocol.


X.25 Public PAD (Packet Assembler/Disassembler) definition
X.25 public PAD (packet assembler/disassembler)

The hardware and software provided by an X.25 public carrier that allows other users to access an X.25 network by modem.


X.400 Message Format definition
X.400 message format

A message format consisting of two basic components, an envelope and the content.


X.400 Recommendation definition
X.400 Recommendation

A set of recommendations that defines the standard interfaces that make up an electronic messaging system for the enterprise. The X.400 Recommendation was developed by the Comite Consultatif Internationale de Telegraphie et Telephonie (CCITT) — a division of the United Nations — based on the OSI Reference Model and the protocols defined by the International Organization for Standardization (OSI). The CCITT is now called the United Nations International Telecommunications Union (ITU).


X.400 Connector definition
X.400 Connector

A Microsoft Exchange Server component that is integrated with the message transfer agent (MTA) and can be configured to connect sites within Microsoft Exchange Server, or to route messages to foreign X.400 systems. When handling communication between Microsoft Exchange Server and foreign X.400 systems, it maps addresses and converts Microsoft Exchange Server messages to native X.400 messages and vice versa. The X.400 connector conforms to the 1984 and 1988 CCITT X.400 standards.


X.400 Transport Stack definition
X.400 transport stack

Networking software required to support X.400 server-to-server message transport.


General HTTP (Web) Site Settings

  Overview

Use the General property page to define the display name, view the directory name, enable the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), and grant anonymous users access to published public folders and the global address list.

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable protocol

  Allow anonymous users to access the anonymous public folders

  Allow anonymous users to browse the global address list

  Administrative note


Display name

The name that appears in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters. The default is HTTP (Web) Site Settings.


Directory name

Defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Enable Protocol

Enable e-mail clients to access mailboxes using HTTP.


Allow anonymous users to access the anonymous public folders

Select to give anonymous users access to public folders published on the Internet by this Microsoft Exchange Server computer.


Allow anonymous users to browse the global address list

Select to give anonymous users the ability to browse the global address list published on the Internet by this Microsoft Exchange Server computer.


Administrative note

Enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions HTTP (Web) Site Settings

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles. For more information about permissions, see Microsoft Exchange Server Getting Started.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Folder Shortcuts HTTP (Web) Site Settings

  Overview

Public folder shortcuts are displayed to anonymous users logging on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer from the Internet. Use the Folder Shortcuts property page to select a public folder or set of public folders that you want to create shortcuts to, view details of a folder, or remove a folder.

  New Button

  Properties Button

  Remove Button


New Button

Opens the Public Folders dialog box that displays a list of all public folders. When you select a public folder, a shortcut is automatically created and displays in the Public folder shortcuts box.


Properties Button

Displays the properties for the selected public folder.


Remove Button

Removes the selected public folder from the Public folder shortcuts box.


Public Folders

Use the Public Folders dialog box to select a public folder or set of public folders that you want to create shortcuts to.


Advanced HTTP (Web) Site Settings

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to set the number of Address Book entries returned to authorized users. If a request returns a greater number than the default value, a message informs the user to refine the search. The default limits users to 50 entries. If you do not set a limit, the entire Address Book is displayed, which is not desirable for large directories.

Option	Description
No limit	Select to display an unlimited number of Address Book entries to the user.
Maximum number of entries	Select to limit the number of Address Book entries returned to the user, and then type a number. The default is 50.


 General IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Use site defaults for all properties

  Enable protocol

  Include all public folders when a folder list is requested

  Enable fast message retrieval

  Administrative note


Use site defaults for all properties

Assumes the Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) properties configured for the site where the server is located.


Permissions IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method an Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for an IMAP4 client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client's vendor if you are unsure which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most IMAP4 clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text)  using SSL	Use SSL protocol to encrypt clear text on port 993.
Windows NT Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Outlook Express.
Windows NT Challenge/Response  using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 993.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Anonymous IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

You can specify whether Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1, (IMAP4) users can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously. For example, if you want certain public folders to be accessible to users outside of your organization, you can enable anonymous connections. IMAP4 users connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously don't need a Windows NT user account to access information. Microsoft Exchange Server doesn't perform password verification; however, it does log the user's password in the Windows NT Event Log.

To allow anonymous access, select the Allow anonymous access check box.

To specify the name of the anonymous account, type the name in the IMAP4 anonymous account box. The default name is Anonymous.


Message Format IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the settings in the Message Format property page to specify the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when they are retrieved by an Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) client. These settings are based on the message format that the IMAP4 clients support when connecting to the server. The message content format and character set option can be configured for individual mailboxes, servers, and sites.

Note

Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead they are retrieved by the IMAP4 client in the format the message was composed in.

Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) clients such as Microsoft Outlook are capable of multilingual support, but they compose messages using Microsoft Windows code pages instead of Internet character sets. For most languages, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character set and the code page. If this is the case, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically assigns the correct character set that corresponds to the code page that the message was composed in. However, if multiple character sets exist for the same code page, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the character setting specified in the Character set box in the Message Format property page. If the character set is not appropriate for the code page, a default character set is used. For example, suppose a message is received that uses Japanese code page 932. That code page can be mapped to one of several character sets including JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC. If the Character set box is set to Shift-JIS, that character setting is used. However, if the Character set box is set to US-ASCII, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the default character set for that code page, which is JIS.

Messages that are received from the Internet already have a character set specified or will have one assigned when the message is received by the Internet Mail Service.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable. This is the default.
Provide message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as HTML is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message.
Provide message body as HTML	A MIME body part in HTML is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as plain text is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both HTML and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich text formatting such as bold, color, and italic to appear in messages. Clients such as Microsoft Outlook Express can read HTML.
Character set	Specifies the character set that is used when generating MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server.
Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format	Rich text in messages retains character formatting such as bold, color, and italic. If rich text format is enabled, messages that are retrieved by the IMAP4 client contain Microsoft Exchange Server rich text format information as message attachments. IMAP4 clients that understand rich text format, such as future versions of Microsoft Outlook, use the information to display a rich text representation of the message.


Idle Time-out IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Specify an idle time-out to close Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed.


General IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable protocol

  Include all public folders when a folder list is requested

  Enable fast message retrieval

  Administrative note


Display Name

The protocol name that displays in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters and is not case-sensitive.


Directory Name

Defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Enable Protocol

Enable e-mail clients to access mailboxes using Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4).


Include All Public Folders when a Folder List is Requested

Some Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) clients exhibit poor performance when listing a large number of public folders. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server enables public folders to be listed for all clients. Clear the Include all public folders when a folder list is requested check box to disable listing public folders. Disabling this option prevents listing public folders in response to the IMAP4 LIST "" * command and improves performance for clients that have problems listing public folders.


Enable Fast Message Retrieval

Some Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) clients require Microsoft Exchange Server to report exact message sizes. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server increases the speed of message retrieval by approximating message sizes. Clear the Enable fast message retrieval check box to disable fast message retrieval to support e-mail clients that require the reporting of exact message sizes.


Administrative note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method an Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for an IMAP4 client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client's vendor if you are unsure of which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most IMAP4 clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text)  using SSL	Use SSL protocol to encrypt clear text on port 993.
Windows NT Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Outlook Express.
Windows NT Challenge/Response  using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 993.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Anonymous IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

You can specify whether Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) users can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously. For example, if you want certain public folders to be accessible to users outside of your organization, you can enable anonymous connections. IMAP4 users connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously don't need a Windows NT user account to access information. Microsoft Exchange Server doesn't perform password verification; however, it does log the user's password in the Windows NT Event Log.

To allow anonymous access, select the Allow anonymous access check box.

To specify the name of the anonymous account, type the name in the IMAP4 anonymous account box. The default name is Anonymous.


Message Format IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the settings in the Message Format property page to specify the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when they are retrieved by an Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) client. These settings are based on the message format that the IMAP4 clients support when connecting to the server. The message content format and character set option can be configured for individual mailboxes, servers, and sites.

Note

Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead they are retrieved by the IMAP4 client in the format the message was composed in.

Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) clients such as Microsoft Outlook are capable of multilingual support, but they compose messages using Microsoft Windows code pages instead of Internet character sets. For most languages, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character set and the code page. If this is the case, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically assigns the correct character set that corresponds to the code page that the message was composed in. However, if multiple character sets exist for the same code page, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the character setting specified in the Character set box in the Message Format property page. If the character set is not appropriate for the code page, a default character set is used. For example, suppose a message is received that uses Japanese code page 932. That code page can be mapped to one of several character sets including JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC. If the Character set box is set to Shift-JIS, that character setting is used. However, if the Character set box is set to US-ASCII, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the default character set for that code page, which is JIS.

Messages that are received from the Internet already have a character set specified or will have one assigned to it when the message is received by the Internet Mail Service.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable. This is the default.
Provide message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as HTML is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message.
Provide message body as HTML	A MIME body part in HTML is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as plain text is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both HTML and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich text formatting such as bold, color, and italic to appear in messages. Clients such as Microsoft Outlook Express can read HTML.
Character set	Specifies the character set that is used when generating MIME and non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server.
Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format	Rich text in messages retains character formatting such as bold, color, and italic. If rich text format is enabled, messages that are retrieved by the IMAP4 client contain Microsoft Exchange Server rich text format information as attachments to the messages. IMAP4 clients, such as the Microsoft Internet Mail Provider, that understand rich text format use the information to display a rich text representation of the message.


Idle Time-out IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Specify an idle time-out to close Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed.


General (Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Computer Name

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Computer Name

The name given to the computer where the Microsoft Exchange Server connector is installed.


Message Size

You can specify a size limit for messages passed through the connector or service. Setting a maximum message size can reduce the amount of mail traffic across your network. If the message size is exceeded, the message will be returned to the sender with a non-delivery report (NDR). This setting applies only to outbound messages, with the exception of the Internet Mail Service for which it applies to both inbound and outbound messages.

Option	Description
No limit	Messages of all sizes are transferred. This is the default.
Maximum (K)	Type the maximum message size that can be transferred.


Permissions (Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Connections (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Connections property page to specify default connection information for the Internet Mail Service.

  Transfer Mode

  Advanced Button

  Message Delivery

  Accept Connections

  Service Message Queues

  Clients can only submit if homed on this server

  Clients can only submit if authentication account matches submission address


Advanced Button

Displays the Advanced dialog box. Use the dialog box to specify the maximum number of inbound and outbound connections the Internet Mail Service will accept and initiate at one time, to define the maximum number of messages sent during each connection, and to adjust the number of connections and messages based on resources available in your environment.


Transfer Mode

Specify the transfer mode for the Internet Mail Service.

Option	Description
Inbound & Outbound	Accept inbound messages and send outbound messages.
Inbound Only	Accept only inbound messages.
Outbound Only	Send only outbound messages.
None (Flush Queues)	Do not accept inbound or outbound messages. This allows time for pending messages to be delivered.


Advanced Dialog (Internet Mail Service)
Advanced Dialog box (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Specify the maximum number of inbound and outbound connections the Internet Mail Service will accept and initiate at one time, define the maximum number of messages sent during each connection, and adjust the number of connections and messages based on resources available in your environment.

  Max. Number Of Inbound Connections

  Max. Number Of Outbound Connections

  Max. Number Of Connections To A Single Host

  Max. Number Of Messages Sent In A Connection

  Reset Default Values


Reset Default Values

Return all options to default settings.


Max. Number of Messages Sent in a Connection

The maximum number of messages to be sent during each outbound connection.


Max. Number of Connections to a Single Host

The maximum number of connections the Internet Mail Service can make to a single host at one time.


Max. Number of Outbound Connections

The maximum number of outbound connections the Internet Mail Service can make at one time.


Max. Number of Inbound Connections

The maximum number of inbound connections the Internet Mail Service can accept at one time.


Message Delivery

Configure the Internet Mail Service to use Domain Name System (DNS) queries or to deliver messages to a specified host. To deliver mail to a specific host, select Forward All Messages To Host, and type the IP or fully qualified address of the host.

Specify the RAS connection that you want to use when making an Internet Mail Service dial-up connection by selecting the Dial using box and then selecting an available connection on the Dial-up Connections property page.

Select Queue messages for ETRN to hold messages until an ETRN command is received. This is useful for Internet service providers. Messages are queued on this server until the ETRN request is received, rather than being sent from server to server in an attempt to deliver them.

Choose E-Mail Domain to specify delivery by e-mail domain.


Specify By E-Mail Domain

Defines the way messages will be delivered based on the domain name of the destination.

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up Button

  Move Down Button


Remove Button

Removes the selected e-mail domain from the list.


Edit Button

Displays the Edit E-Mail Domain dialog box. Use the dialog box to change the name of an existing e-mail domain.


Add Button

Displays the Add E-Mail Domain dialog box. Use the dialog box to create an e-mail domain.


Move Up and Move Down Buttons

Use Move Up and Move Down to specify the order of the e-mail domain list for the Internet Mail Service.


Add or Edit E-Mail Domain

Use the Add E-Mail Domain dialog box to add an e-mail domain. Use Edit E-Mail Domain to edit an existing domain. Type the name of the new domain or edit the current name. Choose DNS or forward messages to a host that you type in the box.

  E-Mail Domain

  Delivery


Delivery

Use DNS

Choose this option when you want to use Domain Name System (DNS) queries to deliver messages to the domain specified in E-Mail Domain.

Forward all messages for this domain to host

Choose this option to forward e-mail to the host you specify. Type the host name in the box provided.

Dial using

Choose the RAS connection that you want to make an Internet Mail Service dial-up connection to a remote site or an Internet service provider.

Queue messages for ETRN

Choose to hold messages until an ETRN command is received. Messages are queued on this server until the ETRN request is received, rather than being sent from server to server in an attempt to deliver them.


E-Mail Domain

Type the name of the new e-mail domain or change the existing name.


Accept Connections

If you select From any host (secure or non-secure), messages from any host not explicitly listed will be accepted by default.

Select Only from hosts using to indicate whether the connection uses authentication, encryption, or both, by default.

Choose Hosts to override the default settings for certain host computers that you want to accept or reject messages from, or require authentication or encryption from.


Specify Hosts

Use Hosts to identify the hosts that you will accept or reject messages from.

  IP Address

  Mask

  Action

  Relay

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up Button

  Move Down Button


IP Address

Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the host.


Mask

Displays the mask for the IP address.


Action

Identifies whether messages will be accepted or rejected from the host.


Relay

Displays an X for hosts that are relay servers. If the host is not a relay server, Relay is blank.


Remove Button

Removes the selected host from the list of hosts that you will either accept or reject messages from.


Edit Button

Choose Edit to change whether you want to accept or reject messages from the selected host. You can also change the IP address or mask for a host that you are currently accepting or rejecting messages from.


Add Button

Choose Add to specify the IP address and mask for the host that you want to accept or reject messages from.


Move Up Button

Select an IP Address in the Specify Hosts list and select Move Up to move it above the previous item in the list.


Move Down Button

Select an IP Address in the Specify Hosts list and select Move Down to move it below the next item in the list.


Add or Edit Hosts

Use this dialog box to add or change a host IP address and choose whether the connection will be accepted or rejected (messages originating from the host will not be received).

  Accept connection from this host

  Reject connection from this host

  IP Address

  Mask

  Only accept from this host if it uses

  This host is a relay server


Mask

Type the mask for the IP address.

To control access, the IP address specified is matched against the IP address of the host that is connecting to the Internet Mail Service. The mask specifies which bits are relevant in the match. In Boolean logic, this is equivalent to exclusive-oring the addresses, then anding the result with the mask. If the result is zero, then it is a match.

For example:

IP 192.11.154.0

Mask: 255.255.255.0

Therefore, any IP address in 192.11.154.n would match, where n = 1-254.


IP Address

Type the IP address of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) hosts(s) that will be accepted or rejected. Wildcarding is accomplished using the Mask box. If you are only specifying a single IP address to be rejected, you do not need to use the Mask box.


Reject connection from this host

Choose this option if you do not want to receive messages from this host.


Accept connection from this host

Choose this option if you want to receive messages from this host.


Only accept from this host if it uses

Choose this option if you want to accept connections from hosts using security. Choose Authentication, Encryption or Auth and Encrypt.


This host is a relay server

Choose this option if you want to override the security settings in the Connections property page and the client requirements in the Add dialog box.


Message Filtering

Use Message Filtering to add a domain and user that cannot deliver messages to your site or to change a domain and user.

To prevent all users in a specific domain from delivering messages to your site type the user's alias and domain name in the following format: <username>@<domain>. For example, someone@microsoft.com.

To prevent all users in a specific domain from delivering messages to your site type the domain name. For example, microsoft.com.

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

Delete messages instead of moving to the Turf directory

To save and automatically move messages from the specified sender to the Turf directory, clear the Delete messages instead of moving to the Turf directory check box.


Add Button

Choose Add to specify the domain and user that you want to prevent message delivery from.


Edit Button

Choose Edit to change the selected domain and user.


Remove Button

Choose Remove to delete the selected domain and user from the list of domains and users that you are preventing message delivery from.


Service Message Queues

Retry Interval (hrs.)

The Internet Mail Service can be set to wait a specified number of hours before retrying a host to which a previous connection attempt has failed. If the Internet Mail Service attempts to deliver a message to a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host for which it has obtained an IP address and does not receive a response from the host, the connector attempts to reconnect after the period of time specified in the Retry interval box.

The first number in the list determines the time the Internet Mail Service will wait between the initial delivery attempt and the first retry. The second number is the amount of time the Internet Mail Service will wait between the first retry and the second retry. The last specified time interval will be repeated until either the connection is made or the specified timeout value has been reached.

Message Timeouts Button

Message timeout values can be specified for urgent (high importance), normal, and non-urgent (low importance) messages. If the timeout is reached before the message can be sent, the sender is notified with a non-delivery report (NDR) and the message is not sent.


Clients can only submit if homed on this server

Select to allow clients to submit messages only if they have a mailbox on this server.

Note

This client restriction requires that you select Only from hosts using: Authentication or Only from hosts using: Auth and Encrypt in the Accept Connections box.


Clients can only submit if authentication account matches submission address

Select to allow clients to submit messages only if their Windows NT account matches the address in the From field of the message.

Note

This client restriction requires that you select Only from hosts using: Authentication or Only from hosts using: Auth and Encrypt in the Accept Connections box.


Message Timeouts

Message timeout values can be specified for urgent (high importance), normal, and non-urgent (low importance) messages. If the timeout is reached before the message can be sent, the sender is notified with a non-delivery report (NDR) and the message is not sent.

  Urgent Message Timeout (hrs)

  Normal Message Timeout (hrs)

  Non-Urgent Message Timeout (hrs)

  Disable notifications for queued mail

  Notify sender for queued mail

  Reset Default Values Button


Reset Default Values Button

Resets the default hours values for the timeout and notification frequency boxes on the Message Timeouts dialog box.


Notify sender for queued mail

Choose one or more options to notify the sender of queued mail.

The Internet Mail Service notifies the sender when an outbound message has been queued beyond the time specified in the Connections property page. The default is to only notify the sender for queued mail of high importance.

Option	Description
Urgent mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of high importance. This is the default. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. The default is 4 hours.
Normal mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of normal importance. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. When selected, the default is 12 hours.
Non-urgent mail every (hrs)	Select to enable notification for messages of low importance. Type a value for the number of hours before notification. When selected, the default is 24 hours.
You can disable notification by choosing Disable notifications for queued mail.


Disable notifications for queued mail

Choosing this option means the Internet Mail Service will not notify the sender when an outbound message has been queued beyond the time specified on the Connections property page.


Non-urgent message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Service will try to send a message of low importance. The default is 72 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Normal message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Service will try to send a message of normal importance. The default is 48 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Urgent message timeout (hrs)

The maximum amount of time the Internet Mail Service will try to send a message of high importance. The default is 24 hours. The maximum value is 999.


Internet Mail (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Internet Mail property page to:

Assign an administrator's mailbox to receive delivery status messages.

Set up non-delivery report (NDR) notifications.

Specify a message attachment content format.

Specify a default character set.

Specify message content by domain.

Enable rich text for outbound messages.

Disable out-of-office responses.

Enable or disable automatic replies to the Internet and display names for outbound messages.

Specify the maximum number of characters per line.

Specify a fixed-width font.

Specify client S/MIME support.

Enable message tracking.

  Administrator's Mailbox

  Change Button

  Notifications Button

  Attachments (outbound)

  Character Sets

  E-Mail Domain Button

  Clients Support S/MIME Signatures

  Convert Inbound Message To Fixed-Width Font

  Advanced Options Button

  Enable Message Tracking


Administrator's Mailbox

Displays the recipient for the administrator's mailbox. To specify a different recipient, choose Change.


Change Button

Displays a dialog box that enables you to select a different administrator's mailbox.


Notifications Button

Displays the Notifications dialog box. Use the dialog box to specify when, and under what conditions, you want to send notifications for non-delivery reports (NDRs).


Attachments (outbound)

Specify whether outbound messages with attachments will be encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), UNIX-to-UNIX Encode (UUENCODE), or UUENCODE with the BinHex option for Macintosh files.


Character Sets

Specify the default character set to be used when sending outbound and receiving inbound Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) and non-MIME messages. When the content conversion occurs from Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to Exchange internal format and vice versa, the character set you specify is used. The Internet Mail Service should be configured to match remote SMTP hosts, or characters can be lost.


E-Mail Domain Button

Displays the E-Mail Domain dialog box. If you want to use different encoding methods and character sets for individual domains, use the dialog box to specify settings for the domains. These settings will override the default message content information and allow you to configure individual domains separately.


Clients Support S/MIME Signatures

Enable if your clients support S/MIME signatures (MIME multipart/signed).  Disable to convert messages with S/MIME signatures (MIME signed messages) to MIME unsigned messages. This allows recipients using e-mail client programs that don't support S/MIME to view signed messages.


Convert Inbound Message To Fixed-Width Font

Enable to have all inbound messages from the Internet Mail Service display in a fixed-width font (Courier).


Advanced Options Button

Displays the Advanced Options dialog box. Use the dialog box to specify whether advanced options such as Microsoft Exchange rich text, word-wrap, out-of-office replies, and automatic replies will be enabled.


Enable Message Tracking

When selected, causes the message transfer agent (MTA) to create a daily log file that contains routing information about all the messages that the MTA processes. These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages.


E-Mail Domain

Allows you to add, edit, remove, or rearrange e-mail domains. If you want to use different encoding methods and character sets for individual domains, use the E-Mail Domain dialog box to specify settings for the domains. These settings will override the default message content information and allow you to configure individual domains separately.

  E-Mail Domain

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up Button

  Move Down Button


Remove Button

Removes the selected e-mail domain from the list.


Edit Button

Displays the Edit E-Mail Domain dialog box. Use the dialog box to change the domain name, maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation for the selected domain.


Add Button

Displays the Add E-Mail Domain dialog box. Use the dialog box to specify the domain name, maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation for the new domain.


Move Up Button

Choose a domain in the E-Mail Domain list and select Move Up to move it above the previous item in the list.


Move Down Button

Choose a domain in the E-Mail Domain list and select Move Down to move it below the next item in the list.


E-Mail Domain

Lists e-mail domain names or IP addresses for domains. For a domain, you can change the maximum message size, encoding method, and character set translation.

The Internet Mail Service searches the list starting at the top and moves down until a match is found. Therefore, subdomain names should be listed before domains. You can use Move Up and Move Down to reposition domains in the list.


Add or Edit E-Mail Domain

Allows you to specify or change encoding methods and character sets for individual domains.

  E-Mail Domain

  Maximum Message Size

  Send Attachments Using

  Advanced Options Button

  Character Set Translation


E-Mail Domain

Type the domain name or IP address of the domain. Subdomains and fully qualified domain names are allowed. Wildcard characters are not allowed.


Maximum Message Size

Specify the maximum number of bytes for messages sent using this connector or choose No Limit.


Notifications

Use the Notifications dialog box to specify when, and under what conditions, the Internet Mail Service should notify the administrator of non-delivery reports (NDRs).

  Always send notifications when non-delivery reports are generated

  Send notifications for these non-delivery reports


Send notifications for these non-delivery reports

Select to specify the types of non-delivery reports (NDRs) the administrator will receive. By default, Multiple matches for an E-Mail address occurred is the only option enabled.


Always send notifications when non-delivery reports are generated

Select to notify the administrator about all non-delivery reports. The box is clear by default.


Advanced Options

Use the Advanced Options dialog box to enable or disable advanced options such as Microsoft Exchange rich text, word-wrap, and automatic replies.

  Send Microsoft Exchange rich text formatting

  Message text word wrap

  Disable Out of Office responses to the Internet

  Disable Automatic Replies to the Internet

  Disable sending Display names to the Internet

  Reset default values


Reset Default Values Button

Resets the advanced option boxes to their default values.


Disable sending Display names to the Internet

Select to disable display names for messages sent through the Internet Mail Service. Clear to enable display names for messages sent through the Internet Mail Service (the default).


Disable Automatic Replies to the Internet

Clear to allow automatic replies to messages received from the Internet. Select to disable automatic replies to messages received by the Internet Mail Service (the default).


Disable Out Of Office responses to the Internet

Clear to allow out-of-office responses to the Internet. Select to disable out-of-office responses to messages received by the Internet Mail Service (the default).


Message text word wrap

Never

Prevents text from wrapping on outbound non-MIME messages. Message text word-wrap cannot be configured for MIME messages. The ability to display a specific number of characters per line depends on the receiving computer's capabilities.

At column

Lines will be wrapped at the specified column.


Send Microsoft Exchange rich text formatting

Select Always to always send Microsoft Exchange rich text, User to send Microsoft Exchange rich text only when enabled for the recipient (the default), or Never to never send Microsoft Exchange rich text.


Address Space (Connector)

  Overview

Connectors are used to create paths for messages to be sent outside a site. These paths are represented by address spaces. Address spaces can be used to balance the messaging load when you use multiple connectors. For example, if you have two Internet Mail Services, you can designate one connector to process messages destined for domainA and domainB, and the other to process messages destined for domainC. However, if you use two Internet Mail Services to handle a large throughput to a single domain, you can configure both connectors to process the same addresses for equal load balancing.

Note

If you have multiple routes to the same destination, the Internet Mail Service uses only the lowest cost route. If that connection is unavailable due to a communications problem, the Internet Mail Service does not use any of the higher cost routes. You can use mail exchanger (MX) records in Domain Name System (DNS) to override this and allow incoming mail to use a secondary route.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  Scope Column

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Type Column

Displays the type of address, such as X.400 or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address space that the connector is responsible for. Type an asterisk (*) to have the message transfer agent (MTA) send all mail of that type to the connector.

Wildcard characters are implicit in the address space. For example, if you enter the ccmail address space entry * at SERVER1, it matches all recipient addresses for the post office SERVER1. You can type a wildcard (* or ?) when necessary to specify a group of addresses. For example, entering SITE?? specifies all entries that contain SITE followed by two alphanumeric characters such as SITE01 and SITE11.


Cost Column

Defines the cost associated with the address space. Each address space cost is used to optimize outbound message routing but does not affect message reception. Routing costs range from 1 to 100. All mail is sent using the route with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal.


Scope Column

Defines the scope associated with the address space.


New Button

Opens the New Address Space dialog box that allows you to create a new address space.


New Address Space

Use the New Address Space dialog box to create a new address space. Select an address space type from the Select an address type list box.

  X400

  MS

  SMTP

  Other


Edit Button

Displays the Properties dialog box for the selected connector. Use the dialog box to modify addressing information.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address.


Other

Adds a new general address for the remote system. Type the address type, full address information, and the routing cost.


X400

In the various address information boxes, type the required X.400 address information. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


MS

In the various address information boxes, type the required Microsoft Mail address information. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


SMTP

Adds a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) address to the address space. Type the domain name or IP address of the SMTP system this connector is responsible for.

To route all SMTP messages through an Internet Mail Service, choose the New Internet template and choose OK without typing an e-mail domain. To route all messages to company.com through an Internet Mail Service, choose the New Internet template and type company.com under E-Mail Domain.


Delivery Restrictions (Internet Mail Service)
Delivery Restrictions (Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a foreign system, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject messages from box or does not appear in the Accept messages from box. Delivery restrictions are optional and do not affect incoming messages. The default is to accept messages from all senders and reject messages from none.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify


Accept Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will accept messages. Select All if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders, or select List and choose Modify to specify a list of senders.


Reject Messages From

A list of all senders from which this recipient will not accept messages. Select None if you want this recipient to accept messages from all senders, or select List, and choose Modify to specify a list of senders.


Modify

Opens the Address Book so you can select one or more recipients from the organization to add to either the Accept Messages From or the Reject Messages From boxes.


Connected Sites (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Connected Sites property page to ensure directory replication can take place and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed. Connected sites should list all sites that will receive mail through this Internet Mail Service, regardless of direct or indirect connection to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites is inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization

  Site

  Routing Address

  Cost

  New

  Edit

  Remove


Organization

The directory name of the organization.


Site

The name of the site that will be connected.


Routing Address

The details of the address for the connected site.


Cost

A value associated with sending to this address, connector, or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. The default is 1. The number can be between 1 and 100.


Type

The type of address to use for encapsulation. This is an address type that is defined for recipients in the directory. An example of an address type is SMTP.


New

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so you can define a new connected site. In the General property page, specify the Organization and Site. In the Routing Address property page, specify the Type, Address, and Cost.


Edit

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so you can edit a selected connected site. In the General property page, specify the Organization and Site. In the Routing Address property page, specify the Type, Address, and Cost.


Remove

Removes the selected connected site.


New/Edit MIME Type

Use the New MIME Type dialog box to specify or select a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content type and its associated extension. Use the Edit MIME Type dialog box to change a MIME content type or associated extension.

  MIME Content Type

  Associated Extension


Associated Extension

Type the extension that will be associated with the content type.


MIME Content Type

Lists the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content types. You can also type a new MIME content type.

In MIME there are primary types, which describe the general content of a message, and subtypes, which describe the specific format of the file. The two types are separated by a forward slash, such as text/plain.


Queues (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Queues property page to examine the Internet Mail Service queues on each server when you suspect there may be problems with Internet mail. You can view important information about messages in the queues and delete problem messages. However, you cannot change the order of messages in the queue.

  Queue Name

  Destination Host

  Originator

  Submit Time

  Delivery

  Details Button

  Refresh Button

  Delete Button

  Retry Now Button


Queue Name

There are four queues for the Internet Mail Service, two inbound and two outbound.

Outbound Internet messages travel from the MTA's Internet Mail Service queue to the Internet Mail Service queue. The Internet Mail Service converts the information store messages received from these queues to Internet mail format, and then places them in the Out queue until they are sent to the Internet.

The Internet Mail Service places messages received from the Internet in its In queue. It then converts messages from Internet mail format, and moves them to the queue in the information store to be delivered to Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

Select one of the following queues.

Option	Description
Inbound messages awaiting conversion	Incoming Internet messages waiting as files in the Exchsrvr\Imcdata\In directory to be converted or rerouted by the Internet Mail Service and then delivered to the information store.
Inbound messages awaiting delivery	Converted Internet messages in the MTS-IN queue awaiting final delivery in Microsoft Exchange Server.
Outbound messages awaiting conversion	Microsoft Exchange Server messages received from the MTA that are waiting in the MTS-OUT queue to be converted by the Internet Mail Service. The next destination is the Out queue.
Outgoing messages awaiting delivery	Converted Microsoft Exchange Server messages queued for delivery as Internet files in the Exchsrvr\Imcdata\Out directory. The next destination is the recipient's server. Because some messages require delivery to multiple hosts, there can be more entries in the queue than there are files in the directory.


Destination Host

Name of the host server to which the message is being sent.


Originator

Name of the person who sent the message.


Submit Time

Time the message was sent.


Delivery Status

Indicates whether or not the delivery attempt was successful.


Details Button

Displays the Details dialog box to view information about a queued message.


Refresh Button

Updates the display of all Internet Mail Service queues.


Delete Button

Deletes those messages interfering with the processing of a queue. Deleted messages are permanently erased from the disk and a non-delivery report (NDR) is sent to the originator.


Retry Now Button

Forces the Internet Mail Service to attempt to transport the message.


Details

Use the Details dialog box to view information about a queued message.

  Originator

  Recipients

  MTS-ID

  Message ID

  Destination Host

  Submit Time

  Size

  Delivery Status

  Next Retry Time

  Retries


Retries

Number of times the connector attempted to deliver the message.


Next Retry Time

Time scheduled for resending if previous attempts were unsuccessful.


Size

Size of the message in bytes.


Message ID

Identifies the message. For incoming mail, the Message ID is assigned by the connector. For outgoing mail, it is assigned by the message transfer agent (MTA).


Recipients

Lists the mailboxes to which the message was sent.


MTS-ID

Identifies the message system component that handled the mail. For outgoing Microsoft Exchange Server mail, it identifies the message transfer agent (MTA).


Internet Mail Wizard

Microsoft Exchange Server provides connectivity to the Internet and other systems using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The Microsoft Exchange Internet Mail Service, formerly known as the Microsoft Exchange Internet Mail Connector, provides access and message exchange to and from any system that supports SMTP.


Internet Mail Wizard Task List

For more information about these tasks, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations.


Internet Mail Wizard Server Selection

Choose the server where the Internet Mail Service will be installed. Use the Allow Internet mail through a dial-up connection check box to enable connections using Microsoft Windows NT Remote Access Service (RAS).


Internet Mail Wizard Mail Relay Connection

Choose whether Internet mail can be relayed through your site.

Option	Description
No	Choose to disable any host that relays messages to recipients outside your organization.  Clients and hosts that connect to your SMTP server over the Internet can send messages to recipients within your organization, but cannot relay messages to other recipients on the Internet.
Yes	Choose to allow POP or IMAP clients to send messages to recipients outside of your organization. All clients and hosts that connect to your SMTP server over the Internet will be allowed to relay messages.  Your SMTP server may be susceptible for use as a relay point by senders of unsolicited commercial e-mail. You can set restrictions for which clients and hosts are allowed to relay messages through your SMTP server in the Routing property page of Internet Mail Service.


Internet Mail Wizard Connection

Choose how you want the Internet Mail Service to send mail.

Option	Description
Use domain name system (DNS) to send mail	Select to resolve each recipient's domain address and deliver to the server with the most direct IP address returned by the Domain Name System (DNS). If available, the Hosts file and Windows Internet Naming System (WINS) can also provide resolution. Address resolution through DNS requires Microsoft Exchange Server to have a DNS server defined in the TCP/IP configuration, and the DNS server configuration must contain a mail exchanger (MX) entry for the domain.
Route all mail through a single host	Type the host name or IP address of the SMTP host that will process messages for the specified domain. If any host name cannot be resolved, the Internet Mail Service will not start, and a Windows NT application event log message will be generated. This option can be configured to process Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) mail messages in a round-robin style. For example, you can type a comma-separated list of multiple hosts: host1,host2,host3. The first message will be sent to host1, the second message to host2, the third message to host3, the fourth message to host1, and so on.


Internet Mail Wizard Address Space

Specify whether the Internet Mail Service will send mail to all Internet addresses or to specified addresses.

For more information about using address spaces, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations.


Internet Mail Wizard Site Address

Type the address that you want to generate for recipients defined on this Microsoft Exchange Server computer. The address will appear in the Site Addressing property page of the Configuration Site Addressing container and can be modified.


Administrator's Mailbox (Internet Mail Service)

Assign an administrator's mailbox to receive non-delivery status notifications and all messages delivered to the postmaster of this Internet Mail Service.


Internet Mail Wizard Service Account

Type the password of the service account.

For more information about the service account, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Internet Mail Service Dial-Up Connection

Select a phone book entry from the RAS phone book.

For information about adding entries to the RAS phone book, see the Microsoft Windows NT Server documentation.


Internet Mail Wizard Setup
Internet Mail Wizard Finish

Choose Finish to install and start the Internet Mail Service.


Security (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Security property page to enable secure outbound connections to other systems. Messages transferred from one Microsoft Exchange Server computer to another are encrypted.

The columns on this page display the following information:

Column	Description
E-Mail Domain	The domain name of the other e-mail system.
Security	The level of encryption currently in place for the domain. This can be None, Auth, Auth/SSL, or NT.
Account	The name of the account used to log on to the remote host.
 Add Button

 Edit Button

 Remove Button


Add Button

Displays the Edit E-Mail Domain security information dialog box. Use the dialog box to add Windows NT account information for the domain.


Edit Button

Displays the properties of the selected domain. Use the dialog box to modify domain account information.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected e-mail domain.


Edit E-Mail Domain Security Information

You can use Windows NT security on connections to other systems. Use the Edit E-Mail Domain security information dialog box to provide the account, domain, and password that is effective for all connections, or you can provide separate security information for each domain you connect to.

  E-Mail Domain (Available for Add only)

  Outbound Connections


Outbound Connections

Use the Outbound Connections dialog box to specify the type of encryption to use for each domain you connect to.

Note

To ensure the strongest possible encryption over outbound connections, choose SSL encryption or use a Windows NT account with a non-blank password.

Option	Description
No authentication or encryption	No security enabled.
SASL/SSL security	Choose SASL/AUTH, SSL encryption, or both.
SASL/AUTH clear text password authentication	Use the AUTH LOGIN ESMTP extension to send the clear text account and password on the outbound connections. If you choose this option, choose Change to specify the name and password for the account at the destination location of your dial-up connection.
SSL encryption	SSL encryption is enabled. The STARTTLS ESMTP extension is used.
Windows NT challenge/ response authentication and encryption	Enables Windows NT security. Choose this option when the Internet Mail Service is used as a site connector and you want to encrypt data transferred over the Internet. If you choose this option, choose Change to specify the name and password for the Windows NT account at the destination location of your dial-up connection.


Routing (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Routing property page to intercept inbound messages from Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) hosts or Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) and Internet Message Access Protocol Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) clients and selectively reroute those messages to other SMTP hosts before they are processed by the Internet Mail Service. The Routing property page enables the Internet Mail Service to act as a smart host that can route messages between the Internet and other SMTP hosts without the need to define custom recipients. If mail from POP3 or IMAP4 clients is to be routed to recipients outside the Microsoft Exchange Server organization, you must configure the Internet Mail Service to reroute mail.

If your organization uses multiple SMTP hosts, the Routing property page enables you to designate the Internet Mail Service as the single point of contact to the Internet. Other SMTP hosts can be configured to forward all messages to the Internet Mail Service, where the Routing property page will route messages appropriately.

The Routing property page contains a list of domain names and associated SMTP hosts. For each recipient of every inbound message the Internet Mail Service receives, the Routing property page compares the domain name on the address to the list of domain names in the Routing property page. If a match is found, the message for that particular recipient is rerouted to the associated host.

The match is compared to the rightmost part of the domain name in the recipient address. Only full subdomains are compared. For example, if the domain name in the table is sea.com, it matches an address of x.sea.com as well as sea.com, but not chelsea.com. The list is searched from the most specific to the least specific match. For example, user@x.sea.com would match x.sea.com, sea.com, or .com. However, if x.sea.com is in the list, it is used because it is the most specific match. This occurs regardless of its placement in the list.

In cases where the associated SMTP host is set for <inbound>, domain names in the list represent names that should be handled by the Internet Mail Service. If the recipient address matches one of these domain names, the Internet Mail Service processes the recipient normally and attempts to deliver the message to the Microsoft Exchange Server. If no match is found, the Internet Mail Service reroutes the message outbound to the domain name in the recipient's address. For this reason, it is important to ensure that any domain names that must be routed to the Microsoft Exchange Server are listed in the Routing property page. In particular, any domain names used in SMTP addresses for Microsoft Exchange users must be defined in the Routing property page. Otherwise, reports and replies will not be deliverable and could cause routing loops.

 Do not reroute incoming SMTP mail

 Reroute incoming SMTP mail (required for POP3/IMAP4 support)

 Add Button

 Edit Button

 Remove Button

 Routing Restrictions Button

 Instead of this table, use this custom routing program


Do not reroute incoming SMTP mail

Only messages addressed to recipients listed in the Microsoft Exchange Server global address list are delivered. All other mail is returned with a non-delivery report (NDR).


Reroute incoming SMTP mail (required for POP3/IMAP4 support)

Incoming mail is rerouted according to the entries in the Routing property page.


Add Button

Opens the Edit Routing Table Entry dialog box to allow you to create new routing information.


Edit Button

Opens the Edit Routing Table Entry dialog box to allow you to modify routing information.


Remove Button

Deletes routing information.


Routing Restrictions Button

Opens the Routing Restrictions dialog box to allow you to restrict messages routed from specified hosts and clients.


Instead of this table, use this custom routing program

Allows you to specify the name of a custom routing program. Choose Browse to select the name of a custom routing program. For more information on custom routing files, see the Microsoft Exchange Server Resource Guide.


Edit Routing Table Entry
Edit Routing Table Entry (Internet Mail Service)

Use the Edit Routing Table Entry dialog box to specify the routing of messages bound for any domain. You may want inbound mail addressed to your domain to be received by this Internet Mail Service. To do this, you would route all mail destined for the organization to inbound. Or you can configure the Internet Mail Service so it translates domain names. For example, you could specify inbound mail addressed to x.sea.com be rerouted to server1.sales.sea.com. If no routing entry is specified for a domain, mail for that domain is rerouted outbound. This allows the Internet Mail Service to forward Internet mail for other hosts.

Option	Description
Should be accepted  as "inbound"	Mail is accepted into the Microsoft Exchange Server organization.
Should be rerouted  to this domain	Specify the domain name where the mail will be sent. The Internet Mail Service rewrites the address.


Routing Restrictions
Routing Restrictions (Internet Mail Service)

Use the Routing Restrictions dialog box to specify senders who cannot use your site to host and relay messages to recipients outside of your organization.

Option	Description
Hosts and clients that successfully authenticate	Messages sent from hosts and clients with valid logon information are relayed.
Hosts and clients with these IP addresses	Messages sent from the specified IP addresses are relayed.
Hosts and clients connecting to these internal addresses	Messages sent by hosts and clients that connect to the specified IP address on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer are relayed. This allows multihomed servers to restrict message relay based on the IP address to which the client connects. If you choose this option, you must disable IP forwarding on the Networking property pages in the Control Panel
Specify the hosts and clients that can NEVER relay

Use the Specify the hosts and clients that can NEVER relay list to disable specified hosts and clients from using your site to relay messages to recipients that are not in your organization.

The Add, Edit, and Remove buttons allow you to modify the routing restrictions list as needed.

 Add Button

 Edit Button

 Remove Button


Multihomed

A multihomed server is a computer with multiple network cards and/or multiple IP addresses bound to NetBIOS over TCP/IP.


Add Button

Opens the Add/Edit Host dialog box to specify an IP address and mask.


Edit Button

Opens the Add/Edit Host dialog box to edit the selected IP address and mask.


Remove Button

Removes the selected IP address and mask from the list of hosts and clients that are never allowed to route mail through your server.


Add/Edit Host

Type the IP address and/or mask of the host whose access you want to restrict.


Dial-Up Connections (Internet Mail Service)

  Overview

Use the Dial-up Connections property page to set connection and schedule information for using the Internet Mail Service and Remote Access Service (RAS) to connect to another site. Dial-up connections can be used when you do not want to have a permanent Internet Mail Service connection but would like to connect to an Internet service provider or remote site at specified intervals.

  Available connections

  Time-out after

  Mail Retrieval Button

  Logon Information Button

  Schedule

  Dial


Available connections

The names of configured RAS entries that are available for Internet Mail Service dial-up connections.


Mail Retrieval Button

Opens the Mail Retrieval property page. Your Internet service provider may require a command that identifies you to the provider and gives notification that you are ready to receive messages. You can use ETRN, if your host supports it, or you can specify a command, such as ping, to run on the local computer when the connection is established. ETRN is a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) extension that validates the identity of the client host.


Logon Information Button

Opens the Logon Information dialog box so you can provide the logon account and password required by the remote site or Internet service provider.


Time-out after

The amount of time, in minutes, to keep the RAS connection open and wait for inbound mail after the initial transfer is complete. If inbound mail is available before the time-out period expires, the mail is transferred and the time-out period begins again.

Outbound mail is sent only when a RAS connection is first established. When you set the time-out period, it should be long enough for the remote system to initiate its mail transfer but short enough that the RAS connection ends at some point and then reconnects to send outbound mail.


Schedule

Indicate whether you want to schedule an Internet Mail Service dial-up connection on a weekly or daily basis.


Dial

Use these buttons to determine how you want to connect to your Internet service provider or to a remote site using the Internet Mail Service dial-up feature.

Every

Specifies a dial-up connection at certain intervals. Type the number of hours and minutes between connection attempts. If you specify this option, a connection is made when you start the Internet Mail Service and then again at the specified interval.

At

Specifies a dial-up connection at a certain time. Type the time when you want to connect to your Internet service provider or a remote site.

When mail queued, but at most every

Specifies a dial-up connection only when messages are waiting to be sent. The number of minutes you enter determines the most frequent interval at which a dial-up connection is established, regardless of how much mail is waiting.

If no mail is waiting to be sent, the dial-up connection is made as soon as an outbound message is queued, as long as the specified interval has passed since the last connection was made.

Start, End

The hours during which the dial-up connection schedule takes effect. This applies only if you have values entered in the Every or When mail queued, but at most every box.

If you want the schedule to be active 24 hours a day, select the All Day check box.

Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri

Indicates when the Internet Mail Service dial-up schedule applies. You must select Weekly under Schedule for these options to appear.

Weekends Button

Sets up a schedule for using a dial-up connection during the weekends.


Mail Retrieval (Internet Mail Service)
Mail Retrieval

Use the Mail Retrieval property page to identify your local server to your Internet service provider (ISP) and to give notification that you are ready to receive messages. You can use the ETRN or TURN commands if your host supports them, or you can specify a command, such as ping, to run on the local server when the connection is established. ETRN is an Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP) command described in Request for Comments (RFC) 1985. TURN is an SMTP command described in RFC 821.

Using ETRN and TURN to Retrieve Mail

Your local server uses ETRN and TURN to retrieve inbound (Internet) mail over a dial-up connection. If your ISP designates different servers for your inbound and outbound mail, you can retrieve mail from your inbound mail host.

With ETRN, you indicate the e-mail domains from which you want to retrieve mail. You select Derive from Routing property page to use the domains specified in the Routing property page, or select Use these domains to create your own list of domains.

Some servers that support TURN can require an authenticated account name and password. If so, you must configure outbound authentication in the Security property page. If the server that you are connecting to requires authentication, the remote mail host searches its e-mail domains for the account name. When the remote host locates a domain the account name is associated with, it sends the mail queued for that domain to the local server.

The IP address assigned to the local server by your ISP is either a static address (a "permanent" address) or a dynamic address (an address that changes with each dial-up session). Typically, if your local server uses a static IP address, you should use ETRN to retrieve inbound mail. If your local server is assigned a different IP address each time it connects, you should use TURN. If you are not certain whether your dial-up mail servers support these commands, contact your ISP.

Note

Microsoft Exchange Server supports client and server implementations of ETRN, but only a client implementation of TURN. This means the local server can issue and receive ETRN requests, but can only issue TURN requests.

  Retrieve mail using ETRN

  Derive from Routing property page

  Use these domains

  Add Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Send ETRN to specified host instead of outbound mail host

  ETRN host

  Issue TURN after delivering outbound mail

  Send TURN to specified host instead of outbound mail host

  TURN host

  Custom Command

  Do not send retrieval command


Retrieve mail using ETRN

Allows you to specify whether you will use the domains specified in the Routing property page or create a new list of domains.


Derive from Routing property page

An at sign (@) is appended to the beginning of the ETRN command for all domains listed in the Routing property page. This enables mail to be collected for all subdomains.


Use these domains

Choose Add, Edit, and Remove to create, modify, and delete domain names. Precede domain names with an at sign (@) to collect mail for all subdomains.


Add Button

Opens the Domain to Retrieve dialog box so you can create domain names. Precede domain names with an at sign (@) to collect mail for all subdomains.

You can also retrieve mail from remote mail queues. In the Domain to Retrieve dialog box, you identify a remote mail queue by preceding the queue name with a number sign (#). Contact your Internet service provider (ISP) if you are not certain whether its dial-up configuration supports remote mail queues. For more information about remote mail queues, see Request for Comments (RFC) 1985.


Edit Button

Opens the Domain to Retrieve dialog box so you can modify domain names.


Remove Button

Deletes domain names.


Send ETRN to specified host instead of outbound mail host

Directs the local server to retrieve inbound mail by sending the ETRN command to a mail host other than the one that accepts your outbound (Internet) mail.

After you select this, type the Domain Name System (DNS) name or Internet Protocol (IP) address of the inbound mail host in the ETRN host box.


ETRN host

The name or IP address of an inbound mail host that supports the ETRN command. This is typically the Internet service provider (ISP) server that queues and delivers inbound mail to the local server.


Issue TURN after delivering outbound mail

After the local server delivers outbound mail to the outbound mail host, this option directs the local server to retrieve inbound mail by sending the TURN command to a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. The SMTP host can be:

The same host that the local server delivers outbound mail to. This is the outbound mail host specified in the Connections property page.

A different host that has inbound mail destined for the local server. If your Internet service provider (ISP) uses different servers for inbound and outbound mail, use this option to provide the name of the inbound mail host. In this case, select Send TURN to specified host instead of outbound mail host, and then type the Domain Name System (DNS) name or IP address of the inbound mail host in the TURN host box.

Important

Some servers that support TURN can require an authenticated account name and password. If so, you must configure outbound authentication in the Security property page. If the server that you are connecting to requires authentication, the remote mail host searches its e-mail domains for the account name. When the remote host locates a domain the account name is associated with, it sends the mail queued for that domain to the local server.


Send TURN to specified host instead of outbound mail host

Directs the local server to retrieve inbound mail by sending the TURN command to a mail host other than the one that accepts your outbound (Internet) mail.

After you select this box, type the Domain Name System (DNS) name or Internet Protocol (IP) address of the inbound mail host in the TURN host box. If Send TURN to specified host instead of outbound mail host is not selected, the local server will send the TURN command to the outbound mail host.


TURN host

The name of an inbound mail host that supports the TURN command. This is typically the Internet service provider (ISP) server that queues and delivers inbound mail to the local server.


Custom Command

Choose to enter a custom command, such as ping, or an executable file. This is run on the local computer when the connection is made.


Do not send retrieval command

Disables ETRN and does not run custom commands.


Logon Information (Internet Mail Service)
Logon Information

Use the Logon Information property page to set a password for the destination location of your dial-up connection.

Alternately, you can specify a RAS post-connection script and include logon information there. You should specify logon information either by using this dialog box or by using a script, but not both.

  User Name

  Domain

  Password

  Confirm Password


User Name

The name used to log on to the remote server.


Domain

The name of the domain that the user wants to log on to. Leave this box blank if the remote or Internet service provider does not have a domain.


Password

The password that you want to use.


Confirm Password

Type the password again.


Weekends (Internet Mail Service)

Use the Weekends dialog box to specify the schedule for connecting and downloading information from the Internet Mail Service on Saturday and Sunday.

Off

Turns off dial-up connections on Saturday and Sunday.

Every

Specifies a dial-up connection at certain intervals. Type the number of hours and minutes between connection attempts.

At

Specifies a dial-up connection at a certain time. Type the time when you want to connect to your Internet service provider or a remote site.

When mail queued, but at most every

Specifies a dial-up connection only when messages are waiting to be sent. The number of minutes you enter determines the most frequent interval at which a dial-up connection is established, regardless of how much mail is waiting.

If no mail is waiting to be sent, the dial-up connection is made as soon as an outbound message is queued as long as the specified interval has passed since the last connection was made.

Start, End

Specifies a time when an Internet Mail Service dial-up connection begins and ends. You can also specify that the connection be in place for the entire day by selecting All day.


SASL/Auth Account

Use the SASL/Auth Account dialog box to set a password for the destination location of your dial-up connection.

  Account

  Password

  Confirm Password


Account

The account that you want to use.


Password

The password that you want to use.


Confirm Password

Type the password again.


Windows NT Account

Use the Windows NT Account dialog box to set a password for the destination location of your dial-up connection.

  User Name

  Domain

  Password

  Confirm Password


User Name

The name used to log on to the remote server.


Domain

The name of the domain that the user wants to log on to. Leave this box blank if the remote or Internet service provider does not have a domain.


Password

The password that you want to use.


Confirm Password

Type the password again.


General (Site Encryption)

  Overview

Use the General property page for the site to modify the display name that appears in the Administrator window and to choose a site where you want to enable a Key Management server (KM server).

  Display name

  Directory name

  Primary KM Server Location

  Choose Site Button


Display name

Type a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters. If no name is provided, the system prompts for a value.


Directory name

Displays the directory name of the Site Encryption Configuration object. This name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server Setup and cannot be modified.


Primary KM Server Location

Displays the site location name of the Key Management server (KM server). If this box is blank, a KM server does not exist in the current site and the Site Encryption Configuration object is not configured with a KM server.


Choose Site Button

Opens the Key Management Server dialog box allowing you to enable a site to use a Key Management server (KM server) in another site.

Note

You should give careful consideration to how you configure advanced security when enabling additional KM servers in sites within your organization. Some configurations can result in users not being able to recover their security key from the key management database.


Key Management Server

Use the Key Management Server dialog box to enable advanced security in additional sites. There are two scenarios that can occur when determining how to enable advanced security in additional sites.

Scenario	Description
A Key Management server (KM server) does not exist in the current site, and the Site Encryption Configuration object is not configured with a KM server (the KM Server box in the General property page of the Site Encryption Configuration object is blank).	When you choose Choose Site in the General property page on the Site Encryption Configuration object, all KM servers in the organization are listed in the Key Management Server dialog box.
A KM server does not exist in the current site, but the Site Encryption Configuration object has been configured with a KM server and you want to configure the Site Encryption Configuration object to point to another KM server.	When you choose Choose Site in the General property page on the Site Encryption Configuration object, all KM servers in the organization are listed in the Key Management Server dialog box with the current KM server selected. If you select another KM server and choose OK, a message appears to warn you that security keys for existing users in your site may be unrecoverable if you configure the current site to use a different KM server.
Caution

Configuring an existing site to use a different KM server in this organization requires enrolling all users in the site in advanced security for the new KM server. This can cause existing users in your site to no longer be able to recover their security keys. You should only choose a new KM server if you plan to remove the existing KM server and then move the existing key management database to the new KM server.

  Site Name

  Server Name


Site Name

Displays the name of the site where the Key Management server (KM server) resides.


Server Name

Displays the name of the Key Management server (KM server) residing at a site in your organization.


Permissions (Site Encryption)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Encryption object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new objects but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Algorithms (Site Encryption)

  Overview

The Algorithms property page lets you specify the type of encryption algorithm you want to use for your clients.

Note

The selections you make on this property page can be modified later by users on the client.

Microsoft Exchange Server supports several types of encryption algorithms for encrypting the content of messages.

  Preferred Microsoft Exchange 4.0 and 5.0 Encryption Algorithms

  Preferred S/MIME Encryption Algorithms

  Preferred Security Message Format


Preferred Microsoft Exchange 4.0 and 5.0 Encryption Algorithms

Microsoft Exchange Server 4.0 and 5.0 can use one of three encryption algorithms to encrypt the contents of a message: CAST-64, Data Encryption Standard (DES), and CAST-40. The North American version of the Microsoft Exchange Client supports all three algorithms. All other localized versions of the Microsoft Exchange Client support the CAST-40 algorithm.

Note

You can change the North American preferred encryption algorithm from CAST-64 to DES and vice versa. However, you must renew all security-enabled users in the site where the change was made for the change to take effect. After you change the encryption algorithm, users can still read messages that were encrypted using the previous algorithm.


Preferred S/MIME Encryption Algorithms

Microsoft Exchange Server can use Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (S/MIME) encryption algorithms including DES, 3DES, RC2-40, RC2-64, and RC2-128. The North American version can use RC2-40.

Note

To enable clients to use S/MIME security, you must install the Outlook 98 QFE version from the Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 Service Pack 1 disc. Microsoft Outlook 98 is required to use V3 certificates.


Preferred Security Message Format

Select the security message format for encrypting the content of messages. This selection is based on the configuration of clients in your site.  For example, if the computers in your site run clients on a 16-bit platform, you can set the preferred security message format to Exchange 4.0/5.0 so that users can read the content of encrypted messages.


General (CA)

  Overview

Use the General property page to define the display name of the CA object, to view the directory name and the Microsoft Certificate Server computer name.

  Display name

  Directory name

  Certificate Server


Display name

Type a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters. If no name is provided, the system prompts for a value.


Directory name

Displays the directory name of the CA object. This name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server Setup and cannot be modified.


Certificate Server

Displays the name of the Microsoft Certificate Server computer. This name is created during Microsoft Exchange Server Setup and cannot be modified.


Permissions (CA)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the CA object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete this object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new objects but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Administrators (CA)

  Overview

Use the Administrators property page to view the Windows NT accounts that have permissions to administer the Key Management server (KM server), to add or remove administrators, and to change an administrator's KM server password.

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions to Administer the Key Management Server

  Add Administrators Button

  Remove Administrators Button

  Change My KM Server Password Button


Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server

Lists the Windows NT account names with access rights to the Key Management server (KM server).


Add Administrators Button

Displays the Add Users dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the administrators you want to grant permissions to.


Remove Administrators Button

Removes the selected administrator from the list of Windows NT accounts with permissions to administer the Key Management server.


Change My KM Server Password Button

Opens the Change the password for the Key Management Server dialog box to enable you to change your Key Management server (KM server) password.

Note

If you have never changed the password, the default password is password.


Change the Password for the Key Management Server

Each advanced security administrator has a password that must be entered before advanced security tasks can be performed. When you attempt to access or modify advanced security information, the Administrator program prompts you to enter this password.

You are the only person who can change your security password. In general, it is a good idea for all security administrators to change their passwords occasionally. For example, if you suspect that your security password has been compromised, you should change it.

  Current password

  New password

  Verify password


Current password

Type your existing advanced security administrator password.


New password

Type your new password (case-sensitive).


Verify password

Retype the new password.


Key Management Server Password

Any time you attempt to access or modify advanced security information, you must enter your Key Management server (KM server) administrator password. Your default password is always password the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after installing the KM Server, or the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after being granted security administration privileges by an existing KM server administrator.

You can change your password from the Administrators property page of the CA object, which is located in the Configuration container.

  Domain/Username

  KM Server password

  Remember password for 5 minutes


Key Management Server Passwords

Any time you attempt to access or modify advanced security information, you must enter your Key Management server (KM server) administrator password. Your default password is always password the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after installing the KM Server, or the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after being granted security administration privileges by an existing KM server administrator.

If multiple password policies have been set, the Key Management Server Passwords dialog box reflects the password policies. For example, you can set your KM server so that the cooperation of three administrators is necessary to recover or revoke a user's security key. If more than one username and associated administrator password is needed to recover or revoke a user's security keys, then the dialog box shows the total number of administrators required and the total number of administrators entered.

  Domain/Username

  KM Server password

  Remember password for 5 minutes

  Total number of administrators required

  Total number of administrators needed


Domain/Username

Read-only information that shows the domain and username of the advanced security administrator who wants to perform advanced security tasks.

You can add or remove advanced security administrators from the Administrators property page of the CA object, which is located in the Configuration container.


KM Server password

Enter your Key Management server (KM server) password. Your default password is always password the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after installing the KM server, or the first time you attempt to access advanced security features after being granted security administration privileges by an existing KM server administrator.

You can change your KM server password from the Administrators property page of the CA object, which is located in the Configuration container.


Remember password for 5 minutes

Select if you want to avoid entering the password again each time you attempt to modify advanced security information for up to 5 minutes.


Total number of administrators required

Indicates the number of administrator passwords required to perform an advanced security task. This dialog box appears only if multiple password policies were set from the Passwords property page of the CA object.


Total number of administrators needed

A dynamic number that indicates the remaining number of administrator passwords needed to perform an advanced security task. This dialog box appears only if multiple password policies were set from the Passwords property page of the CA object.


Passwords (CA)

  Overview

Use the Passwords property page to set multiple password policies. Multiple password policies prevent administrators from making changes to the Key Management server (KM server) without the authorization of one or more other administrators. Multiple password policies enable a KM server site to specify the number of administrator passwords that are required to add or delete KM server administrators, set multiple administrator passwords, recover or revoke user's security keys, and import or untrust another certification authority's certificate.

The first time you access the Passwords property page, only one administrator's password is needed. The default user name is the name of the current administrator. All user names are entered manually.

After you set the initial multiple password policies, the Key Management Server Passwords dialog box reflects the password policies by showing the number of user names and administrator passwords required to perform a task. You must choose Apply, OK, or Cancel before leaving the Passwords property page to update password policies.

  Add administrators, delete administrators, or edit these multiple password policies

  Recover a user's security keys

  Revoke a user's security keys

  Import or untrust another Certification Authority's  certificate

 Change Enrollment Settings


Add administrators, delete administrators, or edit these multiple password policies

Type the number of administrator passwords required to add or delete administrators, or to edit the multiple password policies.


Recover a user's security keys

Type the number of administrator passwords required to recover a user's security keys.


Revoke a user's security keys

Type the number of administrator passwords required to revoke a user's security keys.


Import or untrust another Certification Authority's certificate

Type the number of administrator passwords required to import or untrust a certificate from another certification authority.


Change Enrollment Settings (between V1 and V3 certificates)

Type the number of passwords required to change the enrollment settings between V1 and V3 certificates.


Cross Certificates (CA)
Certificate Trust List (CA)

  Overview

Note  To use this feature, you need an S/MIME-compatible client that can enroll in advanced security through the KM server.

A certificate trust list (CTL) enables organizations to establish trust with other organizations so that users can verify the digital signature of messages sent by users in other trusted organizations.

Use the Certificate Trust List property page to view outside organizations that are currently certified on your Microsoft Exchange Server and to import certificates from outside of your organization. A certificate binds a public key to a particular certification authority.

  Import Button

  Remove Button

  Trust or Untrust Button

  Properties Button


Import Button

Opens the Import Certificate dialog box to allow you to import a certificate or Certificate Revocation List (CRL) from another organization. The CRL contains a list of clients from a trusted organization that no longer hold valid security keys.


Trust or Untrust Button

Opens the Trust or Untrust Certificate dialog box to allow you to establish or restore a trust relationship or to terminate a trust relationship.


Import Certificate

Importing certificates from an outside organization allows you to establish trust and to give the organization permissions for objects in your domain.

  Import a certificate

  Import a CRL

  File name


Import a certificate

Imports a certificate from another organization to the KM server. The certificate should be a .Crt file from a certification authority (CA). You should have already received this certificate file from an outside organization.


Import a CRL

Imports a Certification Revocation List (CRL) to the KM server. The CRL contains a list of clients from a trusted organization that no longer hold valid security keys. It consists of the serial number of the certificate and the revocation date of the certificate. CRLs can be sent to you by e-mail or published on a Web page.


File name

Type the name of the file that contains the certificate or CRL you want to import.


Remove Button

Opens the Remove Certificate dialog box to allow you to remove a certificate from another certification authority. Untrusting a certificate removes the trust placed in the certificate when it was imported. Removing a certificate deletes the certificate from your system but does not remove the trust placed in it.


Adding Certificate Revocation List

Displays the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) you selected from the Import Certificates dialog box. Choose OK to add the selected CRL to the system.

Option	Description
Issue by	Displays information about the organization that issued the CRL you are importing.
Date issued	Displays the date the CRL was created.
Next update	Displays the date the CRL will expire.


Adding Certificate to Trust List

Displays the certificate you selected from the Import Certificates dialog box. Choose OK to add the selected certificate to the certificate trust list (CTL).

View Details

Choose View Details to see the Certificate Detail property pages of the selected certificate.


Remove Certificate

Use this dialog box to remove a certificate or Certificate Revocation List (CRL).

Option	Description
Remove certificate	Removes the certificate from the Certificate Trust List. The certificate will no longer have a defined trust state, and will be treated as unknown by the client. Choose this option if you have duplicate certificates from the same organization.
Also remove CRL	Removes the certificate from the Certificate Trust List and the corresponding CRL from your system. Users will not be able to determine if a certificate issued using the removed Certificate Authority certificate has been revoked will no longer be available to establish trust with.
Only remove CRL	Removes the CRL your system. Users will not be able to determine if a certificate has been revoked. Use this option to replace the CRL by removing the existing CRL, and importing a new one.


Remove Certificate

Use the Remove Certificate property page to untrust or remove a certificate from another certification authority. Untrusting a certificate removes the trust placed in the certificate when the certificate was imported. Removing a certificate deletes the certificate from your system but does not remove the trust placed in it. If you remove a certificate, you cannot untrust it at a later time. Untrusting or removing certificates requires multiple administrator passwords if multiple password policies are set.

  Untrust certificate

  Remove certificate


Untrust certificate

Removes the trust placed in this certificate when the certificate was imported. Ensures that you have a record of certificates that are untrusted from your KM server because the certificates are no longer valid.


Remove certificate

Removes the certificate from the KM server but does not add it to your CRL. Use this option with caution because a removed certificate cannot be untrusted. It is recommended that you use the Untrust certificate option, and then use the Remove certificate option to delete the certificate from your system.


Properties Button

Opens the Certificate Properties property page that allows you to view the name, issuer, and expiration date of certificates that have been imported from other organizations and are trusted on your KM server. Double-click a certificate in the box, or select a certificate and choose Properties.


Trust/Untrust Certificate

Choose one of these options to establish or remove trust from the selected certificate.

Option	Description
Trust Certificate	Establishes or restores trust with the organization that issued the selected certificate.
Untrust Certificate	Removes the trust placed in the certificate when it was imported or trust was established.


Enrollment (CA)

  Overview

Use the Enrollment property page to individually set the policies for transmitting temporary keys to users or to bulk enroll new users and to set policies for issuing certificates that are compatible with your site's client environment. Microsoft Exchange Server supports the X.509 version 1 (V1) and the industry standard version 3 (V3) certificate formats. The certificate format you choose depends on the type of secure mail clients that your organization wants to support.

  Allow email to be sent to the user

  Edit Welcome Message Button

  Bulk Enrollment Button

  Issue both V1 and V3 certificates

  Issue X.509 V3 certificates only

  Issue X.509 V1 certificates only

  Renew All Users Button


Allow email to be sent to the user with his or her temporary key and the welcome message

Select to set the policy for allowing the temporary key to be sent to the user using e-mail. The message is sent when you enable advanced security in the Security property page of the user's mailbox.


Edit Welcome Message Button

Opens the Enrollment Welcome Message Properties dialog box that allows you to customize the text of the enrollment welcome message. For example, you can include a description of your company's security policies in the message.


Issue both V1 and V3 certificates

Note  To use this feature, you need an S/MIME-compatible client that can enroll in advanced security through the KM server.

Select this option to issue both V1 and V3 certificates if there are some users in your organization who are running Microsoft Exchange Client versions 4.0 and 5.0, or Outlook 8.0x.


Issue X.509 V3 certificates only

Note  To use this feature, you need an S/MIME-compatible client that can enroll in advanced security through the KM server.

Select this option to issue only V3 certificates if all users in your organization are running an S/MIME-compatible client.


Issue X.509 V1 certificates only

Select this option to issue only V1 certificates if the majority of your clients are Microsoft Exchange Client version 4.0 or 5.0, or Outlook 8.0x, and you want to force your Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) clients to use only the backward-compatible mode. Choosing this format will prevent S/MIME-compatible client users from choosing the S/MIME security format, which requires V3 certificates.


Renew All Users Button

Notifies all users that they should initiate enrollment with the certificate type you have specified. You can also use this option to reset any changes you make to the security message format or the issuing of V1 and V3 certificates. For example, if you have changed the default security message format in the Algorithms property page of the Site Encryption object, or if you have changed the type of V1 or V3 certificate to issue, you should choose Renew All Users.


Enrollment Welcome Message Properties

If you selected the Allow e-mail to be sent to the user with his or her temporary key and the welcome message check box on the Enrollment property page, then a temporary key is sent to the user in an e-mail when you enable advanced security for that user's mailbox. You can customize the text of the enrollment welcome message.

The enrollment welcome message includes the name of the temporary key. You can delete the name of the temporary key from the message before sending the message to the user. For example, you can give users their temporary key in person. If you do so, you can send a generic message informing them that they should see the Key Management (KM server) administrator to obtain their temporary key.

  Subject

  Body

  Default Settings Button


Subject

Type the subject of the enrollment welcome message.


Body

Type the text of the enrollment welcome message. By default, the enrollment welcome message includes the name of the temporary key. You can delete the name of the temporary key from the message before sending the message to the user. If you do so, you can send a generic message informing the user to contact the Key Management server (KM server) administrator to obtain a temporary key.


Default Settings Button

Restores the edit welcome message to its original text.


Bulk Enrollment Button

Opens the Bulk Enroll Users in Advanced Security dialog box that allows you to generate security keys in bulk to save time when there are a large number of new users to enroll. You must still transmit the security keys to users individually, and each user must complete the process of enabling advanced security on the client.


Bulk Enroll Users in Advanced Security

Users must have security keys before they can enable advanced security on the client. To enroll a large number of new users, you can generate security keys in bulk to save time. You must still transmit the security keys to users individually, and each user must complete the process of enabling advanced security on the client.

  Container name

  Modify Button

  Mail temporary keys to all newly enrolled users

  Save results in a file


Container name

Displays the name of the container that contains the mailbox of users you want to enroll. The default is the Recipients container.


Modify Button

Opens the Bulk Enrollment Container dialog box that allows you to select a different container. Each container with users you want to enroll must be individually selected. Subcontainers are not included when you select a container.


Bulk Enrollment Container

Select the container of recipients you want to bulk enroll. Your selection will not include subcontainers.


Mail temporary keys to all newly enrolled users

Allows you to send temporary keys to users through e-mail. Users who are being enrolled for the first time will receive their temporary key through e-mail.


Save results in a file

Writes information such as organization, site, and user name to a file that includes advanced security information for both new and users who were enrolled previously. This files enables you to obtain the status of a user's advanced security information quickly.


Key Management Server Configuration

Select the Microsoft Certificate Server that will act as the Certificate Authority for KM Server.


General LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the General property page to configure site Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) for all servers in the site.

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable protocol

  Administrative note


Display Name

The display name for the protocol in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters and is not case-sensitive.


Directory Name

The directory name is defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Enable Protocol

Select to enable client access to the directory on this server using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).


Administrative note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning the user or group a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for an LDAP client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client’s vendor if you are unsure which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password.
Basic (Clear Text) using SSL	Enable authentication and all client/server communication to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 636. SSL is a protocol that provides secure data communication using data encryption and decryption.
Windows NT  Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password.
Windows NT Challenge/Response using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Anonymous LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Anonymous property page to specify anonymous directory access for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) clients to Microsoft Exchange Server.

To set which attributes are visible to anonymous and authenticated users, use the Attributes property page on the DS Site Configuration object.


Search LDAP (Directory) Site Default

  Overview

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) allows LDAP clients to perform searches when connected to a directory. For example, if you search the directory for a particular user, LDAP returns the entry for that user. LDAP matches the requested information with an entry in the directory by performing substring searches. There are three types of substring searches that LDAP can perform:

•	Initial substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against the beginning of an attribute in the directory. For example, an initial substring search for “St” in a display name would return Stacey and Steve, but not Sean or Shannon. Initial substring searches are typically faster than the other types of substring searches.

•	Final substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against the end of an attribute in the directory. For example, an initial substring search for “ne” in a display name would return Suzan Fine. Final substring searches are typically slower than initial substring searches.

•	Any substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against any portion of an attribute in the directory. For example, a substring search for “r” in a display name would return Maria and Raymond. Any substring searches are the slowest substring searches.

Option	Description
Treat "any" substring searches as "initial" substring searches (fast)	Specifies that only initial substring searches will be performed. Final substring searches will not be performed, and any substring searches are converted to initial substring searches (which will return partial but sometimes incomplete results).
Allow only "initial" substring searches (fast)	Specifies that only initial substring searches will be performed. Final substring searches and any substring searches will not be performed.
Allow all substring searches (slow)	Specifies that all substring searches will be performed, including initial, any, or final.
Maximum number of search results returned	Specifies the maximum number of entries that will be returned for all searches. Performance decreases as this number increases. If more than the maximum number of specified results are found in an LDAP search, Microsoft Exchange Server does not return results for the search. If no number is specified, a default of 100 is used for the number.


Referrals LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

If a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client requests information, the Microsoft Exchange Server computer returns the referrals to other servers that are within the scope of the search, in addition to any entries that match the information requested. For example, if a client searches on server A for the phone number for John Baker, but John Baker is in another organization, server A tells the client to request the information from a server in John Baker’s organization. You can use the Referrals property page to specify the server outside of your organization that an LDAP client connects to for information. You can specify up to 350 referrals in Microsoft Exchange Server.

  Referrals

  New/Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Default Referral Button


Referrals

The Referrals box lists information about the referrals.

Item	Description
Secure	Indicates whether the connection to the other server occurs using a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) port.
Port	Displays the port number used to connect to the other server.
Server Name	Displays the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the server that is used for the referral, for example, server.fab.com.
Directory Name	Displays the base directory name (specified in RFC 1779 format) that is used to generate a referral, for example, ou=exchange,o=fab,c=us.


Add or Change a Referral

Opens the Referral Details dialog box. You can use the dialog box to add or edit a referral server to provide information requested by a client.


Remove Referral

Removes the selected referral server.


Default Referral

Referral returned by Microsoft Exchange Server when no entries or referrals match the request made by the client.


Idle Time-out LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Idle Time-out property page to specify how long LDAP connections can remain idle before they are closed.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed.


General LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the General property page to configure site Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) defaults for a server in the site.

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable protocol

  Administrative note

  Use site defaults for all properties


Use site defaults for all properties

Select to configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) properties for this server using the site settings (this is the default). Clear to configure the LDAP properties for this server differently than the site settings.

To view the site LDAP configuration, select the Configuration container. Select the Protocols container and choose LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults.


Permissions LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning the user or group a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for an LDAP client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client’s vendor if you are unsure which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password.
Basic (Clear Text) using SSL	Enable authentication and all client/server communication to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 636. SSL is a protocol that provides secure data communication using data encryption and decryption.
Windows NT  Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password.
Windows NT Challenge/Response using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Anonymous LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Anonymous property page to specify anonymous directory access for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) clients to Microsoft Exchange Server.

To set which attributes are visible to anonymous and authenticated users, use the Attributes property page on the DS Site Configuration object.


Search LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) allows LDAP clients to perform searches when connected to a directory. For example, if a user searches the directory for a particular user, LDAP returns the entry for that user. LDAP provides search capabilities by matching the requested information with an entry in the directory by performing substring searches. There are three types of substring searches that LDAP can perform:

•	Initial substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against the beginning of an attribute in the directory. For example, an initial substring search for “St” in a display name would return Suzan (Fine). Initial substring searches are typically faster than the other types of substring searches.

•	Final substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against the end of an attribute in the directory. For example, an initial substring search for “ne” in a display name would return Stacey and Steve, but not Sean or Shannon. Initial substring searches are typically slower than initial substring searches.

•	Any substring search

The directory matches the substring that the user specifies against any portion of an attribute in the directory. For example, a substring search for “r” in a display name would return Maria and Raymond. Any substring searches are the slowest substring searches.

Option	Description
Treat "any" substring searches as "initial" substring searches (fast)	Specifies that only initial substring searches will be performed. Final substring searches will not be performed, and any substring searches are converted to initial substring searches (which will return partial but sometimes incomplete results).
Allow only "initial" substring searches (fast)	Specifies that only initial substring searches will be performed. Final substring searches and any substring searches will not be performed.
Allow all substring searches (slow)	Specifies that all substring searches will be performed, including initial, any, or final substring searches.
Maximum number of search results returned	Specifies the maximum number of entries that will be returned for all searches. Performance decreases as this number increases. If more than the maximum number of specified results are found in an LDAP search, Microsoft Exchange Server does not return any results for the search. If no number is specified, a default of 100 is used for the number.


Referrals LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

If a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client requests information that your Microsoft Exchange Server computer doesn’t have, you can configure your server to refer the client to another server that can fulfill the request. For example, if a client searches on server A for the telephone number for John Baker, but John Baker is in another organization, server A tells the client to request the information from a server in John Baker’s organization. You can use the Referrals property page to specify the server outside of your organization that an LDAP client connects to for information.

Note

Clients can only be referred to servers outside the local Microsoft Exchange Server organization.

  Referrals

  New/Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Default Referral Button


Referrals

The Referrals box lists information about the referrals.

Item	Description
Secure	Indicates whether the connection to the other server occurs using a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) port.
Port	Displays the port number used to connect to the other server.
Server Name	Displays the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the server that is used for the referral, for example, server.fab.com.
Directory Name	Displays the base directory name (specified in RFC 1779 format) that is used to generate a referral, for example, ou=exchange,o=fab,c=us.


Add or Change a Referral

Opens the Referral Details dialog box. You can use the dialog box to add or edit a referral server to provide information that is requested by a client.


Remove Referral

Removes the selected referral server.


Default Referral

Designates the selected server as the default referral server.


Referrals Details
Referral Details

Use the Referral Details dialog box to add or edit a referral server that is used to provide information requested by a client.

Options	Description
Server Name	The Domain Name System (DNS) name of the server that is used for the referral, for example, server.fab.com.
Directory Name	The base directory name (specified in RFC 1779 format) that is used to generate a referral, for example, ou=exchange,o=fab,c=us.
Port	The port number used to connect to the other server.
Connect over SSL	Specifies whether the connection to the other server occurs using a Secure Sockets Layer (SLL) port.


Idle Time-out LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Idle Time-out property page to specify how long Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) connections can remain idle before they are closed.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close. This is the default.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed.


Lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) is an Internet protocol that allows access to directory information. Clients with access can use LDAP to browse, read, and search directory listings in the Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.0 directory. For example, the user can view information, such as department names and locations, with any application that supports the LDAP protocol. LDAP requires a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) connection.


Menu and Command Reference

Click any of the following menu option names for a list of all menu commands. For detailed information about a specific command, click the command name.


File Menu Options
File Menu

Connect to Server

Close

New Mailbox

New Distribution List

New Custom Recipient

New Other >

Server Monitor

Link Monitor

Recipients Container

Address Book View

Address Book View Container

MTA Transport Stack

X.400 Connector

Dynamic RAS Connector

Site Connector

Directory Replication Connector

Dirsync Requestor

Dirsync Server

Remote Dirsync Requestor

Information Store

Newsfeed

Internet Mail Service

Raw Object

Save Window Contents

Properties

Raw Properties

Duplicate

Exit


Edit Menu Options
Edit Menu

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete Raw Object

Select All


View Menu Options
View Menu

Mailboxes

Distribution Lists

Custom Recipients

Public Folders

All

Hidden Recipients

Raw Directory

Columns

Sort by >

Display Name

Last Modified Date

Font

Move Splitbar

Toolbar

Status Bar


Tools Menu Options
Tools Menu

Directory Import

Directory Export

Extract Windows NT Account List

Extract NetWare Account List

Find Recipients

Move Mailbox

Add to Address Book View

Clean Mailbox

Start Monitor

Track Message

Forms Administrator

Newsgroup Hierarchies

Save Connections on Exit

Save Connections Now

Customize Toolbar

Options


Window Menu Options
Window Menu

New Window

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Refresh

Select Window


Help Menu Options
Help Menu

Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics

Books Online

About Microsoft Exchange Server


File Menu

Use the commands on this menu to open and close connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers, to create new recipients, monitors, and connectors, to duplicate objects, to view an object's properties, and to quit Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, choose a command name.

Connect to Server

Close

New Mailbox

New Distribution List

New Custom Recipient

New Other >

Server Monitor

Link Monitor

Recipients Container

Address Book View

Address Book View Container

MTA Transport Stack

X.400 Connector

Dynamic RAS Connector

Site Connector

Directory Replication Connector

Dirsync Requestor

Dirsync Server

Remote Dirsync Requestor

Information Store

Newsfeed

Internet Mail Service

Raw Object

Save Window Contents

Properties

Raw Properties

Duplicate

Exit


Connect to Server Command (File Menu)

Specify the Microsoft Exchange Server computer to which you want to connect. To administer a site, you must connect to a server in that site.

Connecting to a server provides a view of the directory hierarchy from that server's perspective. You can view and modify the attributes of all directory objects within the site, provided you have sufficient permissions. In addition, you can view (but not modify) directory objects in other sites that replicate directory information to this site.

Connect to Server Dialog Box Options

  What server do you want to connect to?

  Browse Button

  Set As Default


What server do you want to connect to?

Type the name of the server to which you want to connect, or choose Browse to select a server.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser dialog box, where you can select any available server in your organization.


Set As Default

Select this option to automatically connect to the server shown in Connect To Which Server? each time you start the Microsoft Exchange Administrator program.


Close Command (File Menu)

Disconnects from a connected server. If you have connections to multiple servers, select the window for the connection you wish to close, and choose Close.


New Mailbox Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox.

Choosing New Mailbox opens the Mailbox property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new mailbox.


See Also

Mailbox Overview


New Distribution List Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new distribution list.

Choosing the New Distribution List command opens the Distribution List property pages, where you can add or remove recipients from the distribution list and provide other configuration information.


See Also

Distribution List Overview


New Custom Recipient Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new custom recipient.

Choosing the New Custom Recipient command opens the New E-Mail Address dialog box, where you can select the type of address you want to create for this custom recipient.


See Also

Custom Recipient Overview


New Other Command (File Menu)

Lists a variety of commands for creating objects, including server and link monitors, recipients containers, X.400 connectors and transport stacks, dirsync requestors and servers, remote dirsync requestors, and site connectors.


New Server Monitor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new server monitor, which monitors the status of Microsoft Exchange Server services running on one or more servers.

Choosing the New Server Monitor command opens the Server Monitor property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new server monitor.


See Also

Server Monitor Overview


New Link Monitor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new link monitor, which monitors the status of messaging links along any messaging path.

Choosing the New Link Monitor command opens the Link Monitor property pages, where you can provide configuration information for the new link monitor.


See Also

Link Monitor Overview


New Recipients Container Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new recipients container. Recipients containers hold message recipients. There can be numerous recipients containers in a site.

Choosing New Recipients Container opens the Recipients Container property pages, where can you provide configuration information for the new recipients container.


See Also

Recipients Container Overview


New Address Book View Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new Address Book view.

Choosing New Address Book View opens the Address Book View property page, which you use to configure the new view.


See Also

Address Book View Overview


New Address Book View Container Command (New Other Menu)

Creates a new Address Book View container.

Choosing New Address Book View Container opens the Address Book View Container property page, which you use to configure the new Address Book View container.


New MTA Transport Stack Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Installs an MTA transport stack on this server.

Before creating an X.400 or dynamic RAS connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, if you want to create an X.400 TP/4 connector, you must first install and configure a TP/4 stack.

Choosing New MTA Transport Stack opens the New MTA Transport Stack dialog box where you can select the type of stack you want to install.


See Also

MTA Transport Stack Overview


New X.400 Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new X.400 connector, which connects a site to other X.400 systems or to other sites in your organization. Before creating an X.400 connector, you must install a corresponding MTA transport stack on any server in your site.

Choosing New X.400 Connector opens the New X.400 Connector dialog box, where you select the type of connector you want to create. You then configure the connector using the X.400 Connector property pages.


See Also

X.400 Connector Overview


New Dynamic RAS Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new Dynamic RAS Connector, which connects two Microsoft Exchange Server sites over RAS.


See Also

Dynamic RAS Connector Overview


New Site Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new site connector. A site connector connects two sites that are on the same local area network.


See Also

Site Connector Overview


New Directory Replication Connector Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new directory replication connector, which enables sharing of up-to-date directory information between Microsoft Exchange Server sites.


See Also

Directory Replication Connector Overview


New Dirsync Requestor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new directory synchronization requestor.

Choosing the New Dirsync Requestor command opens the Dirsync Requestor property pages, where you provide configuration information for the new requestor.


See Also

Dirsync Requestor Overview


New Dirsync Server Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new dirsync server. A dirsync server is a component used in the process of exchanging directory information with systems that follow the MS Mail 3.x Dirsync protocol. It configures the DXA to send updated directory information to remote dirsync requestors.

Note

Once you create a dirsync server, you must create one remote dirsync requestor record for each dirsync requestor that will be using this dirsync server.

Choosing New Dirsync Server opens the Dirsync Server property pages, where you provide configuration information for the new server.


See Also

Dirsync Server Overview


New Remote Dirsync Requestor Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new remote dirsync requestor. A remote dirsync requestor is a component used for exchanging directory information with systems that use the MS Mail 3.x Dirsync protocol. It defines a remote dirsync requestor record.

Note

The New Remote Dirsync Requestor command is disabled until you create a Microsoft Exchange Server dirsync server.


See Also

Remote Dirsync Requestor Overview


New Information Store Command (New Other Menu)

Creates a new public or private information store. The public information store holds all public folders and public folder replicas on a server and the information that they contain. The private information store holds all mailboxes on a server and the information, such as messages and attachments, that they contain.


New NNTP Command (New Other Menu)
New Newsfeed Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new newsfeed.

Choosing New Newsfeed opens the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard, which you use to create and configure new newsfeeds.


See Also

Newsfeed Overview


New Internet Mail Service Command (New Other Menu)

  See Also

Creates a new Internet Mail Service.

Choosing New Internet Mail Service opens the Internet Mail Wizard, which you use to create and configure a new service.


See Also

Internet Mail Service Overview


Raw Object Command (New Other Menu)

Creates a new raw object.

Note

This command is available only when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Save Window Contents Command (File Menu)
Save Window Contents (File Menu)

Saves the contents of the selected window in the Administrator program to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.


Properties Command (File Menu)

Displays the properties of the currently selected directory object.


Raw Properties Command (File Menu)

  See Also

Displays the raw properties of the currently selected directory object. Raw properties are the list of all schema attributes associated with a particular object.

Note

This command is available only when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


See Also

Command Line Switches


Duplicate Command (File Menu)

Duplicates the currently selected object. Choosing Duplicate creates a new object with the same properties as the selected object. Properties that are unique for every object (such as the display name) are left blank and must be filled in.


Exit Command (File Menu)

Quits the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program, and closes any open connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers.


Edit Menu

Use the commands on this menu to move, copy, delete, replace, and select text. For more information, choose a command name.

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete Raw Object

Select All


Undo Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses the effects of the last move, copy, delete, or select action you performed. If you cannot reverse your last action, Undo is unavailable.


Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Moves selected text onto the Clipboard. Text that you cut or copy onto the Clipboard replaces the previous Clipboard contents.


Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Copies selected text onto the Clipboard. Text that you copy onto the Clipboard replaces the previous Clipboard contents.


Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents at the insertion point. If any text is selected, Paste replaces it with the contents of the Clipboard. If the Clipboard is empty or the selection cannot be replaced, Paste is not available.


Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deletes the currently selected directory object.

Warning  Once you delete an object it can be recovered only by restoring directory and information store data from a previously made backup tape.


Delete Raw Object (Edit Menu)

Deletes the selected raw object.

Note

This command is available only when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Select All Command (Edit Menu)

Selects all objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window.


View Menu

Use the commands on this menu to change the way information is displayed in the Administrator window. For more information, choose a command name.

Mailboxes

Distribution Lists

Custom Recipients

Public Folders

All

Hidden Recipients

Raw Directory

Columns

Sort by >

Display Name

Last Modified Date

Font

Move Splitbar

Toolbar

Status Bar


Mailboxes Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only mailboxes.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Distribution Lists Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only distribution lists.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Custom Recipients Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only custom recipients.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Public Folders Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show only public folders.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


All Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the currently selected Recipients container to show all recipient types (mailboxes, distribution lists, custom recipients, and public folders).

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Hidden Recipients Command (View Menu)

Displays all hidden recipients in the currently selected Recipients container. Hidden recipients represent system objects that are used for configuration and replication purposes and do not normally appear in the directory.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Columns Command (View Menu)

Changes the columns of information that appear in the selected Recipients container.

Note

This command is available only when a Recipients container is selected.


Raw Directory Command (View Menu)

Changes the view of the left side of the Administrator window to a raw directory.

Note

This command is available only when running the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program in raw mode. Use the /r command line switch to start the Administrator program in raw mode.


Sort By Command (View Menu)

Lists the sorting options for directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window.

You can sort by:

Display name

Date the object was last modified

Select the sort option you want.


Display Name Command (Sort By Menu)

Sorts directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window alphabetically by display name.


Last Modified Date Command (Sort By Menu)

Sorts directory objects that appear on the right side of the Administrator window chronologically by when they were last modified.


Font Command (View Menu)

Changes the display font used in the Administrator window. Font opens the standard Font dialog box, which lets you choose a font type, style, and size.


Move Splitbar Command (View Menu)

Moves the split bar, which divides the left side of the Administrator window from the right side.

  You can click the split bar and drag it to the left or right.


Toolbar Command (View Menu)

Displays or hides the toolbar at the top of the window. You can use the toolbar to perform tasks more quickly. The toolbar contains buttons that enable you to perform common tasks in the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program, such as adding new mailboxes. The toolbar is visible by default.

You can use the Tools menu Customize Toolbar dialog box to add or remove items that appear on the toolbar.


Status Bar Command (View Menu)

Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.

When the status bar is displayed, Status Bar is checked on the View menu.

The status bar displays the following information:

Information about a selected command.

Progress indicators when some action is taking place, such as connecting to a server.

The box on the right end of the status bar displays the total number of directory objects in the currently selected container.


Tools Menu

Provides access to tools that let you perform a variety of administrative tasks. For more information, choose a command name.

Directory Import

Directory Export

Extract Windows NT Account List

Extract NetWare Account List

Find Recipients

Move Mailbox

Add to Address Book View

Clean Mailbox

Start Monitor

Track Message

Forms Administrator

Newsgroup Hierarchies

Save Connections on Exit

Save Connections Now

Customize Toolbar

Options


Directory Import Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Creates or modifies directory objects based on the contents of a text file.

You can use Directory Import to:

Import directory information from another e-mail system.

Add or change personal information (such as phone number and mailbox space quotas) to existing mailboxes and custom recipients.

Create distribution lists and populate them with members.

Modify directory attributes of all services in a site.

Directory Import Dialog Box Options

  Windows NT Domain

  MS Exchange Server

  Container Button

  Recipient Template Button

  Import File Button

  Account Creation Options

  Logging Level Options

  Separators Button

  Multivalued Properties


See Also

Command Line Directory Import Utility


Windows NT Domain

Select the Windows NT domain where new accounts will be created. This applies if you select Create Windows NT Account under Account Creation Options.


MS Exchange Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer in this site where you want to import directory information.


Container Button

Displays all recipient containers for the site. Select the recipient container where directory information will be imported and choose OK.


Recipient Template Button

Displays the template mailbox, distribution list, or custom recipient to copy for all new recipients of the same type that are imported.


Import File Button

Shows the path and file name of the import file that contains the information you are importing.


Account Creation Options

Select options for creating or deleting Windows NT accounts during directory import:

Create Windows NT Account creates a Windows NT account for each mailbox that is created. Accounts are created in the domain specified under Security domain.

Generate Random Password creates a random password for each newly created Windows NT account. Passwords are written to the Bimport.psw file in the working directory of the Administrator program and must be distributed to users before they can log on to Windows NT.

If this option is not selected, new Windows NT accounts are created with a password based on the account name. If the account name has fewer than four characters, the password is padded with "x" characters to a length of four characters. Passwords generated from account names longer than 14 characters are truncated.

If this option is selected, new Windows NT accounts are created with randomly generated passwords. The passwords are saved to the local disk in a .psw file in the same directory as the import file. If a Windows NT file system (NTFS) partition is being used, the .psw file is accessible only to the user who is currently logged on.

Delete Windows NT Account deletes the Windows NT accounts associated with all mailboxes you are deleting.


Logging Level Options

Select an option to determine the extent of logging for directory import:

None  Record only the start and finish of an import operation.

Low  Log errors occurring only while importing an object.

High  Record all errors, warnings and informational messages.


Separators Button

Opens the Separators dialog box where you can specify the characters used as separators in the import file.


Multivalued Properties

Select Append if imported data in a multivalued property should be added to existing data. Select Overwrite if imported data in a multivalued property should replace any existing data.


Directory Export Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Writes information about mailboxes, custom recipients, and distribution lists to a text file.

You can use Directory Export to:

Export directory information to another e-mail system.

Create a text file of all properties for mailboxes, custom recipients, or distribution lists.

Create a text file that can be used by Directory Import to import directory information.

  MS Exchange Server

  Home Server

  Export File Button

  Container Button

  Include Subcontainers

  Export Objects Options

  Logging Level Options

  Separators Button

  Character Set

  Include Hidden Objects

  Export Button


See Also

Command Line Directory Export Utility


MS Exchange Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer from which the export will be run.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer containing the data you want to export.


Export File Button

Displays the Directory Export File dialog box. Use the dialog box to specify the file name for the exported directory information.


Container Button

Displays the Directory Export Container dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the recipient container containing the recipient objects to be exported.


Include Subcontainers

Includes the recipient objects in the subcontainers of the specified recipient container.


Export Objects Options

Select the recipient objects to be exported (mailbox, custom recipient, or distribution list).


Character Set

Specifies which character set to use when creating the export file.

Option	Description
ANSI	If this option is selected, the file uses the active American National Standards Institute (ANSI) code page.
Unicode	If this option is selected, the file uses Unicode, which is a worldwide encoding standard used by Windows NT.


Export Button

Starts the export process. Directory Export exports the information you select to a file you specify.


Include Hidden Objects

Includes hidden recipient objects.


Extract Windows NT Account List Command (Tools Menu)

Selectively copies account information for existing LAN Manager and Windows NT users. You can then use Directory Import to import this information into Microsoft Exchange Server and create mailboxes.

Note

To use Extract Windows NT Account List, you must have a Windows NT Server. You must be logged on to the Windows NT Server as a user or as an administrator and know the name of the primary or backup domain controllers.


Extract NetWare Account List Command (Tools Menu)

Selectively copies account information for existing NetWare users. You can then use Directory Import to import this information into Microsoft Exchange Server and create mailboxes.

Note

To use Extract NetWare Account List, you must have a NetWare 3.x or 4.x server running bindery emulation. You also need a NetWare account and password that has supervisor rights to the server.


Find Recipients Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Find Recipients dialog box, where you search for recipients by specifying a container, personal information, or defining custom attributes.


Move Mailbox Command (Tools Menu)

Moves mailboxes to another server within a site. Any time you move users, you must edit their profiles to point to the new server.

Note

When moving mailboxes to a new server, the size of the mailbox contents on the destination server may increase. This is because individual copies of single-instance messages are created for each moved mailbox in the private information store on the destination server.

Move Mailbox Dialog Box Options

  Move Mailbox To


Move Mailbox To

Select the destination server from the list of servers in your site where you want to move the selected mailbox.


Clean Mailbox Command (Tools Menu)

Deletes messages from the selected mailbox based on a variety of criteria that you can set.

You can delete messages permanently or move them to the Deleted Items folder.


Add to Address Book View (Tools Menu)

Moves recipient objects between containers or creates another Address Book View container. When you move recipient objects between containers, the attribute that defined the recipient object in the original container is changed to the value of the attribute of the new container.

Choose New Container to create a new Address Book View container.


Start Monitor Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Starts the selected link monitor or server monitor.


See Also

Link Monitor Overview

Server Monitor Overview


Track Message Command (Tools Menu)

  See Also

Opens the Select Message To Track dialog box where you can select a message to track based on a variety of criteria. Once you isolate a specific message, you can open the Message Tracking Center window where you can view routing and delivery information about the message.


See Also

Messages Tracking Events


Forms Administrator Command (Tools Menu)

Displays the Organization Forms Library Administrator dialog box, where you create various forms to meet specific needs.


Newsgroup Hierarchies (Tools Menu)

If you want to make an existing public folder tree into a hierarchy of newsgroup public folders, you can designate a top-level newsgroup public folder as a hierarchy parent. Newsgroups that are included in the Internet News public folder by default, such as the comp and rec hierarchies, are not listed in the newsgroup hierarchy unless you add them to the list. You can also remove public folders from the newsgroup hierarchy.

  Add

  Remove


Save Connections on Exit Command (Tools Menu)

Saves all connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers that are open when you quit the Administrator program.

The next time you start the Administrator program, these connections will be reestablished.


Save Connections Now Command (Tools Menu)

Saves all connections to Microsoft Exchange Server computers that are open when you choose this command.

The next time you start the Administrator program, these connections will be reestablished.


Customize Toolbar (Tools Menu)

Opens the Customize Toolbar dialog box, where you can add, remove, and rearrange buttons on the toolbar. The toolbar contains a set of default buttons. You can remove buttons for commands that you rarely use, add other buttons for commands that you frequently use, and specify the order in which the buttons appear on the toolbar.

  Add

  Remove

  Reset

  Move Up

  Move Down


Options Command (Tools Menu)
Options (Tools Menu)

Sets the default values for auto naming, permissions, and comma-separated value (.csv) files.

Auto Naming

Permissions

File Format


Window Menu

Controls the arrangement and appearance of windows, and lets you switch between open windows. For more information, choose a command name.

New Window

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Refresh

Select Window


New Window Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new window.

If an Administrator window is currently selected, a new Administrator window with a connection to the same server is opened.

If a Message Tracking Center window is currently selected, a new Message Tracking Center window is opened. You can connect to any server.


Cascade Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows so that they overlap. The title bar of each window remains visible, making it easy for you to select any window.


Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows without overlap so that each window is wider than it is long.


Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)

Arranges all open windows without overlap so that each window is longer than it is wide.


Arrange Icons Command (Window Menu)

Arranges icons so that they line up neatly and do not overlap.


Refresh Command (Window Menu)

Updates the active Administrator window with current directory information.


Select Window (Window Menu)

A list of open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Window menu. When you choose an open window, you make it active. A check mark appears before the name of the active window.


Help Menu

Displays Microsoft Exchange Server online documentation. For more information, choose a command name.

Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics

Books Online

About Microsoft Exchange Server


Contents Command (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Contents for Microsoft Exchange Server.

The Contents screen displays the categories of Help that are available. To see all of the procedure topics, click Expand.

To display an alphabetical list of all of the topics and definitions in the online documentation for Microsoft Exchange Server, click Index.


Search for Help On Command (Help Menu)

Searches Help for information you want. Type or select keywords for the information you want, and a list of available Help topics appears.

Search Dialog Box Options

Keyword List

Type or select the keyword that describes the information you want to find. The keyword list automatically scrolls as you type.

Show Topics

Displays the Help topics that contain the information you want to search for.

Go To

Select the topic you want, and then choose Go To to display that topic.


Microsoft Exchange Server Help Topics (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Finder window. The Help Finder window contains 3 tabbed pages that provide access to all topics in the Microsoft Exchange Server Help system.

Contents

Displays a graphical outline of Help topics.

Index

Displays an alphabetical index of Help topics.

Find

Provides access to full-text search capabilities.

Note

For more information on using the Help Finder window, open the window and press F1.


Books Online Command (Help Menu)

Provides access to an online version of the complete Microsoft Exchange Server documentation.


About Microsoft Exchange Server Command (Help Menu)

Displays information about your copy of Microsoft Exchange Server, including the version number, and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.


Control Menu

Adjusts the appearance of windows in Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, choose a command name.

Restore Command

Move Command

Size Command

Minimize Command

Maximize Command

Close Command

Switch To Command


Restore Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Returns the active window to the previous size and location (before you maximized or minimized it).

You can also restore a window by clicking Restore in the upper-right corner of the window when it is maximized or by double-clicking the title bar.

  Restore button

To restore a minimized window, click the icon and choose Restore, or double-click the icon.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menu)

Maximize Command (Control Menu)


Move Command (Control Menu)

Moves the active window or dialog box. When you choose Move, the insertion point becomes a four-headed arrow. Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the window. When the window is in the location you want, press ENTER.

This command is unavailable if you maximize a window.

You can also move a window that is not maximized or an open dialog box by dragging its title bar.


Size Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Changes the size of the active window. When you choose Size, the insertion point becomes a four-headed arrow. Use the arrow key on the keyboard to select the corresponding border you want to size. For example, use the right arrow key to resize the right border. When the window is the size you want, press ENTER.

This command is unavailable if you maximize a window.

You can also size a window that is not maximized by dragging one of the window's borders or one of its four corners. When you position the insertion point over one of the window's borders, the insertion point becomes a 2-headed arrow, at which point you can drag the window until it is the size you want.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menu)

Maximize Command (Control Menu)


Minimize Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Reduces the active window to an icon.

You can also reduce a window to an icon by clicking Minimize in the upper-right corner of the window.

To restore a minimized window, click the icon and choose Restore, or double-click the icon.


See Also

Maximize Command (Control Menu)

Size Command (Control Menu)


Maximize Command (Control Menu)

  See Also

Enlarges the active window to fill the screen.

You can also maximize the active window by clicking Maximize in the upper-right corner of the window, or by double-clicking the title bar.


See Also

Minimize Command (Control Menu)

Size Command (Control Menu)


Close Command (Control Menu)

Closes the active window or an open dialog box.


Switch To Command (Control Menu)

Displays a list of all open applications so that you can switch to or close any application in the list. You can also display the list by pressing CTRL+ESC or by double-clicking a blank area on your desktop.

Task List Dialog Box Options

Task List

Select the application you want to switch to or close.

New Task

Type or select an additional task.

Run

Runs the selected application or new task.

Switch To

Activates the selected application.

End Task

Closes the selected application.

Cascade

Arranges open windows so they are equally sized and overlapping with all title bars visible. Minimized windows and icons are arranged across the bottom of your desktop.

Tile

Arranges open windows so that they do not overlap. Minimized windows and icons are arranged across the bottom of your desktop.

Arrange Icons

Arranges the icons for all minimized windows across the bottom of your desktop.


Next Command (Control Menu)

When you have more than one window open, switches to the next window.


Previous Command (Control Menu)

When you have more than one window open, switches to the previous window.


General (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to define a directory name and a display name, create a log file, and set polling intervals.

  Directory name

  Display name

  Log file

  Browse button

  Polling interval


Directory name

The name (up to 64 characters) that uniquely identifies this monitor.


Display name

Type a name (up to 256 characters). This name appears in the Administrator window.


Log file

The name of the file where the log, status information, and resulting notifications will be kept.


Browse button

Specify a path and file name for a log file. If no path and file name are specified, a log file is not created.

Tip

The log file will be easy to find if the path to the log file is in Universal Naming Convention. For example: \\servername\c$\lm_berk.log


Polling Interval

Use polling intervals to indicate how often the server monitor checks services. In a normal site, services are running and the clock is not off by more than a specified interval. A critical site does not meet the criteria defined for a normal site. Because of this, the default polling interval for a normal site is longer than that of a critical site. Polling intervals for both normal and critical sites can be set to any duration.

Option	Description
Normal	Indicate how often the monitor is to check services. The default is 15 minutes.
Critical sites	Indicate how often the monitor is to check services on servers that are in a warning or alert state. The default is 5 minutes.


Permissions (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this monitor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this monitor. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this monitor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this monitor.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this monitor.


Notification (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Notification property page to specify how to notify administrators when a service is in a warning state or an alert state. A warning state, indicating a possible problem, occurs when the clock is off by a small amount. An alert state, indicating a serious problem, occurs when a service is not working, a server does not respond, or the clock is off by a large amount. The symbols in the left column of the Notification property page indicate whether the notification is for an alert state (red down arrow) or a warning state (red exclamation point).

Notifications can be delivered as notification applications, mail messages, and network alerts.

Once you determine the type of notification, you can specify how administrators should be notified by setting the escalation path. An escalation path is a prioritized list of people to notify when a monitor enters a warning state or an alert state. This list is useful for notifying primary and secondary support personnel. For example, the primary support person can be notified immediately when the monitor enters a warning state. The secondary people that need to be notified can have a longer time delay or not be notified until the monitor enters an alert state.

For example, you could set a staggered time for three support people: a primary support person and two secondary support people. These three notifications could be staggered from immediate notification to notification after one hour. You must complete the notification setup process three times, once for each person.

  When

  How

  Who

  New button

  Edit button

  Remove button


When

Indicates how long after a server goes into an alert state or a warning state that the notification occurs.

The symbols on the left indicate whether the notification is for an alert (red down arrow) or a warning (red exclamation point), whether the status is unknown (a question mark) or normal (up arrow).


How

Indicates the type of notification event that occurs. For example, you can specify that a message be sent to the administrator.


Who

Indicates where the notification is sent. For example, if you choose Mail Message as the notification type, you must specify the recipient's mailbox.


New button

Displays the New Notification dialog box, in which you add a notification event to the list. Select an event and choose OK to open its associated Escalation Editor dialog box, in which you specify the type of notification event and when it should occur.


Edit button

Opens the associated Escalation Editor dialog box, where you edit the selected notification event.


Remove button

Removes the selected notification event from the list.


Servers (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Servers property page to specify the servers to be monitored.

  Servers

  Monitored Servers

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Services Button


Site

Displays the site currently selected. Click the down arrow to display all the sites in your organization.


Servers

Lists all servers in the currently selected site. Select the servers you want to monitor and choose Add.


Monitored Servers

Lists all servers being monitored.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of monitored servers.


Remove Button

Removes the selected server from the list of monitored servers.


Services Button

Displays the Services property page in which you specify the services on this server that will be checked by a server monitor.


Actions (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Actions property page to specify the escalation actions this server monitor takes when a service is not running. Actions and notification are independent. You can specify notification to occur before, during, or after actions.

Note

If the server is a member of a cluster, the controls in the Actions property page are greyed out. Escalation actions for services running on a clustered server can be controlled only from the Cluster Administrator program.

You can specify what action should be taken when a service is not running. One set of actions is used for all servers being monitored. You can create multiple server monitors if the monitored servers have different escalation actions.

Escalation occurs after an attempt to start the service has failed. Escalation attempts continue until the service starts successfully. When specifying options, consider how long it takes to restart your computer. For example, if the restart time is greater than the polling time and you choose to restart the computer, the action will fail repeatedly.

  First attempt

  Second attempt

  Subsequent attempts

  Restart delay (seconds)

  Restart message


First attempt

The action that will be taken the first time a monitored server is polled and is in a warning or alert state. Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
Take no action	The server monitor should notify you only of a failed service.
Restart the service	The server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.
Restart the computer	The server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.
Caution

Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not select the Restart the computer option.


Second attempt

The action that will be taken the second time a monitored server is polled and is in a warning or alert state. Select one of the following options.

Option	Description
Take no action	The server monitor should notify you only of a failed service.
Restart the service	The server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.
Restart the computer	The server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.
Caution

Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not select the Restart the computer option.


Subsequent attempts

Select the action that will be taken on the third and all subsequent times that a monitored server is polled and is in a warning or alert state.

Note

The action that you specify here will occur at continuous intervals determined by the Critical sites Polling interval (set on the General property page). Make sure that the interval you specify allows sufficient time for the escalation action to occur. For example, if a server takes 5 minutes to start and you select Restart computer as the escalation action, be sure that the Critical sites Polling interval is set to more than 5 minutes.

Option	Description
Take no action	The server monitor should notify you only of a failed service.
Restart the service	The server monitor should attempt to restart the missing service.
Restart the computer	The server monitor should attempt to restart the computer with the missing service.
Caution

Restarting the computer can interfere with other non-Microsoft Exchange Server services. If any of the monitored servers should not be restarted, do not select the Restart the computer option.


Restart delay (seconds)

If you selected Restart computer as one of the escalation actions, type a delay (in seconds) in the Restart delay box before the computer is shut down. This delay gives those using a Microsoft Exchange Server computer as a workstation time to save their work.


Restart message

If you selected Restart computer as one of the escalation actions, in the Restart message box, type the message that you want to appear in the Restart warning message box on the server to be restarted.


Clock (Server Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Clock property page to specify the amount of time the clocks of the monitored servers and the server monitor can differ before notification occurs.

If you are monitoring services on servers in other time zones, you can specify that the clocks of the monitored servers are synchronized with the monitoring computer’s clock. Synchronization uses the time zone information in Windows NT Server so monitors can function correctly with servers in other time zones. Clock synchronization ensures that time-based events such as message tracking and event logs are recorded accurately.

  Warning if off by more than

  Alert if off by more than

  Synchronize


Warning if off by more than

Type the minimum number of seconds that the two clocks can differ before a warning notification occurs.


Alert if off by more than

Type the minimum number of seconds that the two clocks can differ before an alert notification occurs.


Synchronize

Select if you want the clocks of monitored servers to be synchronized with the server monitor’s clock.


Actions (Monitored Server)

Use the Actions property page to start, stop, pause, and continue service on any component or connector. The status is shown in real time, and the display is updated for each polling interval.

The server status shows the last check performed on each server. The data shown provides details about the time of the last measurement performed and tracks the time of the last change. This information can be used to determine how a server is performing.

  Services

  Version

  Status

  Start button

  Stop button

  Pause button

  Continue button


Services

Lists the components and connectors monitored.


Version

Lists the version of the service, if known.


Status

Lists the current status as determined by its response to the poll sent by the monitor.


Start button

Starts a stopped service.


Stop button

Stops a running service.


Pause button

Temporarily stops a running service.


Continue button

Restarts a paused service.


Clock (Monitored Server)

Use the Clock property page for the server to see measurement results and time zone information. This property page is read-only; it cannot be edited.

  Measurement results

  Time zone information


Measurement results

Displays the measurement results.

Option	Description
Last reported time	The time on the server’s clock when the last monitored check occurred.
Clock offset	The difference between the clock on the server being monitored and the clock on the server running the server monitor.


Time zone information

Select this option to make adjustments to time zone information.

Option	Description
Bias	The difference between the server clock time and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Daylight savings time	The box selected when an adjustment is made for daylight saving time.
Standard name	The name of the standard local time for the server being monitored.
Change on	The day when standard local time changes to daylight saving time.
Daylight name	The name of the alternate local time for daylight saving.
Change on	The day when daylight saving time changes to standard local time.


Notification (Monitored Server)

Use the monitored server’s Notification property page to see who has been notified and how. Use this property page to determine if the instructions are being processed correctly and to anticipate notifications if the problem continues. This page is read-only; it cannot be edited.

  Who

  When

  How


Who

The person, mailbox, or computer notified.


When

The time that the notice was sent.


How

The method used for notification. The options are launch a process, send a mail message, or display a Windows NT alert.


Maintenance Status (Monitored Server)

Use the monitored server’s Maintenance status property page to determine if the server is down for scheduled maintenance. The server monitor may have missed the server going into maintenance status. This happens when the server monitor does not poll the server while the server is still able to indicate that maintenance has been selected.

Option	Description
Notifications suspended	Indicates whether notifications are stopped during maintenance.
Repairs suspended	Indicates whether repairs are stopped during maintenance.
Time	Shows the time of the last modification.
Modified by	Shows the name of the last person who made a modification.


General (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the General property page to define a directory name and a display name, create log files, and set polling intervals.

  Directory name

  Display name

  Log file

  Browse button

  Polling interval


Polling Interval

Use polling intervals to indicate how often the monitor sends ping messages to check connections. Normal sites contain links that have ping messages returning within the specified bounce time. A critical link does not meet the criteria defined for a normal link. Because of this, the default polling interval for a normal site is longer than that for a critical site. Polling intervals for both normal and critical sites can be set to any duration.

Option	Description
Normal	Indicate how often to send a ping message. The default is 15 minutes.
Critical sites	Indicate how often to send a ping message to servers or systems that are in a warning or alert state. The default is 5 minutes.


Permissions (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this monitor. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this monitor. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this monitor.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this monitor.
Delete	Delete objects.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this monitor.


Notification (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Notification property page to specify how to notify administrators when a connection is in a warning state or an alert state. A warning state, indicating a possible problem, occurs when a ping message fails to return within the bounce duration you set for warning status. An alert state, indicating a serious problem, occurs when a ping message fails to return within the bounce duration you set for an alert status. The symbols in the left column of the Notification property page indicate whether the notification is for an alert state (red down arrow) or a warning state (red exclamation point). Notifications are also sent when connections are restored.

Notifications can be delivered as notification applications, mail messages, and network alerts.

Once you determine the type of notification, you can specify how administrators should be notified by setting the escalation path. An escalation path is a prioritized list of people to notify when a monitor enters a warning state or an alert state. This list is useful for notifying primary and secondary support personnel. For example, the primary support person can be notified immediately when the monitor enters a warning state. The secondary people that need to be notified can have a longer time delay or not be notified until the monitor enters an alert state.

For example, you could set a staggered time for three support people: a primary support person and two secondary support people. These three notifications could be staggered from immediate notification to notification after one hour. You must complete the notification setup process three times, once for each person.

  When

  How

  Who

  New button

  Edit button

  Remove button


Servers (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Servers property page to specify which servers should receive ping messages from your Microsoft Exchange Server computer. The servers must be in your organization but can be in different sites.

The following are suggestions for setting up link monitors.

Pay attention to routing costs and scheduling.

When setting warning and alert durations, keep in mind the expected durations for each connection. This allows you to determine whether they are working as expected.

  Servers

  Monitored servers

  Add button

  Remove button

  Site


Recipients (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Recipients property page to configure a link monitor that checks connections to other organizations or foreign systems. The link monitor checks for replies to ping messages sent to recipients. Based on whether or not a reply is returned, you can determine whether the link is working correctly.

When you test a connection using a link monitor, specify a recipient that does not exist so you will be sent a non-delivery report (NDR). If you specify an existing recipient, you will not receive a reply and will not know whether the ping message reached the recipient.

Note

The NDR does not contain the name of the recipient that sent it, so the NDR could have been sent from a system anywhere along the connection path.

When the link monitor receives a reply, it does not read the contents of the message, but instead looks for the subject of the original message. You must specify how you expect the subject of the original message to be returned.

  Message subject returned from

  Message subject or body returned from

  None

  List

  Modify button


Message subject returned from

If you know that the recipient’s system has an automatic reply program (and that the program puts the original subject text in the reply subject field), specify the Message subject returned from box.

Note

Using the Message subject returned from option saves time because the body of the message does not need to be opened.


Message subject or body returned from

If you do not know how the recipient will return the subject, specify the Message subject or body returned from box.


None

Select to include no recipients in the list.


List

Select to include a specific set of recipients in the list. Select Modify to select the recipients that will be included in the list.


Modify button

Opens the Address Book where you can select one or more recipients.


Bounce (Link Monitor)

  Overview

Use the Bounce property page to set the warning and alert durations for each link monitor. One set of durations is used for all recipients and servers. You can create multiple link monitors if the monitored servers and foreign systems have different bounce durations. A bounce duration is the longest acceptable round-trip time for a message to travel between the monitor’s home server and another server or foreign system. You determine the value based on tests you have performed previously. An alert state indicates a more serious connection problem than a warning state.

  Bounce message return time


Bounce message return time

A warning state occurs when the ping message returns late. An alert state occurs when the ping message is returned very late.

Option	Description
Enter warning state after	Type a number and then select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours. The default is 30 minutes.
Enter alert state after	Type a number and then select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours. The default is 60 minutes.
Note

The alert state value should be a length of time after which the returned ping message is considered very late.


General (Monitored Link)

Use the General property page to view the results of the last successful bounce message. These values are informational and cannot be changed.

The link status shows the last bounce message sent to each server and provides details about the time the message spent between key points in the path. You can use this information to determine why a message has exceeded its maximum acceptable threshold. Also, link properties show the status of notifications sent in response to alerts and whether notifications and repairs have been suspended.

Note

The link monitor must have been active for at least the time period specified in the Bounce property page.

Option	Description
Request sent	The time the ping message was submitted by the system attendant on the sending server.
Request received	The time the ping message was received by the information store on the destination server.
Reply sent	The time the system attendant on the destination server sent the ping message back.
Reply received	The time the link monitor received a reply to the ping message.
Request time	The elapsed time between request sent and request received.
Turnaround time	The elapsed time between request received and reply sent. This includes processing time of the system attendant on the destination server.
Reply time	The elapsed time between reply sent and reply received. This includes message transfer agent (MTA) transport time on both servers.
Total time	The elapsed time between request sent and reply received.
Pending request	The date and time of all ping messages sent but not yet returned.


Notification (Monitored Link)

Use the Notification property page to view the current outstanding notification for a link. These values are informational and cannot be changed.

Note

The link monitor must have been active for at least the time period specified in the Bounce property page.

  When

  How

  Who


Maintenance Status (Monitored Link)

Use the Maintenance status property page to view the maintenance status and to see who made the last modification and when. These values are informational and cannot be changed.

Option	Description
Notifications suspended	Indicates whether notifications are stopped during maintenance.
Repairs suspended	Indicates whether repairs are stopped during maintenance.
Time	Shows the time of the last modification.
Modified by	Shows the name of the last person who made a modification.


Select Message To Track

You can find a message using a variety of criteria, and then track it through your network. When you find the message you want to track, select it and choose OK to open the Message Tracking Center window.

Find messages containing:

  From

  Sent To

  Find Now Button

  Search On Server

  Browse

  Look Back __ Days

  Start Date

  Message Display Area

  Cancel


From

Opens the shared Address Book list. Select an address from the list to search for messages from that address.

If this field is blank, Track Message searches for all messages to the recipients in the Sent To box. Either the From box or the Sent To box must be filled in.

Note

You cannot select names from your personal address book here. To search for a name that is not in a shared Address Book, choose Cancel and use Advanced Search in the Message Tracking Center window.


Sent To

Opens the Select One or More Recipients list, which displays all shared Address Books. Select a mailbox from the list. Track Message searches for all messages sent to that mailbox.

If this box is left blank, Track Message searches for all messages from the originator in the From box. Either the From box or the Sent To box must be filled in.

Note

You cannot select names from your personal address book. To search for a name that is not in a shared Address Book, choose Cancel and then choose Advanced Search in the Message Tracking Center window.


Find Now Button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing boxes. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


Search On Server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the home server of the mailbox in the From box. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note

When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse

Opens the Server Browser, in which you can select the server that you want to search.


Look Back __ Days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. Zero is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start Date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start Date changes to match the Look Back __ Days box.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Message Display Area

When you choose Find Now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing fields are displayed here.

Select a message and then choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of message tracking event.
Time	The date and time that the message was sent. Displayed in time local to the Administration program.
Size	Message size in bytes.
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.
Note

Each line in the display represents a startup mail-handling event for a message. The same message can appear in more than one event. It doesn't matter which instance you select, because the message is tracked, not the event.


Cancel

Closes this window without selecting a message and goes to the Message Tracking Center window.


Select Message to Track

Search for a message by its message ID.

  Search on server

  Browse Button

  Message ID

  Look back__days

  Start date


Search on server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the server you are logged on to. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note

When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser, in which you can select the server that you want to search.


Message ID

Type a message ID in this box or use Ctrl-V to paste one.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange Server messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.


Look Back __ Days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. Zero is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start Date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start Date changes to match the Look Back __ Days box.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Advanced Search

Use Advanced Search to:

Search for a message by its message ID.

Search for a message sent from outside the network.

Search for a message to or from mailboxes that do not appear in a shared Address Book.

  Sent by Microsoft Exchange Server

  Transferred into This Site

  By Message ID


Sent by Microsoft Exchange Server

Select this option to search for messages from Microsoft Exchange Server components like the system attendant, message transfer agent (MTA), or directory.


Transferred into This Site

Select this option to search for messages received from a connector or gateway, or messages from mailboxes that are not in any shared Address Book.


By Message ID

Select this option to search for a message by its Message ID.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange Server messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.

Tip  The Message ID is in the property page for the message. To find the message ID:

1.	Select the message from a mailbox folder, for example, Sent Items or Inbox.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	Select the Message ID tab.

Message IDs can also be found in event log detail and log files of utilities.


Message Tracking Center

Use this window to search for messages to track and to activate tracking. When tracking is complete, the message track is displayed in the tracking history window. You can select any event in the track and get more detailed information.

  Message ID

  Originator

  Start on server

  Start date

  Search button

  Advanced Search button

  Track Button

  Find Recipient in Tracking History button

  Properties button

  Tracking history window


Message ID

The message ID of the message selected for tracking.

To change the Message ID, choose Advanced Search, which will track a different message.

Message ID is a unique identifier for Microsoft Exchange Server messages that stays with the message from its origination to delivery or transfer to a gateway. It includes the site and server of the originator and the time it was sent.


Originator

The mailbox that sent the message.

To search for messages from a different originator, choose Search.


Start on server

The message trace begins from the log of this server. Select Message to Track found an event in the server's tracking log indicating that the message was sent from or entered the network through this server.


Start date

The date that the search begins. According to the tracking log, this is the date that the selected message was sent or entered the network.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT.


Search button

Opens the Select Message to Track window so you can search for a message.


Advanced Search button

Opens the Advanced Search dialog box. Use Advanced Search to:

Search for a message by its Message ID.

Search for a message sent from outside the network.

Search for a message from a Microsoft Exchange Server component.


Track Button

Activates message tracking for the selected message. When the search is complete, it displays the message tracking events found for the message in the Tracking History window.


Find Recipient in Tracking History button

Finds events involving a recipient that you specify and displays them in bold type.


Properties button

Displays details of the event selected.


Tracking history window

Displays message tracking events in a hierarchy. Each line represents one event and each level represents a branch in the message path, some of which are concurrent.


Message Tracking Events

These record each step in the process of handling mail messages. The events are generated by Microsoft Exchange Server components (the MTA, information store, Microsoft Mail Connector and Internet Mail Service).

Event Type	Description
Message transfer in	The message was received from a server, connector, or gateway.
Report transfer in	A delivery receipt or non-delivery report (NDR) was received from a server, connector, or gateway.
Message submission	The message was sent by the client.
Message transfer out	The message was sent to a server, connector, or gateway.
Report transfer out	A delivery receipt or NDR was sent to a server, connector, or gateway.
Message delivered	The message was delivered to a mailbox or public folder.
Report delivered	A delivery receipt or NDR was delivered to a mailbox.
Distribution list expansion	A recipient distribution list was expanded so the message could be sent to different servers.
Message redirected	The message was sent to a mailbox other than those of the recipients.
Message rerouted	The message was routed to an alternate path.
Report absorption	The number of delivery receipts and NDRs exceeded a threshold and the messages were deleted.
Report generation	A delivery receipt or NDR was created.
Unroutable report discarded	A delivery receipt or NDR could not be routed and was deleted from the queue.
Local Delivery	The sender and recipient are on the same server.
Backbone transfer in	Mail was received from another Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) system across a connector or gateway.
Backbone transfer out	Mail was sent to another MAPI system across a connector or gateway.
Gateway transfer out	The message was sent through a gateway.
Gateway transfer in	The message was received from a gateway.
Gateway report transfer in	A delivery receipt or NDR was received from a gateway.
Gateway report transfer out	A delivery receipt or NDR was sent through a gateway.
Gateway report generation	A gateway generated an NDR for a message.


Message Tracking Mailbox

Select a recipient in your organization for message tracking. You can select a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Distribution List Expansion

Displays detailed information about the expansion of a distribution list.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The distinguished name of the originator, if known, or the known address.
Time	The time that the distribution list was expanded is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
DL Name	The name of the distribution list that was expanded.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.


Gateway Message Transfer

Displays detailed information about mail messages sent to and received from non-Microsoft Exchange Server systems.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the originator.
Time	The time that the mail message was sent from or received by the connector is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The connector that transported the message to or from the gateway.
Remote ID	The unique identifier assigned by the gateway service.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.


Gateway Report Generation

Displays detailed information about delivery receipts and non-delivery reports (NDRs) sent to and received from non-Microsoft Exchange Server systems. Some of the information concerns the report and some describes the message that is the subject of the report.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the message originator.
Time	The time that the report was sent from or received by the connector is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The connector that transported the report to or from the gateway.
Remote ID	The unique identifier assigned to the report by the gateway service.
Subject ID	The unique identifier assigned to the message by Microsoft Exchange Server.
Gateway	The remote non-Microsoft Exchange Server network that sent or received the report.
Size	Size of the report, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the report by its originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the subject message was sent.
Delivery info	The status of attempts to deliver the subject message to each recipient.


Message Type

Displays detailed information about mail message handling within the network.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The distinguished name of the originator.
Time	The time that the mail message was sent or received is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The Microsoft Exchange Server component that generated this event.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.


Report Generation

Displays detailed information about delivery receipts and non-delivery reports (NDRs) handled by the network. Some of the information concerns the report and some describes the message that is the subject of the report.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
From	The address of the message originator.
Time	The time that the report was sent from or received by the network is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Transferred to	The Microsoft Exchange Server component that generated this event.
Report MTSID	The Microsoft Exchange Server message ID of the report.
Size	Size of the report, in bytes.
Priority	The importance level assigned to the report message by the originator.
Recipients List	Displays all addresses to which the message was sent.
Delivery info	The status of attempts to deliver the message to each recipient.


Message Rerouted

Displays detailed information about messages sent to recipients other than those in the recipient list.

Event type	Describes the message tracking event.
Time	The time this event was generated is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Old MTA name	The MTA in original recipient's server.
New MTA name	The MTA in the current recipient's server.


Select System Message to Track

Search for a message from the following Microsoft Exchange Server components.

  Directory service

  Information store

  System attendant (including NDRs, delivery receipts, and ping messages)

  Directory synchronization

When you find the message, select it and then choose OK. This opens the Message Tracking Center window in which you start message tracking and view a trace of the message through your network.

  Search on server

  Browse button

  Find Now button

  From

  Look back __ days

  Start date

  System message display area

  Properties button


Search on server

Select one of the following server components to be searched for the message.

  Directory service

  Information store

  System attendant (including NDRs, delivery receipts, and ping messages).

  Directory synchronization

The default is the server with the selected connector. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note

When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse button

Opens the Server Browser where you can select the server that you want to search.


Find Now button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing boxes. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


From

Select a Microsoft Exchange Server component from the list to search for messages sent from the component.

Note

You must select a component for this field. It cannot be left blank.


Look back __ days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. Zero is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Start date

The date of the first tracking log that will be searched. The Start date changes to match the Look back __ days box.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


System Message Display Area

When you choose Find now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing boxes are displayed here.

Select a message and then choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of tracking events.
Time	The date and time the message was sent is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Size	Message size, in bytes.
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.


Properties button

Displays details of the event selected.


Select Inbound Message to Track

Search for a message transferred to Microsoft Exchange Server from a connector or gateway. When you find the message, select it and then choose OK. This opens the Message Tracking Center window where you start message tracking and view a trace of the message through your network.

  From

  Sent To

  Find Now Button

  Transferred from

  Look back__days

  Search on server

  Browse Button

  Inbound messages list

  Properties Button


From

Type an e-mail address in the box or choose From to choose from a shared Address Book. It will search for all messages from this address.

Type the address in the format for the gateway. For example:

SMTP:agobi@ferguson.com


Sent To

Type an e-mail address in the box or choose Sent To to choose from a shared Address Book. It will search for all messages to this address.

Type the address in the format for the gateway. For example:

SMTP:agobi@ferguson.com


Find Now Button

Activates the search for messages that meet all the criteria in the Find Messages Containing boxes. When the search is complete, the messages found are displayed in the window.


Transferred from

Select from the list of installed connectors to search for messages from that gateway.

Track Messages searches the log of the server with that connector.


Look back__days

Type the number of prior daily logs to search. If 0, it searches only today's log. Zero is the default.

Daily tracking logs begin and end at midnight GMT, so you may have to look back an extra day to get all of a day's log in local time.


Search on server

Displays the server that will be searched for the message.

The default is the server with the selected connector. To change the server, choose Browse.

Note

When searching for a message, Track Message limits its search to the logs of one server. When tracking, it reads the logs of any server that handled the message.


Browse Button

Opens the Server Browser where you can select the server that you want to search.


Inbound messages list

When you choose Find Now, messages that meet all of the criteria in the Find Messages Containing boxes are displayed here.

Select a message and then choose OK. The Message Tracking Center window appears so you can track the message.

Option	Description
Icon	Represents the type of tracking events.
Time	The date and time the message was sent is displayed in time local to the Administrator program.
Size	Message size in bytes.
No. recp. (number of recipients)	The number of mailboxes to which the message was sent. A distribution list counts as one recipient.
Recipients	Displays the first mailbox in the recipients list. Choose Properties to see the entire list.
Note

Each line in the display represents an entry event for a message. The same message may appear in more than one event. It doesn't matter which instance you select because the message is tracked, not the event.


Properties Button

Displays details of the event selected.


Interchange (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Interchange property page to configure how messages are moved and translated between Microsoft Exchange Server and the Connector postoffice. You can also use the Interchange property page to configure the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA when connecting to an MS Mail (AppleTalk), now known as Quarterdeck Mail, server.

  Administrator's Mailbox

  Primary Language For Clients

  Maximize MS Mail 3.x Compatibility

  Enable Message Tracking

  MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA/Configure Button


Administrator's Mailbox

The recipient in your organization that will receive Microsoft Mail Connector administrative messages.

Choose Change to open the Address Book. From the Address Book, you can select a recipient to act as the administrator. The recipient can be a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.


Primary Language For Clients

The primary language used for the Microsoft Exchange clients. This is for interoperability with MS Mail 3.x clients that use a different language. Select the language that the majority of your clients use. The default is the language being used by Microsoft Exchange Server.


Maximize MS Mail 3.x Compatibility

MS Mail 3.x supports early versions of OLE only. To enable MS Mail 3.x users to view saved or embedded objects sent from Microsoft Exchange clients, the Microsoft Mail Connector can be configured to create two versions of each OLE object. This option will double the size of any OLE message. If this option is not selected, MS Mail 3.x clients cannot view or save embedded objects sent from Microsoft Exchange clients.


Enable Message Tracking

Tracks messages through the connector for troubleshooting. When message tracking is enabled, each component that handles mail records its activities in a log maintained by the system attendant on each server. The log becomes a trace of the processing of each mail message as each component receives, processes, and delivers the mail to the next component. The mail tracking log is stored in \EXCHSRVR\TRACKING.LOG.


MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA

Configures the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA to move and translate messages from the Connector postoffice to MS Mail (AppleTalk). Choose Configure to set Microsoft Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA options.


Local Postoffice (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Local Postoffice property page to change details about the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. This information is used when setting up message routing and service from MS Mail (PC).

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Sign-on Password

  Regenerate Button


Network

The MS Mail (PC) network name of the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. The default name is based on the Microsoft Exchange Server organization name.

Note

Changing the network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address used in this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. Verify that routing information for MS Mail postoffices, gateways, External programs, and other connections to this site reflects any changes you make.


Postoffice

The MS Mail postoffice name of the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice. The default name is based on the Microsoft Exchange Server site name.

Note

Changing the network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address used in this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. Verify that routing information for MS Mail postoffices, gateways, External programs, and other connections to this site reflects any changes you make.


Sign-on ID

The serial number identifier (in the format XX-XXXXX) of the Connector postoffice. This ID number is assigned during installation and cannot be changed.

A sign-on ID is required for an external MS Mail postoffice that has been specified as a direct route type and connected via an asynchronous or X.25 connection.


Sign-on Password

The password (up to 8 characters) required to connect to the Microsoft Mail Connector postoffice.

A sign-on password is required for an external MS Mail postoffice that has been specified as a direct route type and connected via an asynchronous or X.25 connection.


Regenerate Button

Any change to network or postoffice names causes regeneration of the MS e-mail address for this site. Changing the network or postoffice name after message transfer has started causes messages that were in transit during the change to be returned. You must also stop, reconfigure, and restart all MS Mail gateways, External programs, and other connectors in the same site to include any changes.


Connections (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connections property page to configure connections to MS Mail postoffices.

  Create

  Modify

  Delete

  Queue

  Confirm Before Connection Changes Are Applied


Create

Sets up a new local area network (LAN), asynchronous, X.25, or indirect connection to an MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Note

The Create Connection dialog box changes to reflect the connection type you select in the Connection Parameters box.


Modify

Displays the Modify Connection dialog box for the selected connection.

Note

This dialog box varies according to the type of connection you select.


Delete

Removes the selected connection.

Note

This button is unavailable if there are indirect connections to other postoffices through a selected direct connection.


Queue

Displays a dialog box that shows all messages waiting to be transferred from the selected connection. You can also return or delete messages waiting to be transferred.


Confirm Before Connection Changes Are Applied

If this box is selected, a confirmation message will be displayed before changes become permanent.


Connector MTAs (Microsoft Mail Connector)

  Overview

Use the Connector MTAs property page to create and configure Microsoft Mail Connector (PC) MTAs to provide message transfer services.

  New Button

  Configure Button

  Delete Button

  Log Status Button

When a Connector (PC) MTA has been created, you can add and remove service to LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices and edit LAN and X.25 connection parameters.

  Edit Button

  List Button


New Button

Creates a new instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.

Note

You can create as many instances as necessary to perform message transfer. To optimize performance, you should generally create a separate instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service each group of postoffices based on the type of connection used, such as local area network (LAN), asynchronous, or X.25.

However, if you have a small number of LAN-connected MS Mail postoffices that you want to service compared to asynchronous or X.25-connected MS Mail postoffices, you can set up an asynchronous or X.25 Connector (PC) MTA and then add the LAN-connected postoffices to the list of postoffices serviced by that Connector (PC) MTA.


Configure Button

Opens the Configure MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Instance dialog box and displays the selected Connector (PC) MTA.


Delete Button

Removes the selected instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.

Important

Deleting a Connector (PC) MTA immediately stops message transfer to serviced postoffices and deletes all messages in transit through the specified instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.


Log Status Button

Records the current status of the selected Connector (PC) MTA instance in the Windows NT application event log.


Edit Button

Opens the Edit LAN or X.25 Connection Parameters dialog box. This button is unavailable if the selected postoffice is connected by asynchronous transport.

Tip

To change the network or postoffice name, change the connection path or X.121 address, or to set options for asynchronous connections, use the Connections property page.


List Button

Displays the Serviced LAN Postoffices dialog box, which lists LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices serviced (and available for service) by the selected Connector (PC) MTA.

Note

When configuring an asynchronous (Async and LAN) MTA service, all asynchronous MS Mail (PC) postoffice connections are automatically serviced by this MTA service. Similarly, when configuring an X.25 (X.25 and LAN) MTA service, all X.25 connections are automatically serviced by this MTA service. However, you can add and remove service to LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices from any instance of the Connector (PC) MTA.


MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA

Use the MS Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA Options dialog box to enable and configure the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA service settings.

  Set Status

  Startup

Note

To use the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA, you must also set up the Microsoft Exchange Connection gateway on the MS Mail (AppleTalk) server. Windows NT services for Macintosh network software must be installed and running on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. Also, the Connector postoffice must be created as a Macintosh-accessible volume for both the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA and the Microsoft Exchange Connection gateway to function correctly.


Set Status

Specifies whether the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA is active.

Note

When the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA is enabled, it is registered as a Windows NT service and displayed in the Connections property page. You can use the Connections property page to view message queues destined for MS Mail (AppleTalk). However, you can modify the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA only in this dialog box.


Startup

Specifies whether the Connector (AppleTalk) MTA starts automatically when this Microsoft Exchange Server computer is started or is manually started using the Control Panel or Server Manager.


Microsoft Exchange Connection Gateway

A gateway program for MS Mail (AppleTalk), now known as Quarterdeck Mail, servers. The gateway exchanges information with Microsoft Exchange Server through the Microsoft Mail Connector (AppleTalk) MTA. This program is available on a Macintosh-formatted disk supplied with Microsoft Exchange Server. For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Server Operations.


Create Connection (LAN)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to a LAN-connected postoffice. When setting up this connection, some boxes are unavailable for manual changes.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Connection Parameters

  Postoffice Path Change Button

  Connection Attempts

  Upload Routing Button

Tip

To create an asynchronous, X.25, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Postoffice Path Change Button

Displays the Postoffice Path dialog box. This path specifies the location of an MS Mail (PC) postoffice on the same local area network (LAN).


Connection Attempts

The number of times (1 to 99) to attempt to deliver messages before returning them as nondeliverable.


Upload Routing Button

Retrieves routing information about indirect postoffices from this LAN-connected postoffice. You can display the information in the Downstream Postoffices Summary dialog box.

Note

If the routing information retrieved from the LAN-connected postoffice matches the indirect connection information shown in the Connections property page (there are no changes to be made to the Microsoft Mail Connector routing information), the Downstream Postoffices Summary dialog box is not displayed.


Postoffice Path

Use the Postoffice Path dialog box to specify the network location of an MS Mail (PC) postoffice on the same local area network (LAN).

  Path

  Connect As

  Password


Path

The network path to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Note

Before attempting a connection to a NetWare server, your Windows NT server must be running the Gateway Service for NetWare. When typing a network path to a NetWare server, use the universal naming convention (UNC) format (\\servername\sharename\path for a Windows NT server or \\servername\volumename\path for a NetWare server).


Connect As

The network logon name used when connecting to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Password

The network logon password used when connecting to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Downstream Postoffices Summary

Displays a list of any indirect postoffices connected to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice. You can include any of the postoffices listed to be indirectly connected to the Microsoft Mail Connector.

  Action Column

  Postoffice Column

  Messages Column


Action Column

Displays proposed changes to the Microsoft Mail Connector routing information in the Connections property page.


Postoffice Column

Displays the network and postoffice name of each downstream postoffice retrieved from the directly connected postoffice.


Messages Column

Displays messages waiting to be transferred.


Create Connection (Asynchronous)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an asynchronously connected postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Password

  Connection Attempts

  Phone Number

  Options Button

Tip

To create a LAN, X.25, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Network

The network name (up to 10 characters) of the MS Mail (PC) postoffice. This can be found by using the MS Mail Administrator program (Config Password command).


Postoffice

The postoffice name (up to 10 characters) of the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Sign-on ID

The serial number identifier (in the format XX-XXXXX) of the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice. This can be found by using the MS Mail Administrator program (Config Password command).


Password

The password used to log on to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Connection Attempts

The number of times (0 to 99) to attempt to connect to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Phone Number

The phone number of the MS Mail External program that receives and distributes messages at the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Options Button

Set message transfer options for individual postoffices over an asynchronous or X.25 connection in the Connection Options dialog box.


Create Connection (X.25)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an X.25-connected postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Sign-on ID

  Password

  Connection Attempts

  X.121 Address

  Options Button

Tip

To create a LAN, asynchronous, or indirect connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


X.121 Address

The address (up to 16 hexadecimal characters) of the MS Mail External program that receives and distributes messages at the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Connection Options

Use the Connection Options dialog box to set message transfer options for individual postoffices over an asynchronous or X.25 connection.

  Maximum Message Size

  Failed Connection Retry Interval For Urgent Mail

  Failed Connection Retry Interval For Normal Mail

  Dial Every

  Allow Mail Reception After Sending

  Return Registered Mail Confirmation


Maximum Message Size

The maximum size (0 to 9999 kilobytes) of messages to be transferred to this postoffice. This setting includes message body and attachments but excludes routing information appended to each message.


Failed Connection Retry Interval For Urgent Mail

The length of time (1 to 999 minutes) to wait before attempting to reestablish a failed connection when urgent messages are queued for transfer.


Failed Connection Retry Interval For Normal Mail

The length of time (1 to 999 minutes) to wait before attempting to reestablish a failed connection when normal messages are queued for transfer.


Dial Every

The interval (1 to 999 minutes) between regular calls to transfer messages.


Allow Mail Reception After Sending

Permits two-way message transfer during the same call.


Return Registered Mail Confirmation

Automatically sends confirmation receipts when registered mail is received at the Connector postoffice. This option is selected by default.


Create Connection (Indirect)

Use the Create Connection dialog box to set up routing to an indirectly connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

  Network

  Postoffice

  Indirect Via

Tip

You can also set up indirect connections by retrieving routing information from a LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice using the Update Routing option in the Create Connection (LAN) dialog box. To create a LAN, asynchronous, or X.25 connection, select the appropriate option button in the Connection Parameters box.


Indirect Via

An existing directly connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice through which messages for the indirect MS Mail (PC) postoffice are routed.


Messages Queued for __ (MS Mail (PC) Postoffice)

Use this dialog box to view, return, or delete messages waiting to be transferred to the selected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

  From Column

  Subject Column

  Message ID Column

  Date/Time Column

  Refresh Button

  Delete Button

  Return Button

  Send Non-Delivery Reports When Messages Deleted


From Column

Displays the sender of the message.


Subject Column

Displays the subject of the message.


Message ID Column

Displays the identification number of the message.


Date/Time Column

Displays the date and time that the message arrived in the queue.


Refresh Button

Updates the display to reflect the current queue status.


Delete Button

Deletes the selected message from the queue.


Return Button

Returns the selected message and removes it from the queue.


Send Non-Delivery Reports When Messages Deleted

Sends a notice to the originator of a message if it is removed or deleted from the queue.


New/Configure MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service LAN-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters


Service Name

A unique name for this Connector (PC) MTA. This name is used to identify and register this instance as a Windows NT service.


Sent At Serviced Postoffices

Records incoming message events in the Windows NT application event log. This option is selected by default.


Received At Serviced Postoffices

Records outgoing message events in the Windows NT application event log. This option is selected by default.


Update Configuration Every

The interval (0 to 999 minutes) between checks for updated configuration information.


Check For Mail Every

The interval (0 to 999 minutes) between checks for mail coming to the Connector postoffice.


Options Button

Displays the MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options dialog box to set service and message transfer options.


Connection Parameters

The connection transport type (or types) over which this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA service connects to MS Mail (PC) postoffices.


New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service (Async and LAN)

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service local area network (LAN) and asynchronously-connected and LAN-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters

  Communications Port

  Modem Script

  Modem Timeout

  Communications Mode

Note

Settings that are specific to asynchronous communications are not visible until Async and LAN is selected in the Communication Parameters box.


Communications Port

A communications port (COM 1 to 256) or the name of an additional port for which you have loaded a device driver.

Note

If you use a port other than COM1-4, you should not specify a port in the modem script.


Modem Script

A file used to specify the modem configuration for connection to MS Mail (PC) postoffices. The default is DEFAULT.SCR.

Note

If you want to use a script you have written and compiled, it must be placed in the EXCHANGE\CONNECT\MSMCON\MAILDATA\GLB directory.


Modem Timeout

The amount of time (0 to 999 seconds) to wait for valid communications to be established after dialing a phone number.


Communications Mode

Determines the directional transport of messages serviced by this MTA instance.


New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Service (X.25 and LAN)

Use the New MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Instance dialog box to set up an instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service local area network (LAN) and X.25-connected postoffices.

  Service Name

  Log Messages Sent At Serviced Postoffices

  Log Messages Received At Serviced Postoffices

  Update Configuration Every __ Minutes

  Check For Mail Every __ Minutes

  Options Button

  Connection Parameters

  X.121 Address

  Port Number

  Listen User Data

  Listen User Facilities

Note

Settings that are specific to X.25 communications are not visible until X.25 and LAN is selected in the Communication Parameters box.


X.121 Address

The local X.121 address (up to 16 decimal characters) of the Connector (PC) MTA.


Port Number

The X.25 adapter port number (0 to 255) to use for message transport.


Listen User Data

The listen user data information specified by the local X.25 service provider. Each hexadecimal pair must be separated by a dollar sign ($).


Listen User Facilities

The listen user facilities information specified by the local X.25 service provider. Each hexadecimal pair must be separated by a dollar sign ($).


MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options

Use the MS Mail Connector (PC) MTA Options dialog box to set service and message transfer options for the selected Connector (PC) MTA instance.

  Maximum LAN Message Size

  Close Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

  Open Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

  NetBIOS Notification

  Disable Mailer

  Disable Mail Dispatch

  Startup


Maximum LAN Message Size

The maximum size (0 to 999,999 kilobytes) of messages that can be transferred to and from a LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.


Close Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

The minimum amount of disk space (0 to 999,999,999 kilobytes) required on a destination postoffice for message transfer to be performed.

If the available space on a MS Mail (PC) postoffice drops below this amount, it is marked as unavailable and message transfer stops.


Open Postoffice If __ (KB) Free

The minimum amount of disk space (0 to 999,999,999 kilobytes) required on a destination postoffice to restore it to an available state after being marked unavailable.

If the available space on a closed MS Mail (PC) postoffice rises above this amount, it is marked as available and message transfer resumes.


NetBIOS Notification

Notifies MS Mail users about new mail delivered to MS Mail (PC) postoffices on the same LAN using NetBIOS.


Disable Mailer

Prevents this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA from distributing messages to recipient mailboxes on LAN-connected MS Mail postoffices.


Disable Mail Dispatch

Prevents this instance of the connector MTA from delivering messages to destination postoffices. This choice does not affect the delivery of mail to recipient mailboxes.


Startup

Specifies whether this instance of the Connector (PC) MTA starts automatically when this Microsoft Exchange Server computer is started or is manually started using the Control Panel or Server Manager.


Serviced LAN Postoffices

Use this dialog box to add and remove service to available LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices.

Add Adds service to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice selected in the Available LAN Postoffices box.

Remove Removes service to the MS Mail (PC) postoffice selected in the Serviced LAN Postoffices box.

Note

Every Connector (PC) MTA can service LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffices, However, to optimize performance, you should create a separate instance of the Connector (PC) MTA to service a group of postoffices based on the type of connection used, such as LAN, asynchronous, or X.25.


Edit LAN Parameters

Use the Edit LAN Parameters dialog box to modify connection and service options to the selected LAN-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Account Name  The logon name used when connecting to the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Password  The password used when connecting to the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Do Not Pick Up Mail At This Postoffice  Prevents two-way message transfer during the same connection.

Note

To change the network or postoffice name or to change the connection path, use the Connections property page.


Edit X.25 Parameters

Use the Edit X.25 Parameters dialog box to modify connection and service options to the selected X.25-connected MS Mail (PC) postoffice.

Call User Data  Data transfer information required to establish a connection specified by the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice's X.25 service provider.

Call User Facilities  Communication information required to establish a connection specified by the remote MS Mail (PC) postoffice's X.25 service provider.

Note

To change the network or postoffice name or to change the X.121 address, use the Connections property page.


Corrections Summary

Use the Corrections Summary property page to view errors that have been detected in the registry and accept or reject proposed corrections.

  Object Name Column

  Attribute Column

  Reset Value Column

  Current Value Column


Object Name Column

The Microsoft Mail Connector component, such as connector interchange or Connector (PC) MTA, for which a nonvalid value was found in the registry.


Attribute Name Column

The connector component attribute, such as code page, for which a nonvalid value was found in the registry.


Reset Value Column

A proposed correction to replace the nonvalid value found in the registry.


Current Value Column

The nonvalid attribute value that was found in the registry.


Apply Changes Now

Use the Microsoft Mail Connector Confirmation dialog box to verify that you want new changes to postoffice connection information applied now.

OK  Applies connection changes.

Cancel  Discards all new connection changes.


General NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable Protocol

  Enable client access

  Administrative note


Enable protocol

Enables the NNTP protocol for all servers in the site, or enables NNTP clients to access newsgroup public folders.


Enable client access

Enables NNTP clients to use newsgroup public folders in the site.


Display name

The name that displays in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters.


Directory name

This name is defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Administrator's Mailbox

Displays the recipient for the administrator's mailbox. To specify a different recipient, choose the Change button.


Administrative note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Newsfeeds NNTP (News) Site Defults
Newsfeeds NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Newsfeeds property page to view the properties for newsfeeds that you have already created. Select the newsfeed you want to view, and choose Properties.


Message Format NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

You can specify the message format for encoding newsgroup items from the NNTP site object or the NNTP server object. This applies to both incoming and outgoing messages.

The settings in the Message Format property page determine the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when retrieved by an NNTP client. Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead they are retrieved by the NNTP client in the format that the message was originally composed in.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable.
Provide message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide message body as HTML is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative plain text MIME body part is generated.
Provide message body as HTML	An HTML MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide message body as plain text is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative HTML MIME body part is generated. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich-text formatting, such as bold, color, and italic, to appear in messages. Clients such as Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 can read HTML.
UUENCODE	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the uuencode method, which is commonly used in the UNIX operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet. This is the default.
Use Binhex for Macintosh	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the BinHex method, a common method used in the Macintosh operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Clients support S/MIME signatures	Enables support for signed S/MIME messages. This is useful for accessing newsgroups that contain signed S/MIME messages.


Idle Time-out NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Idle Time-out property page to close NNTP connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed. The default setting is 10 minutes.


Anonymous NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

You can specify whether NNTP users can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously. If users cannot connect anonymously, they cannot access Microsoft Exchange Server without a valid Windows NT user account and authentication by a Windows NT Server.

You can specify which newsgroup public folders authenticated users and anonymous users can view when accessing Microsoft Exchange Server. For example, you may not want to allow anonymous users to access a newsgroup public folder containing confidential information.

To allow anonymous access, select the Allow anonymous access check box.


Authentication NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify authentication methods an Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) client is allowed to use to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. Authentication is the process the NNTP server uses to determine whether to grant the user permission to connect to the system. In order for an NNTP client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client's vendor if you are unsure of which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most NNTP clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text) using SSL	Use SSL protocol to encrypt clear text.
Windows NT  Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 and later. With Windows NT Challenge/Response, it is not possible to specify the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox you want to access. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to access the mailbox with the same name as the Windows NT user account that the user is logged on as. For example, if you are logged on as Domain\Suzanf, with Windows NT Challenge/Response enabled, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to access the mailbox called Suzanf.
Windows NT Challenge/Response using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 563. This method will be supported by future versions of Microsoft Internet Mail and News.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Control Messages NNTP (News) Site Defaults

  Overview

When Microsoft Exchange Server receives control messages, it queues them until you decide whether to accept the messages. If you don't trust a particular USENET host, you can delete the control messages without accepting their changes using the Control Messages property page.

Select the queued control message you want to process and choose either Accept or Delete. Choose Refresh to refresh the queue with the most current information.


General NNTP (News) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Use site defaults for all properties

  Enable Protocol

  Enable client access

  Administrative note


Enable client access

Enables NNTP clients to access newsgroup public folders for this server.


Enable Protocol

Enables the NNTP protocol for this server.


Use site defaults for all properties

Select to use the default values for permissions, newsfeeds, and message content from the News Service (NNTP) site object.


Permissions NNTP (News) Settings - Server
Permissions (Protocols) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Newsfeeds NNTP (News) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Newsfeeds property page to view the properties for newsfeeds you have already created. Select the newsfeed you want to view, and choose Properties.

The USENET site name is specified during installation but can be changed. The USENET site name is stamped on each NNTP message so servers can identify messages they receive that they have already processed.

Create Active File is used to create an active file containing newgroup public folders that other NNTP hosts and clients can download.


Message Format NNTP (News) Settings - Server

  Overview

You can specify the message format for encoding newsgroup items from the NNTP site object or the NNTP server object. This applies to both incoming and outgoing messages.

The settings in the Message Format property page determine the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when retrieved by an NNTP client. Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead, they are retrieved by the NNTP client in the format that the message was originally composed in.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable.
Send message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Send message body as HTML is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative plain text MIME body part is generated.
Send message body as HTML	An HTML MIME body part is generated for the message. If Send message body as plain text is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative HTML MIME body part is generated. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich-text formatting, such as bold, color, and italic, to appear in messages. Clients such as Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 can read HTML.
UUENCODE	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the uuencode method, which is commonly used in the UNIX operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet. This is the default.
Use Binhex for Macintosh	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the BinHex method, a common method used in the Macintosh operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Clients support S/MIME signatures	Enables support for signed S/MIME messages. This is useful for accessing newsgroups that contain signed S/MIME messages.


Anonymous NNTP (News) Settings - Server

  Overview

You can specify whether NNTP users can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server anonymously. If users cannot connect anonymously, they cannot access Microsoft Exchange Server without a valid Windows NT user account and authentication by a Windows NT Server.

You can specify which newsgroup public folders authenticated and anonymous users can view when accessing Microsoft Exchange Server. For example, you may not want to allow anonymous users to access a newsgroup public folder containing confidential information.

To allow anonymous access, select the Allow anonymous access check box.


Idle Time-out NNTP (News) Settings - Site Server

  Overview

Use the Idle Time-out property page to close NNTP connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed. The default setting is 10 minutes.


Authentication NNTP (News) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify authentication methods an Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) client is allowed to use to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. Authentication is the process the NNTP server uses to determine whether to grant the user permission to connect to the system. In order for an NNTP client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client's vendor if you are unsure of which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most NNTP clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text) using SSL	Use SSL protocol to encrypt clear text.
Windows NT  Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 and later. With Windows NT Challenge/Response, it is not possible to specify the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox you want to access. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to access the mailbox with the same name as the Windows NT user account that the user is logged on as. For example, if you are logged on as Domain\Suzanf, with Windows NT Challenge/Response enabled, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to access the mailbox called Suzanf.
Windows NT Challenge/Response using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 563. This method will be supported by future versions of Microsoft Internet Mail and News.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


General (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Newsfeed type

  Enable newsfeed

  Administrator's mailbox

  Administrative note


Newsfeed type

Indicates whether the newsfeed is a push or pull feed. This is the option that is specified when you use the Newsfeed Wizard.


Enable newsfeed

Indicates whether the newsfeed is enabled for the site.


Administrator's mailbox

The mailbox that will receive status notifications related to the newsfeed.


Messages (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Use the Messages properties page to specify a limit on the size of messages that can be sent to or from this newsfeed server.

  Outgoing message size

  Incoming message size


Outgoing message size

Select No Limit or type a number for Maximum (K) to limit the message size. The default is 1024K.

Note

This option only appears if this newsfeed was configured for outbound newsfeeds when the newsfeed was created using the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard.


Incoming message size

Select No Limit or type a number for Maximum (K) to limit the message size. The default is No Limit.

Note

This option only appears if this newsfeed was configured for inbound newsfeeds when the newsfeed was created using the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard.


Hosts (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Use the Hosts property page to specify the remote USENET site name and the outbound and inbound connections.

  Remote USENET site name

  Remote USENET host name

  Additional inbound hosts


Remote USENET site name

The name of the remote USENET site that is providing your newsfeed. If your server initiates connections, you must connect your newsfeed to the remote USENET site by specifying its node name. Your Internet News Service can either push messages outbound to the remote USENET site or accept inbound push messages from this site.


Remote USENET host name

You must specify the Internet protocol (IP) address of the USENET host computer that is providing your newsfeed. For connections to computers on the Internet, the name must be the IP address or the fully qualified domain name of the host computer, such as myserver.mycompany.com.


Additional inbound hosts

You can set additional host names or IP addresses that you want to use for inbound connections to receive newsgroups. This option is necessary only for accepting push feeds from a newsfeed provider that uses multiple hosts.

Note

This option only appears if this newsfeed was configured for inbound newsfeeds when the newsfeed was created using the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard.


Connection (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Specify whether to use a dedicated or dial-up connection when your Microsoft Exchange Server connects to the remote USENET host.

  Connect using my Local Area Network (LAN)

  Connect using Dial-up Networking


Connect using my Local Area Network (LAN)

You can configure your Internet News Service to use a LAN connection to connect to your newsfeed provider's host computer.


Connect using Dial-up Networking

You can configure the Internet News Service to connect to the newsfeed provider using a dial-up connection.

Use the following options.

Option	Description
Connection	Lists the currently configured connections from the RAS phone book.
Refresh List!	Updates the list of connections.
New Connection	Use to add a new connection to the list.
Account	The account name for the dial-up connection. This is an optional setting.
Password	The password for the dial-up connection. This is an optional setting.
Confirm password	Verifies the password.


Security (Newsfeed)

  Overview

By default, security is not enabled for NNTP newsfeeds. However, you can specify the account and password that your Microsoft Exchange Server computer uses to log on to remote servers and the account that the remote servers use to log on to your server. You can also set your Microsoft Exchange Server computer so that it requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to be used when communicating with other servers. SSL is a protocol that encrypts all data sent between NNTP servers.

  Require secure connection (SSL)

  Outbound connections

  Inbound connections

  Change

  Remove


Remove

No longer allows the listed account to log on from a remote location.


Change

Reassigns an account in your organization to log on from a remote location.


Authentication Method

You can specify methods of authentication that remote host computers use when connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server. Authentication is the process the NNTP server uses to determine whether to grant the host permission to connect to the system. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server allows a host to connect using any listed authentication method.

Choose an authentication method.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enables authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most NNTP clients support this method.
Windows NT  Challenge/Response	Enables authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 and later. With Windows NT Challenge/Response and Internet Mail and News, it is not possible to specify the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox or custom recipient you are using for authentication. By default, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to access the mailbox associated with the Windows NT user account that the user is logged on as. For example, if you are logged on as Domain\Suzanf, with Windows NT Challenge/Response enabled, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to use the mailbox or custom recipient for Suzanf.
Secure Sockets Layer	Enables authentication and all client/server communication to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 563. SSL is a protocol that provides secure data communication using data encryption and decryption. This method will be supported by future versions of Microsoft Internet Mail and News.


Require Secure Connection (SSL)

You can configure your Microsoft Exchange Server computer to require remote host computers to use SSL encryption when connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server. If Microsoft Exchange Server is configured to require SSL, SSL is used when other hosts initiate push feeds to Microsoft Exchange Server. It is also used when Microsoft Exchange Server initiates push and pull feeds to other hosts. For a remote host to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer using SSL, SSL must be enabled by the server.


Outbound Connections

You can set the account and password for all outbound host connections. Your Microsoft Exchange Server computer uses this account and password to connect to your newsfeed provider's host computer. The account name and password are supplied by your newsfeed provider.

Note

This option is enabled if this newsfeed was configured for outbound newsfeeds when the newsfeed was created using the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard. This option does not appear for inbound-only newsfeeds.


Inbound Connections

You can specify the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox or custom recipient that your newsfeed provider's host computer uses to log on to your Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

Note

This option is enabled if this newsfeed was configured for inbound newsfeeds when the newsfeed was created using the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard. This option appears, but is not enabled for outbound-only newsfeeds.


Advanced (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Use the Mark All As Delivered button to mark all queued newsgroup messages as delivered. This flushes the queue of messages waiting to be processed so your Microsoft Exchange Server or another host computer can catch up to the most recent newsgroup posts.


Schedule (Newsfeed)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this Microsoft Exchange Server connects to the remote USENET site to send and retrieve new information. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view that you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the newsfeed will become active.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Administrator's Mailbox (Newsfeed)

Select the recipient in your organization that will receive newsfeed administrative messages. You can select a mailbox, public folder, distribution list, or custom recipient.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Newsgroup Hierarchies (NNTP)

If you want to make an existing public folder tree into a hierarchy of newsgroup public folders, you can designate a top-level newsgroup public folder as a hierarchy parent. You can also remove the hierarchy properties from a newsgroup public folder.

Note

Newsgroups that are included in the Internet News public folder by default, such as the comp and rec hierarchies, are not listed in the newsgroup hierarchy unless you add them to the list.

  Add

  Remove


Add

Select the public folder that you want to designate as a hierarchy parent newsgroup public folder.


Remove

Select the public folder that you want to remove from the hierarchy.


Inbound (Newsfeed) Accept

  Overview

Use the Inbound property page to specify which newsgroups to include or exclude in the newsfeed. The default is to include all available newsgroups.

	Indicates you subscribe to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribe to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribed to this newsgroup public folder.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this newsgroup public folder.
  Accept

  Reject

  Create Newsgroup Folders


Inbound (Newsfeed) Pull

  Overview

Use the Inbound property page to specify which newsgroups to include or exclude in the newsfeed. The default is to include all available newsgroups. When subscribing to newsgroups, you should set subscriptions at the highest level in the hierarchy and specify only exceptions at lower levels in the hierarchy.

	Indicates you subscribe to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribe to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribed to this newsgroup public folder.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this newsgroup public folder.

  Include

  Exclude

  New Active List


Outbound (Newsfeed)

  Overview

If your Internet News Service is configured to send outbound newsfeeds to your newsfeed provider, you can change the newsgroups that you send in the newsfeeds.

To add newsgroups that are pushed outbound, select the public folder that contains the newsgroup you want to add to the newsfeed, and choose Include.

To remove a newsgroup from the newsfeed that is pushed outbound, select the public folder that contains the newsgroup that you want to remove from the newsfeed, and choose Exclude.


Include

Select the newsgroups you want in your newsfeed, and choose Include.


Exclude

Select the newsgroups you do not want in your newsfeed, and choose Exclude.


New Active List

When you subscribe to your newsfeed provider, you have access to an active list containing all newsgroups that are available through your newsfeed provider. You can import an active list to set up newsgroups or update the list of newsgroups available from your newsfeed provider. There are two ways of providing your Internet News Service with this list. You can use the Internet News Service to download this list from your newsfeed provider using NNTP. Alternatively, you can import the list from a file on your computer or an available share on a site server.

Option	Description
Download from the newsfeed provider, via NNTP	If selected, the active list is imported from your newsfeed provider's host computer.
Import from a file	If selected, a dialog box appears asking you to select an active list to import into your newsfeed.


Accept

Use to accept messages from the selected newsgroup.


Reject

Use to reject messages from the selected newsgroup.


Create Newsgroup Folders

Use to create public folders where messages will be stored.


Create Newsgroup Folders

Use the Create Newsgroup Folders property page to specify which newsgroups to include or exclude in the newsfeed. The default is to include all available newsgroups. When subscribing to newsgroups, you should set subscriptions at the highest level in the hierarchy and specify only exceptions at lower levels in the hierarchy.

	Indicates you subscribe to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribe to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and all newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this node and some newsgroup public folders beneath it.
	Indicates you subscribed to this newsgroup public folder.
	Indicates you have unsubscribed to this newsgroup public folder.
  Include

  Exclude

  New Active List


Service Account

Type the password of the service account.

For more information about the service account, see the Microsoft Exchange Server documentation.


No Help Available for this Topic

No Help is available for this topic. For information, see the Microsoft Exchange Server documentation.


NNTP

Use the NNTP property page on the newsgroup public folder to specify a different default character set for MIME and non-MIME messages.

Default Character set

Specifies the character set that will be used when generating MIME and non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server. There are many possible character sets available for Microsoft Exchange Server.


Newsfeed Wizard Introduction
Newsfeed Wizard

The Newsfeed Configuration Wizard makes it easy for you to create one or more newsfeeds on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. The display name for any newsfeeds you create is based on the name of the newsfeed provider and your server name.

When you run the Newsfeed Configuration Wizard, you must provide the following information:

The USENET site name of the newsfeed provider that is supplying the newsfeed. This is the value used in the path header for newsgroup messages. It is typically the fully qualified domain name of the host computer that is sending the newsfeed.

The mailbox name of the administrator who can add and remove newsgroup public folders.

The name and location of the active file if it will not be downloaded from your newsfeed provider's host computer.


Newsfeed Wizard Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server this newsfeed will be installed on. Enter the server's USENET site name. This name must be unique on the Internet and should be the same as the server's fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, the server's USENET site name and FQDN might be myserver.mycompany.com.


Newsfeed Wizard Newsfeed Types

Inbound/Outbound

Select one of the following newsfeed types.

  Inbound and Outbound (Typical)

  Inbound or Outbound Only

Inbound Newsfeed (Push or Pull)

Select one of the following inbound newsfeed types.

  Accept Incoming Messages (Typical)

  Pull Incoming Messages


Inbound and Outbound (Typical)

Select both inbound and outbound newsfeeds to provide the following benefits:

You can pull messages from your provider's host computer.

You can accept messages that your host pushes to your Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

You can push (or send) messages posted to newsgroup public folders to your provider's host computer.

If a host computer needs to pull messages from your Microsoft Exchange Server computer, you need to configure only NNTP client support on your computer. The host computer can then pull messages and act as though it is an NNTP newsreader.


Inbound or Outbound Only

Select an inbound newsfeed if you want to receive messages only from a provider host. Select an outbound newsfeed if you want to send messages only to an Internet Mail host.

Note

If you select inbound or outbound only, newsgroups cannot be imported from a remote news server using NNTP.


Accept Incoming Messages (Typical)

Select Accept Incoming Messages to permit remote news servers to send (push feed using the IHAVE command) messages to the local news server. In general, you should use push feeds if you plan to receive large newsfeeds over a local area network (LAN) connection.

Note

When the Inbound and Outbound (Typical) newsfeed type is selected, messages are sent by push feed from the local news server to a remote news server using the IHAVE command.


Pull Incoming Messages

Select Pull Incoming Messages to permit messages to be sent (pulled) from a remote server only upon the request (pull feed using the NEWNEWS command) of the local news server. Pull feeds allow administrators to control when messages are obtained from the remote news server. In general, you should use pull feeds if you plan to receive smaller newsfeeds and you'll be connecting to your newsfeed provider's host computer using a dial-up connection.

Note

When the Inbound and Outbound (Typical) newsfeed type is selected, messages are sent by push feed from the local news server to a remote news server using the NNTP POST command


Newsfeed Wizard Connection Type

Select a LAN or dial-up connection type.


Newsfeed Wizard Outbound Only

You can change the newsgroups that you send in the newsfeeds.

To add newsgroups that are pushed outbound, select the public folder that contains the newsgroup you want to add to the newsfeed, and choose Include.

To remove a newsgroup from the newsfeed that is pushed outbound, select the public folder that contains the newsgroup that you want to remove from the newsfeed, and choose Exclude.


Newsfeed Wizard USENET Site Name

Enter your newsfeed provider's USENET site name. This information can be obtained from your newsfeed provider.


Newsfeed Wizard Connection Frequency

Select how often the Microsoft Exchange Server will connect to the newsfeed provider.


Newsfeed Wizard IP Address
Newsfeed Wizard Host Address

Enter the names or IP addresses of your newsfeed provider's inbound and outbound hosts. This information can be obtained from your newsfeed provider.


Newsfeed Wizard Security

By default, security is not enabled for NNTP newsfeeds. However, you can specify the account and password that your Microsoft Exchange Server computer uses to log on to remote servers and the account that the remote servers use to log on to your server. You can also set your Microsoft Exchange Server computer so that it requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol to be used when communicating with other servers.

Option	Description
Log in to remote servers as	Type the account name to be used to log on to remote servers. If the remote server is running Windows NT Server, you should specify the domain and user name, for example, Domain\suzanf.
Password	Type the password to be used to log on to remote servers.
Remote servers  log in as	Specifies the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox or custom recipient that your newsfeed provider's host computer uses to log on to your Microsoft Exchange Server computer.
Require secure connection (SSL)	Requires remote host computers to use SSL encryption when connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server. If Microsoft Exchange Server is configured to require SSL, SSL is used when other hosts initiate push feeds to Microsoft Exchange Server. It is also used when Microsoft Exchange Server initiates push and pull feeds to other hosts. In order for a remote host to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer using SSL, SSL must be enabled on both servers.


Newsfeed Wizard Intermission

Select the Next button to install the newsfeed. After installation, you can specify the newsgroups you want in your newsfeed.


Newsfeed Wizard Active File

An active file contains a list of all the newsgroups you can subscribe to through your newsfeed provider. Your newsfeed provider can send it to you (typically through e-mail or File Transfer Protocol) or you may be able to download it directly from the host computer using NNTP. Contact your provider for details.


Newsfeed Wizard Administration
Newsfeed Wizard Administrator

Select an Internet news administrator. This person will own all the Internet news public folders. Use the Change button to access the organization's address list. Select a mailbox from the list.


Newsfeed Wizard Newsgroup Selection

Select the newsgroups to include or exclude in the newsfeed. The default is to include all available newsgroups. When subscribing to newsgroups, you should set subscriptions at the highest level in the hierarchy as possible and specify only exceptions at lower levels in the hierarchy.

  Include

  Exclude


Include

Includes a newsgroup in the newsfeed.


Exclude

Excludes a newsgroup from a newsfeed.


Newsfeed Wizard Finish

Choose the Finish button to complete the installation of the newsfeed. You can modify newsfeed settings using the Newsfeed object in the Connections container.


Newsfeed Wizard Secure Connection
Newsfeed Remote Logon

Select the account in your organization that will log on from a remote location.

  Show Names From The

  Type Name or Select From List

  Properties Button

  Find Button


Newsgroup Hierarchies

If you want to make an existing public folder tree into a hierarchy of newsgroup public folders, you can designate a top-level newsgroup public folder as a hierarchy parent. Newsgroups that are included in the Internet News public folder by default, such as the comp and rec hierarchies, are not listed in the newsgroup hierarchy unless you add them to the list. You can also remove public folders from the newsgroup hierarchy.

  Add

  Remove


Add Public Folder (Newsgroup Hierarchies)

Select a public folder and choose Add to add the folder to the newsgroup hierarchy. You can also assign a root newsgroup name for the public folder hierarchy.


Root Newsgroup Name (Newsgroup Hierarchies)

Accept the default root newsgroup name, or type another name.

Folder name

Displays the name of the selected top-level public folder.

Newsgroup name

The newsgroup name that will be used to generate newsgroup names for all subfolders. You can accept the default name, or type another name.


Remove Public Folder (Newsgroup Hierarchies)

Select a public folder and choose Remove to remove a newsgroup public folder from the hierarchy.


Protocols Container (Server)

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\ Protocols Container

The Protocols container contains configuration information about Internet protocols.


Protocols
Protocols Container (Site)

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container

The Protocols container contains configuration information about Internet protocols.


Protocols Container - Site
  Protocols Container (Site)

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container - Site

The Protocols container contains configuration information about Internet protocols.

Use the following property pages to configure the site protocols:

General

Permissions

Connections

MIME Types


Protocols Container - Server
  Protocols Container (Server)

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\ Protocols Container - Server

The Protocols container contains configuration information about Internet protocols.

Use the following property pages to configure the server protocols:

General

Permissions

Connections

MIME Types


LDAP (Directory) Site
  LDAP (Directory) Site Defaults

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container\ LDAP(Directory) Site Defaults

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an Internet protocol that accesses the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. Clients with permission to use LDAP can browse, read, and search directory listings. For example, a user can search for specific information, such as department names and locations, from any application that supports LDAP. LDAP works only with Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) connections.

Use the following property pages to configure the LDAP protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Anonymous

Search

Referrals

Idle Time-out


POP3 (Mail) Site
  POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container\ POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) enables users with POP3 clients to retrieve mail from their Microsoft Exchange Server Inbox. Any third-party e-mail client that supports POP3 can be used to connect to a Microsoft Exchange Server and access messages. To send outgoing messages from Microsoft Exchange Server, POP3 clients can use the Internet Mail Service or any other Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server.

Use the following property pages to configure the POP3 protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Message Format

Idle Time-out


IMAP4 (Mail) Site
  IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container\ IMAP4 (Mail) Site Defaults

Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) enables users with any IMAP4 client (that is compliant with RFC 2060) to access mail in their Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox. It can also be used to read and post messages to public folders or to access another user’s mailbox that they have been granted access to.

Use the following property pages to configure the IMAP4 protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Anonymous

Message Format

Idle Time-out


NNTP (News) Site
  NNTP (News) Site Defaults

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Protocols Container\ News Service (NNTP) Site Defaults

Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) allows clients to read and post Internet news articles in public folders. An administrator controls whether a user can post or read news articles in that public folder. Moreover, the Microsoft Exchange Server organization can replicate newsgroups with Internet service providers (ISP) or other organizations that have servers running NNTP.

To send and receive USENET newsfeeds, you must configure the newsfeed and NNTP properties. You can set properties for the NNTP object that are available at the site and server levels. Site NNTP properties apply to all servers in a site; server NNTP properties apply only to a single server. With some exceptions, all properties for the NNTP object are the same for the site and the server.

Use the following property pages to configure the NNTP protocol:

General

Permissions

Newsfeeds

Control Messages

Authentication

Message Format

Idle Time-out

Anonymous


HTTP (Web) - Site
  HTTP (Web) Site Settings

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration\ Protocols Container\ HTTP (Web) Site Defaults

The Microsoft Exchange Server Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) (Outlook Web Access) allows a user to access data from a Microsoft Exchange Server computer using an Internet browser. From a UNIX, Macintosh, or Microsoft Windows-based computer connected to the Internet, a user can view any public folder or mailbox on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

Microsoft Outlook Web Access works with a user’s Web browser, communicating through the Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) to provide a client interface to a Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox. Outlook Web Access extends the messaging capabilities of Microsoft Exchange Server through the Internet to the World Wide Web.

Use the following property pages to configure the HTTP protocol:

General

Permissions

Folder Shortcuts

Advanced


  LDAP (Directory) Settings - Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\Protocols\ LDAP(Directory) Settings- Server

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an Internet protocol that accesses the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. Clients with permission to use LDAP can browse, read, and search directory listings. For example, a user can search for specific information, such as department names and locations, from any application that supports LDAP. LDAP works only with Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) connections.

Use the following property pages to configure the LDAP protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Anonymous

Search

Referrals

Idle Time-out


  POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\ Protocols\ POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) enables users with POP3 clients to retrieve mail from their Microsoft Exchange Server Inbox. Any third-party e-mail client that supports POP3 can be used to connect to a Microsoft Exchange Server and access messages. To send outgoing messages from Microsoft Exchange Server, POP3 clients can use the Internet Mail Service or any other Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server.

Use the following property pages to configure the POP3 protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Message Format

Idle Time-out

Diagnostics Logging


  IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\ Protocols\ IMAP4 (Mail) Settings - Server

Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) enables users with any IMAP4 client (that is compliant with RFC 2060) to access mail in their Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox. It can also be used to read and post messages to public folders or to access another user’s mailbox that they have been granted access to.

Use the following property pages to configure the IMAP4 protocol:

General

Permissions

Authentication

Anonymous

Message Format

Idle Time-out

Diagnostics Logging


NNTP (News) - Server
  NNTP (News) Settings - Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Servers Container\ Protocols\ NNTP (News) Settings - Server

Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) allows clients to read and post Internet news articles in public folders. An administrator controls whether a user can post or read news articles in that public folder. Moreover, the Microsoft Exchange Server organization can replicate newsgroups with Internet service providers (ISP) or other organizations that have servers running NNTP.

To send and receive USENET newsfeeds, you must configure the newsfeed and NNTP properties. You can set properties for the NNTP object that are available at the site and server levels. Site NNTP properties apply to all servers in a site; server NNTP properties apply only to a single server. With some exceptions, all properties for the NNTP object are the same for the site and the server.

Use the following property pages to configure the NNTP protocol:

General

Permissions

Newsfeeds

Authentication

Message Format

Idle Time-out

Anonymous

Diagnostics Logging


  Newsfeed

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Connections Container\ Newsfeed

The flow of items from one USENET site to another is called a newsfeed. A newsfeed replicates items in newsgroups between host computers. One or more servers, or hosts, running Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) make up a USENET site.

Each USENET site receiving a newsfeed can be configured to accept and generate an NNTP connection and newsfeed. The host computer that receives your newsfeed is configured as the outbound host. The host computers that provide your newsfeed are configured as the inbound hosts. A host computer can be configured as both the inbound and outbound host.

You can configure the news service to support multiple newsfeeds through either push feeds or pull feeds. With a push feed, your provider’s host computer initiates newsfeeds to your Microsoft Exchange Server computer. Push feeds are better than pull feeds for handling large newsfeeds. However, a push feed requires more interaction between you and your newsfeed provider because your provider controls which newsgroups you receive.

With a pull feed, your Microsoft Exchange Server initiates connections and delivers messages to host computers in your provider’s site. Pull feeds also check for new messages and retrieve them. Pull feeds work well for small newsfeeds and over dial-up connections.

Use the following property pages to configure newsfeeds:

General

Messages

Hosts

Connection

Security

Schedule

Inbound Accept

Inbound Pull

Outbound

Advanced


Visual Guide

For more information, click any container or object in the directory hierarchy shown below.

Note

The Permissions property page is not displayed by default for all objects.


Address Book Views Container


  Address Book Views Container

Path:  Organization\ Address Book Views Container

The Address Book Views container contains Address Book Views and subcontainers that are used to group mailboxes and custom recipients. You use Address Book Views to organize mailboxes and custom recipients. You create Address Book Views that are grouped by the values of the attributes of your mailboxes and custom recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure the Address Book Views container:

General

Permissions


  Address Book View

Path:  Organization\ Address Book Views Container\ Address Book View

Each Address Book View has one or more groupings of mailboxes and custom recipients. Any mailbox or custom recipient with attributes that match the Address Book View grouping appear in a subcontainer under that Address Book View in the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. Address Book Views are also displayed in the Show Names from the box in the Microsoft Outlook Address Book.

When you create an Address Book View, you specify up to four grouping attributes and the subcontainers are generated automatically in a corresponding hierarchy under the Address Book View. Subcontainers for the first grouping appear at the first level under the Address Book View, while subcontainers for the fourth grouping appear at the fourth level. As your organization grows, you can modify the existing groupings or add additional Address Book View subcontainers to organize your Address Book Views.

Use the following examples to apply Address Book Views in your organization:

Examples

Use the following property pages to configure an Address Book View:

General

Group By

Permissions

Advanced


Applying Address Book Views

The following examples illustrate how to use Address Book Views to control which recipients are visible to one another within an organization.

In both examples, setting the appropriate Search permissions ensures that the global address list of the largest container available to a user is visible to that user. Verify that any Windows NT user accounts that require access to all users in the organization, such as service accounts used by other applications, have Search permissions on the Organization object. If you do not give Search permissions to at least one account on the Organization object, users can view every user in the global address list, even though they cannot see what container the user is in.

Example 1

In the first example, you want e-mail addresses for company executives to be available only to other executives. The executives also need to see addresses for all other users outside of the group of executives. To do this, you create an Address Book View based on department, create a series of Windows NT groups to mirror the various departments within your organization (such as Executives, Marketing, Operations, and Manufacturing), and assign Search permissions as appropriate to the Windows NT groups. This is illustrated in the following diagram.

1.	Create a Windows NT group containing only executives.

2.	Create a new Address Book View titled Department. In the Group By property page of the Address Book View, select Department in the Group items by box. Address Book Views are created under Department for each existing department.

If executives have been assigned to the Executives department, an Address Book View called Executives appears under the Department Address Book View. An Address Book View appears for each department assigned to one or more recipient mailboxes.

3.	In the Executives Address Book View Permissions property page, add the Executives Windows NT group and assign it the Search role. The Executives Address Book View is visible only to users in the Executives Windows NT group.

4.	In the Permissions property page of the Marketing, Operations, and Manufacturing Address Book Views, assign the Search role to the Windows NT Everyone group. These Address Book View containers are visible to all users.

5.	In the Permissions property page of the Organization object, verify that the Search permission is selected for at least the service account. Unless limited by setting the Search permission on a specific account, each user in the organization is visible to all other users in the organization. By giving Search permission to the service account, only the service account can see all users. The global address list for each user is set to the largest container that they are a member of and is visible to them.

Everyone in the organization can now see the recipients in the Marketing, Operations, and Manufacturing Address Book Views, but only members of the Executives group can see recipients in the Executives Address Book View.

Example 2

In the second example, your corporation consists of four companies. You want e-mail addresses for each company to be hidden from members of other companies located on the same server. To do this, you create an Address Book View and a Windows NT group for each company. Then assign the appropriate Search permission to each corresponding Windows NT group.

1.	Create a Windows NT group for each company.

2.	Create a new Address Book View titled Company. In the Group By property page of the Address Book View, select Company in the Group items by box. Address Book Views are created under Company for each existing company. An Address Book View appears for each company assigned to one or more recipient mailboxes.

3.	In the Permissions property page of each Address Book View container that represents a separate company in your corporation, add the Windows NT group that contains that company's users. Each Address Book View container is visible to users in that company.

4.	In the Permissions property page of the Organization object, verify that the Search permission is selected at least for the service account. Unless limited by setting the Search permission on a specific account, each user in the organization is visible to all other users in the organization. By giving Search permission to the service account, only the service account can see all users. The global address list for each user is set to the largest container that they are a member of and is visible to them.


  Address Book View Container

Path:  Organization\ Address Book Views Container\ Address Book View Container

Each Address Book View can have up to four levels of subcontainers. By default, subcontainers are grouped as specified by the parent Address Book View. You can change the grouping of subcontainers to provide alternate groupings. For example, if you have a container that groups items by country and subcontainers that group items by state and city, you can organize countries that do not have states by grouping them in a subcontainer by city alone.

Use the following property pages to configure an Address Book View container:

General

Group By

Permissions

Advanced


Add-Ins Container


  Add-Ins Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Add-Ins Container

The Add-Ins container holds optional third-party services that do not require a mailbox. Other optional services include Directory exchange, PC interchange, and AppleTalk interchange.

Use the following property pages to configure the Add-Ins container:

General

Permissions


Addressing Container


  Addressing Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container

The Addressing container holds the following directory objects:

E-Mail Address Generators let you automatically generate e-mail addresses.

Details Templates let you customize the appearance and functionality of dialog boxes.

One-Off Address Templates let you view the appearance of the dialog boxes that let you create one-off e-mail addresses.

Use the following property pages to configure the Addressing container:

General

Permissions


  E-Mail Address Generators Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ E-Mail Address Generators Container

The E-Mail Address Generators container holds the following e-mail address generators, which automatically generate e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients:

cc:Mail e-mail generator

Internet e-mail generator

MS Mail e-mail generator

X.400 e-mail generator

Use the following property pages to configure the E-Mail Address Generators container:

General

Permissions


  E-Mail Address Generator

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ E-Mail Address Generators Container\ E-Mail Address Generator

You configure e-mail address generators to automatically generate Lotus cc:Mail, Internet, MS Mail, and X.400 addresses for Microsoft Exchange Server recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure an e-mail address generator:

General

Permissions


  Details Templates Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container

The Details Templates container holds various Details Templates Language containers for various foreign languages. Details templates let you customize dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure the Details Templates container:

General

Permissions


  Details Templates Language Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container\ Language Container

The Details Templates Language container holds details templates in various languages (such as U.S./English, German, and Japanese). Details templates let you customize various dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure the Details Templates Language container:

General

Permissions


  Details Template

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ Details Templates Container\ Language Container\ Details Template

Details templates let you customize various dialog boxes.

Use the following property pages to configure a details template:

General

Permissions

Templates

MS DOS Templates


  One-Off Address Templates Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container

The One-Off Address Templates container holds various One-Off Address Templates containers, which contain one-off address templates in various languages. One-off address templates let you view the Microsoft Outlook dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off e-mail address information.

Use the following property pages to configure the One-Off Address Templates container:

General

Permissions


  One-Off Address Templates Language Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container\ Language Container

The One-Off Address Templates Language container holds one-off address templates in various languages (such as U.S./English, German, and Japanese). One-off address templates let you view the Microsoft Outlook dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off e-mail address information.

Use the following property pages to configure the One-Off Address Template Languages container:

General

Permissions


  One-Off Address Template

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Addressing Container\ One-Off Address Templates Container\ Language Container\ One-Off Address Template

One-off address templates let you view the Microsoft Outlook dialog boxes that prompt you for one-off address information.

Use the following property pages to configure a one-off address template:

General

Permissions

Templates

MS DOS Templates


  Directory Synchronization

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Directory Synchronization

When you configure a directory synchronization server or requestor in the local site, one server is selected to run each synchronization process. By default, the server selected is the one to which you are currently connected. (Check the Administrator window for the server name.) The directory synchronization object on the selected server imports and exports information during directory synchronization. The default settings for the directory synchronization object allow both server and requestor functions to be performed without making any changes.

Use the following property pages to configure the directory synchronization object:

General

Permissions

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Incoming Templates

Outgoing Templates

Diagnostics Logging


  Dirsync Requestor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Requestor

The dirsync requestor periodically queries the Microsoft Exchange Server directory for changes to recipient information. When Microsoft Exchange Server recipients are added, deleted, or modified, the directory synchronization component sends (according to schedule) updates to the MS Mail directory server postoffice. The component also requests address updates from the MS Mail directory server postoffice.

Use the following property pages to configure a dirsync requestor:

General

Permissions

Import Containers

Export Containers

Settings

Schedule


  Dirsync Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Server

A dirsync server processes incoming updates from one or more directory requestors and incorporates the updates into the directory as custom recipient objects. It also sends updates on recipients in response to update requests from a directory requestor postoffice. You can configure only one directory synchronization server in a site to service all requestors.

Note

You can create only one dirsync server per site. Once you create a dirsync server, you must create at least one remote dirsync requestor.

Use the following property pages to configure a dirsync server:

General

Permissions

Schedule


  Remote Dirsync Requestor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dirsync Server\ Remote Dirsync Requestor

Remote directory synchronization requestors are internal representations of dirsync requestors that use a Microsoft Exchange Server dirsync server. This internal information is used to authenticate and respond to requestors during directory synchronization.

Each dirsync requestor to a dirsync server must be defined in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory as a remote dirsync requestor. To set up a remote dirsync requestor, you perform the following tasks:

Create a custom recipient that specifies the address of the remote dirsync requestor (done automatically for MS Mail 3.x requestors).

Define a remote dirsync requestor object in the directory.

Configure permissions and decide which directory containers to use when importing and exporting address information from the remote dirsync requestor.

When you have completed the above tasks, you should verify that the dirsync requestor is correctly configured on each system and that each system can communicate with the Microsoft Exchange Server (through the MS Mail Connector or other connection).

Use the following property pages to configure a remote dirsync requestor:

General

Permissions

Import Containers

Export Containers


  Internet Mail Service

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Internet Mail Service

The Internet Mail Service is the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server component of Microsoft Exchange Server. It provides message transfer and translation between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and SMTP messaging systems, such as the Internet. You can also use the Internet Mail Service to connect to foreign X.400 systems or to connect Microsoft Exchange Server sites that are not on the same local area network (LAN).

Use the following property pages to configure the Internet Mail Service:

General

Permissions

Connected Sites

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Diagnostics Logging

Internet Mail

Dial-up Connections

Connections

Queues

Routing

Security


 Connector for cc:Mail

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Connector for cc:Mail

The Microsoft Exchange Connector for Lotus cc:Mail provides connectivity between Microsoft Exchange Server and Lotus cc:Mail. The connector enables message transfer and directory synchronization using one or multiple connectors, depending on your messaging requirements. Each Microsoft Exchange Server in your organization can run one instance of the connector that directly services one connection to a cc:Mail post office. You cannot service one cc:Mail post office from more than one connector.

Use the following property pages to configure the Connector for Lotus cc:Mail:

Post Office

General

Permissions

Dirsync Schedule

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Import Container

Export Containers

Queues

Diagnostics Logging


Monitors Container


  Monitors Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container

The Monitors container holds the monitoring tools, including server monitors and link monitors, that let you regulate your servers and connections, and troubleshoot and resolve various messaging problems.

Use the following property pages to configure the Monitors container:

General

Permissions


  Server Monitor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container\ Server Monitor

Server monitors track the condition of servers in a site. Notification occurs if a service fails to start or shuts down, if clients cannot connect to the server, or if the server is not on the network. Server monitors can also restart computers or services and synchronize the clocks.

Use the following property pages to configure server monitors:

General

Permissions

Notification

Servers

Actions

Clock


  Link Monitor

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Monitors Container\ Link Monitor

Link monitors observe the round-trip time of ping messages sent between a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and another server or foreign system. Notification occurs if the round trip takes longer than expected.

Use the following property pages to configure link monitors:

General

Permissions

Notification

Servers

Recipients

Bounce


  MS Mail Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ MS Mail Connector

The MS Mail Connector transfers information between Microsoft Exchange Server sites and Microsoft Mail for PC Networks.

A message from Microsoft Exchange Server to MS Mail is picked up by the Connector interchange, converted to MS Mail format, and placed in a temporary information store of the Microsoft Mail Connector. The Microsoft Mail Connector (PC) message transfer agent (MTA) then retrieves the message and delivers it to the MS Mail postoffice.

Use the following property pages to configure the MS Mail Connector:

General

Address Space

Diagnostics Logging

Interchange

Local Postoffice

Connections

Connector MTAs


Recipients Container


  Recipients Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container

The Recipients container holds Microsoft Exchange Server message recipients. A site can contain numerous Recipients containers. Recipients include mailboxes, mailbox agents, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.

Use the following property pages to configure a Recipients container:

General

Permissions


  Mailbox

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Mailbox

A mailbox is a private repository for e-mail and other information in the private information store of Microsoft Exchange Server. Users must have a mailbox to send and receive messages. A mailbox usually has only one user, but it can be shared by several users.

Use the following property pages to configure a mailbox:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Delivery Options

Protocols


  Distribution List

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Distribution List

A distribution list is a group of recipients created to expedite large mailings.

Use the following property pages to configure a distribution list:

General

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced


Public Folder (Site)
  Public Folder

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Public Folder

Public folders hold information that can be shared by various users. They reside in the public information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and can be copied, or replicated, to one or more additional Microsoft Exchange Server computers. When you make a change in a public folder, that change is replicated to every replica of that folder throughout the organization.

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  Custom Recipient

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Custom Recipient

A custom recipient is a recipient outside the messaging site, local postoffice, or organization, such as an Internet recipient with a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) address. When you create a custom recipient, it appears in the site Address Book, and it can send messages to and receive messages from Microsoft Exchange Server.

Use the following property pages to configure a custom recipient:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Protocols

Custom Attributes

Advanced


Servers Container


  Servers Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container

The Servers container holds a server object for each Windows NT Server computer in a particular Microsoft Exchange Server site.

Use the following property pages to configure the Servers container:

General

Permissions


  Server

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server

A server is a Windows NT Server computer running Microsoft Exchange Server. In the directory hierarchy, the server object is the parent of the core server components, which include the directory service, directory synchronization, system attendant, public information store, private information store, and message transfer agent (MTA). The server object also contains any installed MTA transport stacks and an object called the Server Recipients container, which contains all recipients on this server.

Use the following property pages to configure a server:

General

Permissions

Services

Locales

Database Paths

IS Maintenance

Advanced

Diagnostics Logging


  Directory Service

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Directory Service

The directory service stores all information about an organization's resources and users, such as information about servers, mailboxes, and public folders.

Use the following property pages to configure the directory service:

General

Permissions

E-Mail Addresses

Diagnostics Logging


  MTA

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Message Transfer Agent

The message transfer agent (MTA) provides addressing and routing information for sending messages from one server to another.

Use the following property pages to configure the MTA for the selected server:

General

Permissions

Queues

Diagnostics Logging


  Private Information Store

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Private Information Store

The private information store holds all the mailboxes on a particular server.

Use the following property pages to configure the private information store:

General

Permissions

Logons

Mailbox Resources

Diagnostics Logging


  Public Information Store

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Public Information Store

The public information store holds all public folders on a particular server. These public folders can be replicated to servers in other Microsoft Exchange Server sites, enabling users in those sites to access that information.

Use the following property pages to configure the public information store:

General

Instances

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Age Limits

E-Mail Addresses

Folder Replication Status

Advanced

Diagnostics Logging

Logons

Public Folder Resources

Server Replication Status


  Organization

The organization is the root object or starting point of the Microsoft Exchange Server directory. All other directory objects are subordinate to the organization object. When setting up Microsoft Exchange Server, you name the organization. This is the directory name used in addressing and cannot be changed.

Use the following property pages to configure the organization object:

General

Permissions


  Site

Path:  Organization\ Site

A site is a group of one or more servers connected to the same local area network (LAN). The site object contains all the components (such as servers and monitors) in a site. In the Microsoft Exchange Server directory, the site object is the parent of the following containers: Recipients and Configuration.

Use the following property pages to configure a site:

General

Permissions


Connections Container


  Connections Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container

The Connections container contains all connectivity for the system.

Use the following property pages to configure the Connections container:

General

Permissions


  Site Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Site Connector

A site connector connects two Microsoft Exchange Server sites on the same local area network (LAN).

Use the following property pages to configure a Site Connector:

General

Permissions

Target Servers

Address Space

Override


  Dynamic RAS Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ Dynamic RAS Connector

The Dynamic Remote Access Service (RAS) Connector connects two sites. This asynchronous connection uses the RAS function provided with the Microsoft Windows NT Server.

Use the following property pages to configure a Dynamic RAS Connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

RAS Override

MTA Override

Connected Sites

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions


  Server Recipients Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ Server Recipients Container

The Server Recipients container holds the recipients on a server. Recipients can send and receive messages and include mailboxes, mailbox agents, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.


  Mailbox Agent

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Recipients Container\ Mailbox Agent

Mailbox agents are services such as the Administrative Mailbox Agent, the Mailbox Cleanup Agent, and the Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector that are accessed through a mailbox on the server. A mailbox agent sends and receives messages and provides mailbox routing and schedule information to the message transfer agent (MTA) and connectors.

The property pages differ for each mailbox agent, but can include:

General

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Delivery Options

Security

Custom Attributes

Schedule

Limits

Advanced

Options


  X.400 Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Connections Container\ X.400 Connector

Use an X.400 Connector to connect to foreign X.400 systems or to connect Microsoft Exchange Server sites not on the same local area network (LAN).

Note

Before creating an X.400 Connector, you must install the corresponding MTA transport stack.

Use the following property pages to configure an X.400 Connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Stack

Override

Connected Sites

Address Space

Delivery Restrictions

Advanced


  MTA Transport Stack

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ MTA Transport Stack

An MTA transport stack defines the transport used with an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector. The server installed with the stack processes all messages from all connectors within the site that reference the stack.

Before configuring an X.400 Connector or Dynamic RAS Connector, you must install the corresponding transport stack. For example, to configure an X.400 TP4 Connector, you must first install and configure a TP4 stack.

Use the following property pages to configure an MTA transport stack:

General

Permissions

Connectors


  Configuration Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container

The Configuration container holds the objects for configuring services, components, connections, monitors, and recipients. The container holds the following objects: Add-Ins, Addressing, Connections, Directory Replication, Monitors, Servers, DS Site Configuration, Gateway, Information Store Site Configuration, MTA Site Configuration, Site Addressing, Site Encryption, and CA.

Use the following property pages to set up the Configuration container:

General

Permissions

Service Account Password


Folders Container


  Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container

The Folders container holds the public, private, and system folders configured for Microsoft Exchange Server.


  Public Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ Public Folders Container

The Public Folders container holds all public folders and public folder replicas configured for Microsoft Exchange Server.


Public Folder (Folders Container)
  Public Folder

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ Public Folders Container\ Public Folder

Public folders hold information that can be shared by various users. Public folders reside in the public information store on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer and can be copied, or replicated, to one or more additional Microsoft Exchange Server computers. When you make a change in a public folder, that change is replicated to every replica of the folder throughout the organization.

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  System Folders Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container

The System Folders container holds the Schedule+ Free/Busy information, the offline Address Book, and EForms registry folders for the Microsoft Exchange Server.


  EForms Registry Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ EForms Registry Container

The EForms Registry container holds all of the organization forms libraries that have been created in an organization. Organization forms libraries are public folders that store electronic forms.


  Organization Forms Library

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Organization Forms Library

An organization forms library is a public folder that stores forms. By default, forms saved to an organization forms library are available to all users. Therefore, users do not need special permissions to read messages composed with these forms, and they can use these forms to compose messages. Organization forms libraries can be replicated between sites in your organization, making the forms widely available.

Use the following property pages to configure an organization forms library:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  Offline Address Book Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Offline Address Book Container

The Offline Address Book container holds the offline Address Books configured for Microsoft Exchange Server. Offline Address Books contain lists of recipients that remote users can access to get information about other users in the organization.


  Offline Address Book

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Offline Address Book Container\ Offline Address Book

Remote users can use offline Address Books to get information about other users in the organization. Users can download the offline Address Book to their laptops or portable computers when they connect to Microsoft Outlook remotely. The offline Address Book can contain any list of recipients that you specify. You can create one offline Address Book per site. Using the Global Address List container as a basis for the offline Address Book ensures that remote users can send mail to any recipient in your organization.

Use the following property pages to configure an offline Address Book:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  Events Root

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Events Root

The Events Root contains folders with event configuration information for available Microsoft Exchange Server computers.


  EventConfig_SERVER

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ EventConfig_SERVER

The EventConfig_SERVER folders contain event configuration information for the specific Microsoft Exchange Server computers installed in your site.

Use the following property pages to configure an EventConfig_SERVER:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  Schedule+ Free Busy Container

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Container

The Schedule+ Free/Busy container holds one Schedule+ Free/Busy folder for each site. Microsoft Exchange Server creates one each time you configure a new site. Each time you create a new mailbox, an entry is created in the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder for the associated Windows NT account.


  Schedule+ Free Busy Information

Path:  Organization\ Folders Container\ System Folders Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Container\ Schedule+ Free Busy Information

The Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder is created automatically when you install Microsoft Exchange Server and configure the first site and server. The first time a user logs on to Schedule+, an entry is created in the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder for the associated mailbox. By default, each time the user changes the information in the schedule file, the Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folder is updated accordingly. Individual users can prevent the publication of free/busy information by using the Set Access Permissions dialog box in Schedule+.

Use the following property pages to configure Schedule+ Free/Busy Information public folders:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


  Extension

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Add-Ins Container\ Extension

To add property pages to a directory object, you install an extension DLL by adding and configuring an Administrator-Extension object in the directory. You assign a name to this extension by specifying an Extension-Name. For example, you can set it to match the service name. The Administrator program builds a Common-Name attribute for the extension from the Extension-Name attribute and the platform designation.

Use the following property pages to configure an extension:

General

Permissions


Directory Replication Container


  Directory Replication Container

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Directory Replication Container

The Directory Replication container holds the directory replication connectors configured for Microsoft Exchange Server. Directory replication connectors are bidirectional site connections that enable replication of directory changes from one site to other sites.

Use the following property pages to configure the Directory Replication container:

General

Permissions


  Directory Replication Connector

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Directory Replication Container\ Directory Replication Connector

To set up directory replication between sites, you must create and configure a directory replication connector, which is a bidirectional replication connection between two sites. You must designate and schedule one server in each site to request updated directory information from the other site. At the scheduled times, the local server requests directory updates from the remote server.

Use the following property pages to configure a directory replication connector:

General

Permissions

Schedule

Sites


  System Attendant

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Servers Container\ Server\ System Attendant

The system attendant generates e-mail addresses for new recipients and maintains message tracking log information. In addition, the system attendant monitors the connections of Microsoft Exchange Server computers.

Use the following property pages to configure the system attendant:

General

Permissions

E-mail Addresses


  DS Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ DS Site Configuration

DS site configuration allows you to set values for directory objects in your site. The directory objects include mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, custom recipients, and mailbox agents. This information is used by other components in Microsoft Exchange Server services and Microsoft Outlook.

You use directory information to set up an offline Address Book and establish custom attributes. You can also determine how long you want to save a tombstone (which indicates a deleted object) and how often you want to remove those tombstones.

Use the following property pages to configure a DS site:

General

Permissions

Offline Address Book Schedule

Offline Address Book

Custom Attributes

Attributes


  Information Store Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ InformationStore Site Configuration

All public folders on a server reside in the information store. Use information store site configuration to specify which users have the right to create top-level public folders, specify the timing of warning messages if space allotments for mailboxes or public folders are exceeded, or enable clients in your site to connect to public folders in other sites.

Use the following property pages to configure an information store site:

General

Permissions

Top Level Folder Creation

Storage Warnings

Public Folder Affinity


  MTA Site Configuration

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ MTA Site Configuration

The message transfer agent (MTA) provides the addressing and routing information for sending messages from one server to another. Use MTA site configuration to set values for all MTAs in your site. You can set the messaging defaults, enable message tracking, specify the recipient of undeliverable messages, and enter a display name for the site.

Use the following property pages to configure an MTA for a site:

General

Permissions

Messaging Defaults


  Site Addressing

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Site Addressing

Microsoft Exchange Server automatically generates site addresses for Lotus cc:Mail, MS Mail, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), and X.400 address types. These site addresses are based on the organization and site names you specified during installation and are used to create recipient addresses. Some organization and site names contain characters that are not valid for certain address types. Therefore, you may need to modify the site addresses.

Use the following property pages to modify site addresses:

General

Permissions

Site Addressing

Routing Calculation Schedule

Routing


  Global Address List

Path:  Organization\ Global Address List

The global address list contains all recipients in the organization, including mailboxes, distribution lists, public folders, and custom recipients.


Mailboxes

Use the following property pages to configure a mailbox:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Delivery Options

Protocols


Distribution Lists

Use the following property pages to configure a distribution list:

General

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Advanced


Public Folders

Use the following property pages to configure a public folder:

General

Replicas

Folder Replication Status

Replication Schedule

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Custom Attributes

Limits

Advanced


Custom Recipients

Use the following property pages to configure a custom recipient:

General

Organization

Phone/Notes

Permissions

Distribution Lists

E-Mail Addresses

Delivery Restrictions

Custom Attributes

Protocols

Advanced


Encryption
  Site Encryption

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ Site Encryption

The Site Encryption Configuration object appears when you install a Key Management (KM) server to enable advanced security for users in your organization.

Use the following property pages to configure advanced security for your organization:

General

Permissions

Algorithms


  CA

Path:  Organization\ Site\ Configuration Container\ CA

The certification authority (CA) object appears when you install a Key Management (KM) server to enable advanced security for users in your organization.

Use the following property pages to administer advanced security for your organization:

General

Permissions

Administrators

Passwords

Enrollment

Certificate Trust List


General POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Use site defaults for all properties

  Enable protocol

  Administrative note


Use site defaults for all properties

Assumes the Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) properties configured for the site where the server is located.


Permissions POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server
Authentication POP3 (Mail) Settings

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for a POP3 client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client’s vendor if you are unsure of which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most POP3 clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text)  using SSL	Uses SSL protocol to encrypt clear text on port 995.
Windows NT Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 and later.
Windows NT Challenge/Response  using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 995. This method is supported by Microsoft Outlook Express.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Message Format POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Use the settings in the Message Format property page to specify the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when they are retrieved by a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) client. These settings are based on the message format that the POP3 clients support when connecting to the server. The message content format and character set option can be configured for individual mailboxes, servers, and sites.

Note

Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead they are retrieved by the POP3 client in the format the message was composed in.

Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) clients such as Microsoft Outlook are capable of multilingual support, but they compose messages using Microsoft Windows code pages instead of Internet character sets. For most languages, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character set and the code page. If this is the case, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically assigns the correct character set that corresponds to the code page that the message was composed in. However, if multiple character sets exist for the same code page, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the character setting specified in the Character set box in the Message Format property page. If the character set is not appropriate for the code page, a default character set is used. For example, suppose a message is received that uses Japanese code page 932. That code page can be mapped to one of several character sets including JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC. If the Character set box is set to Shift-JIS, that character setting is used. However, if the Character set box is set to US-ASCII, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the default character set for that code page, which is JIS.

Messages that are received from the Internet already have a character set specified or will have one assigned to it when the message is received by the Internet Mail Service.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable. This is the default.
Provide message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as HTML is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message.
Provide message body as HTML	A MIME body part in HTML is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as plain text is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both HTML and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich text formatting such as bold, color, and italic to appear in messages.
UUENCODE	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the uuencode method, which is commonly used in the UNIX operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Use Binhex for Macintosh attachments	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the BinHex method, which is commonly used in the Macintosh operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Character set	Specifies the character set that is used when generating MIME and non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server.
Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format	Rich text in messages retains character formatting such as bold, color, and italic. If rich text format is enabled, messages that are retrieved by the POP3 client contain Microsoft Exchange Server rich text format information as attachments to the messages. POP3 clients, such as the Microsoft Internet Mail Provider, that understand rich text format use the information to display a rich text representation of the message.


Idle Time-out POP3 (Mail) Settings - Server

  Overview

Specify an idle time-out to close Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed. Type any value from 10 to 32767. The default is 10.


General POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Enable protocol

  Administrative note


Display Name

The protocol name that displays in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters and is not case-sensitive.


Directory Name

Defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Enable Protocol

Enable e-mail clients to access mailboxes using Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3).


Administrative note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this protocol. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.


Authentication POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the Authentication property page to specify the authentication method a Post Office Protcol version 3 (POP3) client uses to access information on the Microsoft Exchange Server computer. In order for a POP3 client to log on to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer, one of the authentication methods that the client supports must be enabled on the server. Check with your client’s vendor if you are unsure of which authentication methods are available.

Choose one or more options to set authentication.

Option	Description
Basic (Clear Text)	Enable authentication through an unencrypted user name and password. Most POP3 clients support this method.
Basic (Clear Text)  using SSL	Uses SSL protocol to encrypt clear text on port 995.
Windows NT Challenge/Response	Enable authentication through Windows NT network security and an encrypted password. This method is supported by Microsoft Internet Mail and News version 3.0 and later.
Windows NT Challenge/Response  using SSL	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through an SSL-encrypted channel on port 995. This method is supported by Microsoft Outlook Express.
MCIS Membership System	Enable authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the Microsoft Commercial Internet Server (MCIS) Membership System.
MCIS Membership System using SSL	Enables authentication using Windows NT network security to occur through the MCIS Membership System over an SSL connection.


Message Format POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Use the settings in the Message Format property page to specify the format that Microsoft Exchange Server messages are converted to when they are retrieved by a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) client. These settings are based on the message format that the POP3 clients support when connecting to the server. The message content format and character set option can be configured for individual mailboxes, servers, and sites.

Note

Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted. Instead they are retrieved by the POP3 client in the format the message was composed in.

Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) clients such as Microsoft Outlook are capable of multilingual support, but they compose messages using Microsoft Windows code pages instead of Internet character sets. For most languages, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character set and the code page. If this is the case, Microsoft Exchange Server automatically assigns the correct character set that corresponds to the code page that the message was composed in. However, if multiple character sets exist for the same code page, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the character setting specified in the Character set box in the Message Format property page. If the character set is not appropriate for the code page, a default character set is used. For example, suppose a message is received that uses Japanese code page 932. That code page can be mapped to one of several character sets including JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC. If the Character set box is set to Shift-JIS, that character setting is used. However, if the Character set box is set to US-ASCII, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the default character set for that code page, which is JIS.

Messages that are received from the Internet already have a character set specified or will have one assigned when the message is received by the Internet Mail Service.

Option	Description
MIME	Text and attachments are encoded using Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable. This is the default.
Provide message body as plain text	A plain text MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as HTML is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message.
Provide message body as HTML	A MIME body part in HTML is generated for the message. If Provide Message body as plain text is also selected, Microsoft Exchange Server provides both HTML and plain text in a MIME multipart alternative message. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich text formatting such as bold, color, and italic to appear in messages.
UUENCODE	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the UUENCODE method, which is commonly used in the UNIX operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Use Binhex for Macintosh attachments	Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the BinHex method, which is commonly used in the Macintosh operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.
Character set	Specifies the character set that is used when generating MIME and non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server.
Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format	Rich text in messages retains character formatting such as bold, color, and italic. If rich text format is enabled, messages that are retrieved by the POP3 client contain Microsoft Exchange Server rich text format information as attachments to the messages. POP3 clients, such as the Microsoft Internet Mail Provider, that understand rich text format use the information to display a rich text representation of the message.


Idle Time-out POP3 (Mail) Site Defaults

  Overview

Specify an idle time-out to close Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) connections after a specified interval of inactivity.

Option	Description
Do not close idle connections	Idle connections never close.
Close idle connections	Idle connections close after the time period specified in the Time-out (minutes) box.
Time-out (minutes)	The amount of time in minutes a connection can remain idle before being closed. Type any value from 10 to 32767. The default is 10.


Permissions (Protocols) Site

You can set permissions to control user access to all objects in the Protocols container. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or a group has. Microsoft Exchange Server provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

If you have configured the Administrator program to display the Permissions property page for all objects, you can set permissions on each protocol object in the site and server Protocols containers.

  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


General (Protocols) Site

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Administrative note

  Outlook Web Access Server Name


Accept/reject specified connections

Select to specify the IP address from which to accept or reject connections.


Move Down

Moves the selected address rule down the list.

Because rules are processed in order from first to last, the most specific rules should be at the top of the list, and the most general rules should be at the bottom.


Move Up

Moves the selected address rule up the list.

Use the Connections property page to move a rule up or down in the list. Because rules are processed in order from first to last, the most specific rules should be at the top of the list and the most general rules should be at the bottom.


Remove

Removes the selected rule from the list.


Edit

Displays the Connection Properties dialog box. Use Connection Properties to edit an existing rule to accept or reject connections by IP address and mask.


New

Displays the Connection Properties dialog box. Use Connection Properties to add a new rule that accepts or rejects connections by IP address and mask.


Accept all connections

Select to accept all connections regardless of the IP address. The default is to accept all connections.


Connections (Protocols) Site

You can accept or reject POP3, NNTP, and LDAP access based on the client's Internet protocol (IP) address. For example, if you don't want a client to access information on your server, you can configure Microsoft Exchange Server to reject connections from that client.

Note

Settings in the Connections property page do not apply to HTTP. You can restrict HTTP connections by configuring settings available in the Advanced property page in the Internet Information Server Internet Service Manager.

  Accept all connections

  Accept/reject specified connections

  New

  Edit

  Remove

  Move Up

  Move Down


MIME Types (Protocols) Site

Microsoft Exchange Server can assign appropriate file extensions for inbound attachments provided the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content type and corresponding file extensions are defined in the MIME Types property page. For example, you can specify that all attachments with a content type of text/html are automatically given an .html extension. For outbound attachments, a MIME type is used for the file extensions listed in the MIME Types property page.

  MIME Content Type

  Associated Extension

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up and Move Down Buttons


Remove Button

Removes the selected content type and its associated extension from the list.


Edit Button

Displays the MIME Type Properties dialog box. Use the dialog box to change the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content type and associated extension.


New Button

Displays the MIME Type Properties dialog box. Use the dialog box to add a new Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content type and its associated extension.


Associated Extension

Lists the extensions associated with the file types.


MIME Content Type

Lists MIME content types.

In MIME there are primary types, which describe the general content of a message, and subtypes, which describe the specific format of the file. The two types are separated by a forward slash, such as text/plain.


Move Up and Move Down Buttons

Use the MIME Types property page to specify the order of the MIME content type in the list. The order of content types is important if the same content type maps to multiple extensions. For example, an item with a .doc extension can be mapped to application/msword, application/binary, or text/plain. By specifying the order that content types are processed, you can ensure that the .doc item is mapped to the correct content type. Content types are processed in order from first to last.


MIME Type Properties

Use the MIME Type Properties dialog box to add or change Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content types and associated extensions.


Permissions (Protocols) Server

You can set permissions to control user access to all objects in the Protocols container. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has. Microsoft Exchange Server provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

If you have configured the Administrator program to display the Permissions property page for all objects, you can set permissions on each protocol object in the site and server Protocols containers.

  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under the site object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this site and all objects below it.
Delete	Delete objects within this site.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for objects within this site.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


General (Protocols) Server

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Administrative note

  Use site values


Use site values

Assumes the properties configured for the site where the server is located.


Display Name

The container display name that appears in the Administrator window. It can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive.


Directory Name

Defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Administrative note

You can enter any information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to this object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Outlook Web Access Server name

Enter the name of the server on which Outlook Web Access is installed.


Connections (Protocols) Server

You can accept or reject POP3, NNTP, and LDAP access based on the client's Internet protocol (IP) address. For example, if you don't want a client to access information on your server, you can configure Microsoft Exchange Server to reject connections from that client.

Note

Settings in the Connections property page do not apply to HTTP. You can restrict HTTP connections by configuring settings available in the Advanced property page in the Internet Information Server Internet Service Manager.

  Accept all connections

  Accept/reject specified connections

  New

  Edit

  Remove

  Move Up

  Move Down


Mime Types (Protocols) Server

Microsoft Exchange Server can assign appropriate file extensions for inbound attachments provided the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content type and corresponding file extensions are defined in the MIME Types property page. For example, you can specify that all attachments with a content type of text/html are automatically given an .html extension. For outbound attachments, a MIME type is used for the file extensions listed in the MIME Types property page.

  MIME Content Type

  Associated Extension

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button

  Move Up and Move Down Buttons


Protocol Details (HTTP)

Use the Protocol Details dialog box to enable or disable HTTP-based clients for this recipient.

  Enable HTTP for this recipient


Enable HTTP for this recipient

Select to enable HTTP-based clients for this recipient.


Protocol Details (IMAP4)

Use the Protocol Details dialog box to enable or disable the protocol for the recipient. You can use either the protocol default settings or the alternate settings.

  Enable IMAP4 for this recipient

  Use protocol defaults

  User acts as a delegate

  Provide message body as plain text

  Provide message body as HTML

  Default character set


Enable IMAP4 for this recipient

Select to enable IMAP4-based clients for this recipient.


Use protocol defaults

Configures IMAP4 settings on a recipient to use the message format defaults that you set at the server level.


User acts as a delegate

Enables an IMAP4 delegate user to access another user's mailbox to view personal folders.


Protocol Details (NNTP)

Use the Protocol Details dialog box to enable or disable the protocol for the recipient. You can use either the protocol default settings or the alternate settings.

  Enable NNTP for this recipient

  Use protocol defaults

  MIME

  Provide message body as plain text

  Provide message body as HTML

  UUENCODE

  Use Binhex for Macintosh


Enable NNTP for this recipient

Select to enable NNTP-based clients for this recipient.


Use protocol defaults

Configures NNTP settings on a recipient to use the message format defaults that you set at the server level.


Protocol Details (POP3)

Use the Protocol Details dialog box to enable or disable the protocol for the recipient. You can use either the protocol default settings or the alternate settings.

  Enable POP3 for this recipient

  Use protocol defaults

  MIME

  Provide message body as plain text

  Provide message body as HTML

  UUENCODE

  Use Binhex for Macintosh

  Default character set

  Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format


Enable POP3 for this recipient

Select to enable POP3-based clients for this recipient.


Use protocol defaults

Configures POP3 settings on a recipient to use the message format defaults that you set at the server level.


Use Microsoft Exchange rich-text format

Enables rich-text formatting for POP3 clients.


Provide message body as plain text

A plain text MIME body part will be generated for the message. If Provide message body as HTML is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative plain text MIME body part is generated.


Provide message body as HTML

An HTML MIME body part is generated for the message. If Provide message body as plain text is also selected, a MIME multipart alternative HTML MIME body part is generated. HTML is an Internet standard that enables rich-text formatting, such as bold, color, and italic, to appear in messages.


Default character set

Specifies the character set that is used when generating MIME and non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server. The default character set varies according to the language installed on the server. There are many possible character sets available for Microsoft Exchange Server.


MIME

Text and attachments are encoded using MIME. MIME is the standard for exchanging multimedia messages on the Internet. If a MIME message is delivered to a non-MIME-aware client, the text and attachments may not be usable. This is the default.


UUENCODE

Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the uuencode method, which is commonly used in the UNIX operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.


Use Binhex for Macintosh

Renders the message body as text with any attachments encoded by the BinHex method, which is commonly used in the Macintosh operating system to encode 8-bit data transmitted on the Internet.


Connections Properties
Connection Properties

Use the Connection Properties dialog box to create or edit a rule that accepts or rejects connections by IP address and mask. A mask (also called a subnet mask) is a value used with an IP address that identifies the network location of the client computer. The IP addresses of hosts connecting to the server are matched against the rules, and the connections are accepted or denied accordingly. If no rule exists that matches an IP address, the connection is accepted by default.

Options	Description
Accept connection	Select to accept this new IP address connection.
Reject connection	Select to reject this new IP address connection.
IP Address	The Internet protocol address of the SMTP host that is accepted or rejected.
Mask	Identifies the network location of the client computer.
Note

To specify a range of IP addresses, use the IP address and subnet mask. For example, specifying an IP address, such as 11.103.41.0, and a subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0, restricts the range to all IP addresses that start with 11.103.41. To specify an individual IP address, use the IP address and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255. For example, if you specify an IP address of 11.103.41.20 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255, the address is restricted to 11.103.41.20.


Your Guide to Microsoft Technical Support

You can find late-breaking updates and technical information in the Readme file provided with your product disks or compact disc.

If you still have a question, Microsoft offers technical support and services ranging from self-help tools to direct assistance with a Microsoft technical engineer.

Note

The services and prices listed here are available in the United States and Canada only. Support services may vary outside the U.S. and Canada. For more information about support in other locations, contact your local Microsoft subsidiary.

Microsoft support services are subject to Microsoft’s then-current prices, terms, and conditions, which are subject to change without notice.

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

Outside the U.S. and Canada, contact the local Microsoft subsidiary office in your area. For a list of worldwide Microsoft subsidiaries, see:

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Choose the Support Option That's Right for You

Here are the options you can choose from:

Self Help Tools

  Self-Help Tools Online

Direct Assistance from a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

  Direct Assistance from a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

Other Microsoft Services

Includes information about customer service and text telephone numbers for the deaf. For more information, see:

  Other Microsoft Services

Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide

For information about obtaining Microsoft technical support from Microsoft worldwide subsidiaries outside the U.S. and Canada, see:

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Self-Help Tools

Microsoft Technical Support Online at http://www.microsoft.com/support/

This site uses the cutting-edge technology of Microsoft to help you access the most relevant technical information and resources to answer your support questions. Online support helps you find the answers you need quickly and easily through the following features:

Troubleshooting Wizards: Microsoft Technical Support Online has built-in diagnostic technology to help you easily pinpoint problems and identify solutions. Just ask for help on a specific problem, and a troubleshooting wizard will walk you through, step by step, until your question is resolved.

Product-Specific Support Home Pages: These pages pull together the top technical articles, the most frequently asked questions, downloadable files, and more for your specific product. If you need an answer in a hurry, make sure to stop here first.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): FAQs are questions about Microsoft products that our engineers have identified as those customers ask most often. As with the Product-Specific Support Home Pages, FAQs include only the most critical, up-to-date questions and answers about your products to help you find solutions quickly. FAQs are updated continually.

Knowledge Base: Here you'll find a collection of more than 75,000 detailed articles—updated daily—with technical information about products, bug and fix lists, and answers to commonly asked technical questions. The Knowledge Base also provides descriptions of product issues and workarounds, optimization tips, and compatibility issues for every product. A step-by-step process helps you build a query to search the database, making it easy for you to look for information on the product or technology of your choice.

Help Files, Service Packs, and More: Keep your system current with access to thousands of files from our software library, all available for downloading. Our library includes free software add-ons (connect charges may apply), bug fixes, peripheral drivers, software updates, sample code, patches, application notes, sample files, and programming aids.

Support Site Tour: The Support Site Tour uses a support wizard to help you quickly obtain the information most relevant to your product and technical support needs.

To use the Support Site Tour, follow this procedure:

1.  In the Microsoft Technical Support home page (http://www.microsoft.com/support/), select a product, and then choose GO.

2.  Select a product.

3.  Choose Support Site Tour.

4.  Select an option to find a technical article, troubleshoot a problem, download files, or learn more about Microsoft support options.

5.  Select the appropriate options.

Newsgroups: This peer-to-peer communication forum links you to a worldwide community of other Microsoft customers and technical experts, including Microsoft's Most Valuable Professionals. Newsgroups offer a unique way to help you find answers, tips, and tricks by putting you in touch with other Microsoft product users who have similar interests.

Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Other Self-Help Tools

  Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

 Additional Assistance from Microsoft Support Partners

  Other Microsoft Services

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Self-Help Tools Other
Other Self-Help Tools

In addition to Internet resources, Microsoft Technical Support provides the following technical resources:

Microsoft TechNet: If you are an information technology (IT) or Help desk professional responsible for administering your corporate network or supporting end users, you can meet your organization's requirements with TechNet. TechNet is a comprehensive resource for evaluating, implementing, and supporting Microsoft business products. Every month, TechNet delivers two compact discs packed with more than 150,000 pages of the critical information you need to smoothly deploy mission-critical systems and minimize downtime—all while building your technical expertise. To subscribe, see your local authorized retailer, or call (800) 344-2121, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, 6:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M. Pacific time.

Microsoft Developer Network Library (MSDN): If you develop applications for the Internet or the Windows operating system, or use Microsoft products for any other development purposes, you'll enhance your productivity with an MSDN subscription. MSDN is the official Microsoft source for technical programming information, SDKs, DDKs, Windows, BackOffice, Microsoft Office, and Visual Tools for developers. For more information about MSDN subscription levels and benefits, visit MSDN online at: http://www.microsoft.com/msdn/. Or call (800) 759-5474, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, 6:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M. Pacific time.

Microsoft Download Service (MSDL): This service provides direct modem access to Microsoft’s electronic technical library, which contains sample programs, device drivers, patches, software updates, and programming aids. The service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. In the U.S., dial (425) 936-6735. Connect information: 1200, 2400, 9600, or 14400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. In Canada, dial (905) 507-3022. Connect information: 1200 to 28800 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit.

Microsoft FastTips: FastTips is an automated toll-free telephone service that enables you to obtain quick answers to common technical questions, as well as technical articles by telephone, fax, or mail. To access FastTips or to receive a catalog of the articles available, call one of the following numbers on a touch-tone telephone:

Division	Telephone Number
Desktop Applications	(800) 936-4100
Desktop Systems	(800) 936-4200
Development Tools	(800) 936-4300
Business Systems	(800) 936-4400
You can use the following keys on your touch-tone telephone after you reach FastTips.

To do this:	Press this key:
Advance to the next message	*
Repeat the current message	7
Return to the beginning of FastTips	#
Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Self-Help Tools:  Microsoft Technical Support Online

  Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

 Additional Assistance from Microsoft Support Partners

  Other Microsoft Services

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

Pay-Per-Incident Support

If you still need answers to your technical questions, you can purchase Pay-Per-Incident Support.

In the U.S. and Canada, for a cost of $195US per incident, call (800) 936-5800, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including holidays. You can also submit your support questions over the Internet by using Web Response. For more information, visit Microsoft Technical Support Online at http://www.microsoft.com/support/.

Note

Support fees for the (800)# calls will be billed to your VISA, MasterCard, or American Express credit card.

Priority Annual Comprehensive Support

If you anticipate a higher volume of support incidents, or need priority access to Microsoft Technical Support engineers, you can purchase a Priority Annual Comprehensive Account as follows:

For more information or to purchase an annual account at a cost of $1,695US per 10 incidents, in the U.S. and Canada, call (800) 936-3500, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including holidays.

To submit an incident against an existing account, in the U.S. and Canada, call (800) 936-4900, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including holidays. You can also submit your support question over the Internet by using Web Response. For more information, visit Microsoft Technical Support Online at http://www.microsoft.com/support/.

Priority Plus

Microsoft Technical Support also offers special accounts for medium-sized businesses that require priority incident resolution, including business-critical support and access to targeted information to assist IT and Help desk professionals in support planning for smoother product deployment. For more information, in the U.S. and Canada, call (800) 936-3500, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including holidays.

Premier Support

Premier Support offers the highest level of mission-critical support for large enterprise customers who require a direct, proactive service and support relationship with Microsoft. As a Premier customer, you receive proactive, personalized support services and fast, expert resolution of specific technical issues for all Microsoft products, anytime, day or night. Premier Support is designed to help you successfully develop, deploy, and manage critical business systems built around high-quality Microsoft solutions. This highest level of mission-critical support, combined with a close relationship with your own designated technical team, will help large enterprise businesses streamline the entire support cycle. For more information or to purchase Premier Support, call (800) 936-3200, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, 5:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. Pacific time.

Consult Line

Take advantage of our Consult Line to receive hourly consulting for support questions that fall outside of the traditional technical support realm. These include designing or planning for deployment, software development, code review, and implementation planning. The Consult Line covers all Microsoft products, including those used for developing Internet and intranet solutions. For more information or to purchase hourly consulting services at $195US per hour (minimum one hour), call (800) 936-5200, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Pacific time.

Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Self-Help Tools: Microsoft Technical Support Online

  Other Self-Help Tools

  Other Microsoft Services

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Additional Assistance from Microsoft Support Partners

As Microsoft products are integrated into multivendor environments, our customers' technical support needs extend beyond Microsoft products to include hardware, networking, and software products from other vendors. For these and other specialized support requirements, Microsoft offers a variety of programs that provide comprehensive worldwide service and support. In fact, you may already have an established relationship with an experienced Microsoft support provider. If not, consider these resources.

Authorized Support Centers

Microsoft has teamed up with a select group of industry-leading support providers called Microsoft Authorized Support Centers (ASCs). These independent companies meet Microsoft's strict quality standards for support. They also have extensive Microsoft product knowledge, as well as expertise in supporting hardware, software, and networking products from other vendors. ASCs offer a wide range of services, from setting up a help desk to delivering mission-critical support for all phases of planning, implementing, and maintaining a client/server system. ASCs serve as virtual extension of the Microsoft Technical Support organization. They can bring to your company an entire new set of unique and invaluable capabilities to ensure a cohesive, high-performance business solution. For more information, contact your Microsoft account representative, or visit http://www.microsoft.com/servad/asc/.

Microsoft Solution Providers

Microsoft creates the technology, while Microsoft Solution Providers (MSPs) develop the solutions for customers worldwide. From small organizations to companies of 1,000 or more employees, MSPs use Microsoft products as the building blocks to offer such value-added services as integration, consulting, software customization, application development, and technical training and support. MSPs have Microsoft Certified Professionals on staff who often specialize in an industry or a specific solution and can offer expert, comprehensive support. And in most cases, they can bring their expertise on site, offering you all the benefits of a local support presence. For more information or for a referral, call (800) 765-7768, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, 6:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M. Pacific time. Or visit http://www.microsoft.com/msp/.

Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Self-Help Tools: Microsoft Technical Support Online

  Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

  Other Microsoft Services

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Other Microsoft Services

Text telephone

Microsoft text telephone (TTD/TTY) services are available for the deaf or hard-of-hearing. In the U.S., using a TTD/TTY modem, dial (425) 635-4948, 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, using a TTD/TTY modem, dial (905) 568-9641, 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. Eastern time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

Microsoft Customer Service

For customer service issues on Microsoft products, upgrades, and services, contact the Microsoft Sales Information Center. In the U.S., call (800) 426-9400. In Canada, call (800) 563-9048.

Note

Technical support is not available at these numbers.

Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Self-Help Tools: Microsoft Technical Support Online

  Other Self-Help Tools

  Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

 Additional Assistance from Microsoft Support Partners

  Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide


Microsoft Technical Support Worldwide

If you are outside the U.S. and have a question about a Microsoft product, first:

Review the information in this Help file or product manual.

Review the Readme files provided with your product disks. These files provide general information that became available shortly before the product was released.

Visit Microsoft Technical Support Online at http://www.microsoft.com/support/.

If you cannot find a solution, you can receive information about obtaining product support by contacting the Microsoft subsidiary office in your area.

Contacting a Microsoft Subsidiary Office

When you call your local Microsoft subsidiary, you should be at your computer and have the appropriate product documentation at hand. Be prepared to provide the following information:

The version of the Microsoft product you use.

The type of hardware you use, including network hardware, if applicable.

The operating system you use.

The exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen.

A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.

A description of how you tried to solve the problem.

Microsoft subsidiary offices and the countries they serve are listed below.

Important

Phone numbers for Microsoft subsidiaries are subject to change. For the most recent phone number listing, see the Microsoft Technical Support phone number listings at http://www.microsoft.com/support/. If there is no Microsoft subsidiary office in your country, contact the establishment from which you obtained your Microsoft product.

Microsoft Worldwide Subsidiaries

Argentina
Microsoft de Argentina S.A.
Customer Service: (54) (1) 819-1900
Fax: (54) (1) 819-1921
Technical Support:
(Consumer, POS, and DAD): (54) (1) 314-0560
(BSD and DD, only for installation): (54) (1) 819-1900

Australia
Microsoft Pty. Ltd.
Fax: (61) (02) 9805-1108
Sales Information Centre: (61) (02) 9870-2100
Internet://www.microsoft.com.au/
Technical Support: (61) (02) 9870-2131

Austria
Microsoft Ges.m.b.H.
Phone: (+43) 1 610 64 -0
Fax: (+43) 1 610 64 -200
Information: 0660-6520
Prices, updates, etc.: 0660-6520
CompuServe: GO MSEURO (Microsoft Central Europe)
Standard Support: Installation and Handling
Windows 95: 0660-6510
Microsoft Excel for Windows: 0660-6511
Microsoft Access: 0660-6761
TechNet, Developer Network, Bookshelf: 0660-6506
General information about Support Network in Central Europe:
Fax: 0049/2622/167006

Belgium
Microsoft NV
Phone: +32-2-730 39 11
Fax: +32-2-726 96 09
Microsoft Information Center: +32-2-481 52 52
CompuServe: 02-2150530 (GO MSBEN)
Bulletin Board: +32-2-726 85 45 (14400/1200/2400/9600 bd, 8N1, ANSI)
Technical Support:
+32-2-513 32 74 (Dutch speaking)
+32-2-502 34 32 (English speaking)
+32-2-513 22 68 (French speaking)

Bolivia
See Argentina

Brazil
Microsoft Informatica Ltda.
Phone: (55) (11) 5514–7100
Fax: (55) (11) 5514-7106/5514-7107
Technical Support:
Phone: (55) (11) 5506-8087
Fax: (55) (11) 5506-8506
Technical Support Bulletin Board Service: (55) (11) 5506-1234
Customer Support: (55) (11) 822-5764

Canada
Microsoft Canada Inc.
Head Office Phone: 1 (905) 568-0434
Customer Support Centre: 1 (800) 563-9048
Technical Support:
Desktop Systems including Microsoft Windows 95: 1 (905) 568-4494
Microsoft Office and Office Components: 1 (905) 568-2294
Other Standard Technical Support: 1 (905) 568-3503
Priority Support Information: 1 (800) 668-7975
Text Telephone (TT/TDD): 1 (905) 568-9641
Technical Support Bulletin Board Service: 1 (905) 507-3022

Caribbean
Microsoft Caribbean, Inc.
Phone: (809) 273-3600
Fax: (809) 273-3636
Technical Support: (214) 714-9100

Central America
See Latin America

Chile
Microsoft Chile S.A.
Phone: 56-2-330-6000
Fax: 56-2-330-6190
Customer Service: 56-2-800-213121
Personal Operating System and Applications:
Phone: 56-2-330-6222
Fax: 56-2-341-1439

China
Microsoft (China) Co. Ltd
4/F Kai Yuen Commercial Building
No.28 Zhichunli, Hai Dian District
Beijing 100086, PRC
Phone: 011-86-10-6261-7711
Fax: 011-86-10-6253-6630

Colombia
Microsoft Colombia
Phone: (571) 618 2245
Fax: (571) 618 2269
Technical Support: (571) 618 2255

Czech Republic
Microsoft s.r.o.
Phone: (+42) (2) 611 97 111
Fax: (+42) (2) 611 97 100
Technical Support:
(+42) (2) 2150 3222 or 53 52 56 (Windows 95 only)

Denmark
Microsoft Denmark
Phone: (45) 44 89 01 00
Fax: (45) 44 68 55 10
Technical Support:
Phone: (45) 44 89 01 11
Microsoft Sales Support: (45) 44 89 01 90
Microsoft FastTips: (45) 44 89 01 44
(Document 303030 in FastTips contains detailed instructions)
Microsoft MSDL (BBS): (45) 44 66 90 46

Dominican Republic

See Central America

Dubai
Microsoft Middle East
Phone: (971) 4 513 888
Fax: (971) 4 527 444
Technical Support:
Personal Operating Systems & Desktop Applications ONLY:
Phone: (971) 4 524 488
Fax: (971) 4 524 495
email: mts@emirates.net.ae
Priority Support Information: (971) 4 555 752

Customer Service Center:
(Version upgrade / TechNet and MSDN subscription)
Phone: (971) 4 655 082
Fax: (971) 4 655 097

Ecuador
Corporation Microsoft del Ecuador S.A.
Phone: (593) 2 460-447, (593) (2) 460-451
Customer Service: (593) (2) 460-453, (593) (2) 460-458
Technical Support: (593) (2) 463-094

Egypt
Microsoft Egypt
Phone: +202-418-6101
Fax: +202-4174766
Technical Support:
Personal Operating Systems and Desktop Applications ONLY:
Phone: (202) 261 3991 / 6
Fax: (971) 403 2718

England
See United Kingdom

Finland
Microsoft OY
Phone: +358-(0)9-525 501
Fax: +358-(0)9-878 8770
Technical Support:
Phone: +358-(0)9-525 502 500
Sales Support: +358-(0)9-525 5026
Microsoft MSDL: +358-(0)9-878 77 99 (Information in Swedish and English)
Microsoft FastTips: +358-(0)9-525 502 550 (Information in Swedish and English)

France
Microsoft France
Phone: (33) (1) 69-86-46-46
Fax: (33) (1) 64-46-06-60
Telex: MSPARIS 604322
Technical Support Phone: (33) (1) 59-85-96-33 (Province)/33 3 49 49 49 57(2)
Technical Support Fax: (33) (1) 69-28-00-28
Fax Information Service: (33) (1) 36-70-13-13

French Polynesia
See France

Germany
Microsoft GmbH
Phone: 089/3176-0
Fax: 089/3176-1000
Telex: (17) 89/83 28 MS GMBH D
Information: 089/3176 1199
Prices, updates, etc.: 089/3176 1199
CompuServe: GO MSEURO (Microsoft Central Europe)
Bulletin board, device drivers, tech notes:
        Btx: *microsoft# or *610808000#
Standard Support: Installation and Handling: 01805/67 22 55
General information about Microsoft support in Central Europe:
Fax: 02622/167006

Greece
Microsoft Hellas, S.A.
Phone: (30)(1) 6806-775 through (30)(1) 6806-779
Fax: (30)(1) 6806-780
Microsoft Hellas Technical Support
Phone: (30) (1) 9247-030
Fax: (30) (1) 9215-363

Hong Kong
Microsoft Hong Kong Limited
Fax: (852)2560-2217
Product support Faxback Service: (852)2535-9293
Microsoft Club Hotline: (852)2804-4277
Technical Support: (852)2804-4222

Hungary
Microsoft Hungary
Phone: +36 (1) 327-2800
Fax: +36 (1) 327-2899
Technical Support: +36 (1) 267-4636 (2MSINFO)

Iceland
See Denmark

Ireland
See United Kingdom

India
Microsoft India
Phone: (011) (91) (80) 509-2678, (011) (91) (11) 646-0767, 646-0813
Fax: (011) (91) (80) 509-2601, (011) (91) (11) 647- 4714

Indonesia (SP)
Microsoft Indonesia - Jakarta
Technical Support
Phone: 62 21 5721060
Fax: 62 21 5732077

Israel
Microsoft Israel Ltd.
Phone: 972-3-613-0833
Fax: 972-3-613-0834

Italy
Microsoft SpA
Phone: (39) (2) 7039-21
Fax: (39) (2) 7039-2020
Microsoft Rome Office: (39) (6) 5095-01 - Fax: (39) (6) 5095-0600
Microsoft by Fax (Fax-on-demand service):
(39) (2) 70-398-888
Customer Service (New product info, product literature):
(39) (2) 70-398-398
Dealer Support (Customer Service for resellers only):
(39) (2) 70-398-388
Technical Support: (39) (2) 70-398-398
Microsoft Consulting Service: (39) (2) 7039-21

Japan
Microsoft Company Ltd.
Technical Support (Standard Support): (81) (424) 41-8700
(Technical Support options/Support Contract)
Phone: 0120-37-0196 (toll free domestic only)
Channel Marketing Information Center:
(Presales Product Support)
Tokyo Phone: (81) (3) 5454-2300
Osaka Phone: (81) (6) 245-6995
Customer Service Phone :
(Version upgrade/Registration)
Phone: (81) (48) 226-5500
Fax: (81) (48) 226-5511

Korea
Microsoft CH
Phone: (82) (2) 531-4500
Fax: (82) (2) 531-1724
Customer Service: 080-022-7337 (toll free domestic only)
Technical Support
Office Technical Support: (82) (2) 508-0040
Windows Technical Support: (82) (2) 563-0054
Developer Technical Support: (82) (2) 566-0071
Microsoft FastTips: (82) (2) 3453-7555
Support Sales: (82) (2) 531-4544

Latin America
Microsoft
Latin American Headquarters (U.S.A.)
Phone: (305) 489-4800
Fax: (305) 491-1616
Customer Service: (425) 936-8661
Technical Support: (214) 714-9100

Liechtenstein
See Switzerland (German speaking)

Luxembourg
Microsoft NV
Phone: +32-2-730 39 11
Microsoft Information Center: +32-2-481 52 52
CompuServe: +32-2-215 05 30 (GO MSBEN)
Bulletin Board: +32-2-726 85 45
(1200/2400/9600/14400 bd, 8N1, ANSI)
Technical Support:
+32-2-513 32 74 (Dutch speaking)
+32-2-502 34 32 (English speaking)
+32-2-513 22 68 (French speaking)

Malaysia (SP)
Microsoft (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd:
Phone: (60-3) 793-9595
Fax: (60-3) 791-6080

México
Microsoft México, S.A. de C.V.
Technical Support:
(Applications and Operating Systems)
(52)(5) 325-0912
Customer Service: (52)(5) 325-0911
Fast Tips: (52)(5) 237-4894
(24 hours x 365 days service)
Bulletin Board Service:
(52)(5) 628-6200
(2400s/14400k baud, 8 bits, No parity, 1 stop bit, ANSI
terminal emulation)
(52)(5) 628-6202
(14400k baud, 8 bits, No parity, 1 stop bit, ANSI terminal emulation)
User: MSMEXICO, NO Password

Morocco
Microsoft Afrique Du Nord
Phone: (212) 2 47 10 72
Fax: (212) 2 47 10 86

Netherlands
Microsoft BV
Phone: 023-5689189
Customer Service: 023-5677700
CompuServe: 020-6880085 (GO MSBEN)
Bulletin Board: 023-5634221
(1200/2400/9600/14400bd, 8N1, ANSI)
Technical Support:
023-5677877 (Dutch speaking)
023-5677853 (English speaking)

New Zealand
Microsoft New Zealand Ltd
Phone: 64 (9) 357-5800
Fax: 64 (9) 358-3726
Technical Support:
Phone: 64 (9) 357-5575
Fax: 64 (9) 307-0516 and 357-5577

Northern Ireland
See United Kingdom

Norway
Microsoft Norway AS
Phone: +(47) 22 02 25 00
Fax: +(47) 22 95 06 64
Technical Support: +(47) 22 02 25 50
Microsoft Sales Support: +(47) 22 02 25 80
Microsoft MSDL: +(47) 22 18 22 09
Microsoft FastTips: +(47) 22 02 25 70
(Document 404040 in FastTips contains detailed instructions)

Papua New Guinea
See Australia

Paraguay
See Argentina

Peru
See Latin America

Philippines (SP)
Microsoft Philippines
Phone: 632 811 0062
Technical Support:
Phone: 632 892 2295/2495
Fax: 632 813 2493

Poland
Microsoft Sp. z o.o.
Phone: (+48) (22) 661-5433
Fax: (+48) (22) 6615434
Information Service: (+48) (22) 6286924
Technical Support:
(+48) (22) 6216793 or (+48) (71) 441357

Portugal
Microsoft Portugal MSFT, Lda.
Phone: (351) 1 4409200
Fax: (351) 1 4412101
Technical Support:
Standard Support (All Clusters):
(351) 1 4409280/1/2/3
Fax: (351) 1 4411655

Republic of Ireland
See United Kingdom

Russia
Microsoft A/O
Fax: (+7) (502) 224 50 45

Scotland
See United Kingdom

Saudi Arabia
Microsoft Saudi Arabia
Phone: +966-1-488-1165
Fax: +966-1-488-1576
Technical Support (Personal Operating System and Desktop Applications only):
Phone: 800 124 0500
(toll free within Saudi Arabia)
Fax: 966-1-4740576

Singapore
Microsoft Singapore Pte Ltd
Phone: (65) 337-6088
Fax: (65) 337-6788
Customer Services:
Phone: (65) 433-5488
Fax: (65) 339-9958
Product Support Services:
Phone: (65) 337-9946
Fax: (65) 337-6700

Slovenia/Slovenija
Microsoft d.o.o. (see Germany also)
Phone: +386 61 1881 133
Fax: +386 61 1881 137
Technical Support:
+386 61 123 23 54 or +386 64 331 020

Slovak Republic
Microsoft Slovakia s.r.o.
Phone (+42) (7) 37 63 02
Fax: (+42) (7) 37 66 71
Technical Support: (+42) (7) 31 20 83

South Africa
Microsoft South Africa
Phone: (27) 11 445 0000
Fax: (27) 11 445 0046
Technical Support:
Toll Free: 0 802 11 11 04
Toll: (27) 11 445 0000
Fax: (+27) 11 445-0343

South East Africa and Indian Ocean Islands
See South Africa

Spain
Microsoft Iberica SRL
Phone: (34) 1-807-9999
Fax: (34) 1-803-8310
Technical Support: (34) 1-807-9960
Customer Service: (34) 1-804-0096
Fax Back telephone: (34) 1-804-0096

Sweden
Microsoft AB
Phone: +46-(0)8-752 56 00
Fax: +46-(0)8-750 51 58
Technical Support: +46-(0)8- 752 09 29
Sales Support: +46-(0)8- 752 56 30
Microsoft MSDL: +46-(0)8-750 47 42
Microsoft FastTips: +46-(0)8-752 29 00
(Document 202020 in FastTips contains detailed instructions)

Switzerland
Microsoft AG
Phone: 01-839 61 11
Fax: 01-831 08 69
Prices, updates, etc.: 01/839 61 11
CompuServe: GO MSEURO(Microsoft Central Europe)
Documentation:
Phone: 155 59 00
Fax: 064-224294, Microsoft Info-Service, Postfach, 8099 Zürich
Standard Technical Support: Installation and Handling:
0848 80 - 2255
Technical support (French speaking): 022-738 96 88
General information about Microsoft Support in Central Europe:
Fax: 0049/2622/167006

Taiwan Region
Microsoft Taiwan Corp.
Phone: (886) (2) 504-3122
Fax: (886) (2) 504-3121
Technical Support: (886) (2) 508-9501

Thailand
Microsoft (Thailand) Limited
Phone: (662) 266-3300
Fax: (662) 266-3310
Product Support:
Phone: (662) 613-7208 through 11
Fax: (662) 613-7198

Turkey
Microsoft Turkey
Phone: 90 (212) 258 59 98
Fax: 90 (212) 258 59 54
Support Hotline:
Phone: 90 (212) 258 96 66
Fax: 90 (212) 258 95 99
Bulletin Board Service: 90 (212) 227 93 90

United Kingdom
Microsoft Limited
Fax: (0870) 60 20 100
Phone: (0870) 60 10 100
Microsoft KeyData:
(Bulletin Board Service)
 (0870) 50 30 200 (up to 28.8Kbaud, n, 8, 1)
Microsoft KeyFax:
(Faxback Information Service)
(0870) 50 30 100
Telephone Support:
Consumer, Desktop Apps &
Personal Operating Systems: (0870) 50 10 100
Minicom Line (0870) 50 30 400
Pre-Sales Information: Microsoft Connection
(0345) 00 2000

Uruguay
Soporte Técnico: (598) (2) 77-4934

Venezuela
Corporation MS 90 de Venezuela S.A.
Other information: (582)265-2250
Fax: (582)265-0863 / (582)265-2611
Technical Support: (582)264-1933

Wales
See United Kingdom

Additional Information

  Choose the Support Option That’s Right for You

  Self-Help Tools: Microsoft Technical Support Online

  Other Self-Help Tools

  Direct Assistance with a Microsoft Technical Support Engineer

 Additional Assistance from Microsoft Support Partners

  Other Microsoft Services


New Raw Object

Creates a new raw object.

Warning

Contact Microsoft Technical Support before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Raw Object)

Displays General properties for a raw object.

Warning

Contact Microsoft Technical Support before modifying information in raw mode.


Text Editor
Editor/Viewer

Lets you enter, change, or view values for the selected schema attribute. Some attributes cannot be edited.

Warning

Contact Microsoft Technical Support before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Raw Schema)

Displays General properties for the raw directory schema.

Warning

Contact Microsoft Technical Support before modifying information in raw mode.


Permissions (Raw Schema)

Displays Permissions information for the raw directory schema.

Warning

Contact Microsoft Technical Support before modifying information in raw mode.


General (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the General property page to record basic information, such as name and location, for the mailbox user.

Note

Microsoft Exchange Server supports only the original 128 ASCII characters.

  First Name

  Initials

  Last Name

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Address Information

  Company Information

  Primary Windows NT Account


First Name

Type the mailbox user's first name (up to 64 characters).


Initials

Type the mailbox user's middle initials (up to 6 characters).


Last Name

Type the mailbox user's last name (up to 64 characters).


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) that can be used for this mailbox user. The alias name is another identifier for this mailbox.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Administrator window and in the Address Book.


Address Information

Specify the following optional address information.

In the	Type
Address box	User's street address.
City box	User's city.
State box	User's state.
Zip code box	User's zip code.
Country box	User's country.


Company Information

Specify the following optional company information.

In the	Type
Title box	User's title.
Company box	User's company name.
Department box	User's department name.
Office box	User's office number.
Assistant box	Phone number of the user's assistant.
Phone box	User's phone number.


Address Book Comment

Type any information (up to 256 characters) about this mailbox that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Primary Windows NT Account

Select the Windows NT account that will have mailbox owner permissions on this mailbox. The user logged on with the primary Windows NT account can use this mailbox to send and receive messages. You can associate more than one Windows NT account with a particular mailbox and assign permissions to additional accounts using the Permissions property page.


Organization (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Organization property page to enter optional information in the Address Book about the mailbox owner's manager and direct reports (if any).

  Manager

  Direct Reports


Manager

Specify the mailbox owner's manager.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can select the name of the mailbox owner's manager.

Clear Button

Choose Clear to clear the Manager box.


Direct Reports

Choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can select one or more recipients who report to the mailbox owner.


Permissions (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this mailbox. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this mailbox.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Send As	Send messages as this mailbox. This is different from Send On Behalf Of permission because the person receiving the message cannot tell that the message has been sent by someone else. You delegate Send On Behalf Of permission using the Delivery Options property page.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to this mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.


Phone/Notes (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Phone/Notes property page to enter detailed phone number information for a mailbox and to enter an optional note.

  Phone Numbers

  Notes


Phone Numbers

Specify the following optional telephone numbers.

In the	Type
Business box	User's alternate office phone number.
Business2 box	User's second alternate office phone number.
Fax box	User's fax number.
Assistant box	Phone number of the user's assistant.
Home box	User's home phone number.
Home2 box	User's second home phone number.
Mobile box	User's mobile phone number.
Pager box	User's pager number.


Notes

Type any additional information about this user.


Protocols (Mailbox)

  Overview

Specifies which protocols a mailbox can use to connect to Microsoft Exchange Server. You can also specify message formats and character sets for Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4), Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP), and Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3).

Note

Users who don’t have a Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server as custom recipients.

Select a protocol and choose Settings.


Settings

Opens the Settings dialog box. You can choose to enable or disable the protocol.

In addition, for Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4), Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP), and Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), you can choose to accept the site defaults or specify message formats and default character sets for Internet message conversions.

For example, when IMAP4 is enabled for a mailbox or custom recipient, you can either use the default settings for message format or you can specify how text and attachments are encoded and the default character set used.

Note

If you disable NNTP, Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), POP3, and IMAP4 on the server, support for these protocols is also disabled for individual mailboxes or custom recipients.


Message Format
Message Formats

Messages sent by Microsoft Exchange Server users are converted to an Internet format when the message is retrieved by a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) client. The format that messages are converted to is determined by the settings in the sender’s mailbox or custom recipient Protocol property page for POP3 and IMAP4.

Note

Messages sent by an Internet user are not converted and are retrieved by the POP3 and IMAP4 client in the message’s original format.


Character Sets

When retrieving non-MIME messages that originate from Microsoft Exchange Server, the character set specified in the Default character set box is used. However, if the code page being used maps to several different character sets, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the specified character set if it is appropriate for the code page.

For example, suppose a MAPI message is received that uses Japanese code page 932, and that code page can be mapped to one of several character sets including JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC. If the Default character set option is set to Shift-JIS, that character set is used. However, if the Default character set option is set to US-ASCII, Microsoft Exchange Server uses the default character set for that code page, which is JIS.

MIME messages that originate from the Internet use the character set specified in the message. Non-MIME messages use the character set specified by the Internet Mail Service when the message was received.


Distribution Lists (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Distribution List property page to specify the distribution lists to which this mailbox user belongs. When mailbox users are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Distribution List Membership

A list of all the distribution lists to which this recipient belongs.


Modify Button

Opens a dialog box that displays a list of existing distribution lists. Select the distribution lists to which you want to add this recipient.


Delivery Restrictions (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this mailbox will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Delivery Options (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Options property page to set up the following delivery options:

  Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

  Alternate Recipient


Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

Choose Modify to change the list of users who can send mail on behalf of this mailbox user. When mail is sent using this option, the message indicates that it was sent on behalf of another mailbox user.

Note

Send On Behalf Of permission differs from Send As permission, which does not indicate the actual sender. Use the Permissions property page to give Send As permission.


Alternate Recipient

Sets an alternate recipient for the mailbox user who will receive all incoming mail for this mailbox and indicates if the mailbox owner will receive messages.

None

Choose None to have no alternate recipient for the mailbox user.

Modify

Choose Modify to select an alternate recipient.

Deliver Messages to Both Recipient and Alternate Recipient

Once an alternate recipient is chosen, you can select this check box to deliver messages to both the alternate recipient and to the mailbox owner.


Security (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Security property page to enable or disable advanced security for this mailbox, to recover a user's security key, or to view the current advanced security status.

  Valid From/To

  Current Status

  Enable Enhanced Security Button

  Recover Security Key Button

  Revoke Advanced Security Button

  Forget Remembered Password Button


Valid From/To

Displays the dates for which this user's security certificate is valid. The default time period is one year. Once the certificate expires, a new certificate is automatically generated.


Current Status

Displays this user's current security status. The following table describes the different security states.

This state	Occurs when
Undefined	Security has never been enabled for this user.
New	Security has been enabled for the first time, but the one-time token has not yet been received from the client.
Active	Security has been enabled, and the one-time token has been received from the client.
Disabled	Security has been disabled.
Key recovery in progress	Security keys are in the process of being recovered, or a previously disabled user is in the process of being re-enabled.


Enable Enhanced Security Button

Creates a special temporary security token that you must give to users so that they can use all advanced security features. Once users have this token, they must use it to configure advanced security using the client.

You can use any secure method to transmit this temporary token to the user (such as phone or mail).


Recover Security Key Button

Recovers a user's security keys. You can recover security keys if users forget their passwords or if you previously disabled users and now want to re-enable them. When the keys are recovered, Microsoft Exchange Server creates a special temporary security token that you must give to the user. Once users have this token, they must use it to configure advanced security using the client.

You can use any secure method to transmit this temporary token to the user (such as phone or mail).


Revoke Advanced Security Button

Disables a user's ability to sign or encrypt messages.


Forget Remembered Password Button

When you first open the Security property page, you are prompted to provide the administrative password that you created during advanced security Setup. You are also given the option to "remember" the password for up to five minutes. This allows you to continue to configure security options for this user and other users without having to re-enter the administrative password each time. If you choose to remember the administrative password, you can choose Forget Remembered Password to forget the password. This is recommended if you finish working with advanced security before the five minutes have expired.


Custom Attributes (Mailbox)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called Employee ID# on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, specify Microsoft Internet Locator Service (ILS) server and account names, and determine if the mailbox appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  On-line Listings Information

  Home Server

  Hide From Address Book

  Outlook Web Access Server Name

  Downgrade High Priority X.400 Mail

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Displays the name that is used for routing purposes.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this mailbox to appear in the Address Book.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this mailbox user is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the mailbox user's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the mailbox user will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Outlook Web Access Server Name

The name of the mailbox’s Outlook Web Access server. If an Outlook Web Access server name is specified, users can use a POP3 or IMAP4 client for e-mail, and Outlook Web Access for calendaring and custom form retrieval. Meeting requests and custom forms are received in a user’s Inbox as messages containing a URL that displays the meeting request or custom form.

If a server name is not specified for an individual mailbox, the Outlook Web Access server name specified in the private information store General property page is used by default. If a server name is not specified for individual mailboxes or the private information store, a message containing a URL will not be sent for meeting requests or custom forms.

Note

The Outlook Web Access server is typically different from the Microsoft Exchange Server computer containing the POP3 or IMAP4 user’s mailbox.


Downgrade High Priority X.400 Mail

Select to disable this mailbox from sending high priority mail to an X.400 mail system. Instead, high priority messages will be downgraded and sent as normal priority. Clear to enable this mailbox to send high priority mail to an X.400 mail system (this is the default).


Container Name

The name of the container in which the mailbox is stored.


On-line Listings Information

You can specify Microsoft Internet Locator Service (ILS) server and account names, to enable other users to locate the mailbox owner and set up online meetings. If your organization uses Microsoft NetMeeting, you can specify ILS information for individual mailboxes. This enables other NetMeeting users to locate the mailbox owner and set up an online meeting.

ILS Server

Type the name of the ILS server.

ILS Account

Type the name of the ILS account.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer that this mailbox will reside on. The mailbox is stored in the selected server's private information store.

Note

You can specify the home server when you first create a mailbox. This is the server that users must log on to in order to use their mailbox. Once the mailbox is created, you can move it to a different server by choosing the Move Mailbox command from the Tools menu.


Limits (Mailbox)

  Overview

Use the Limits property page to set the number of days deleted messages are retained, the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages, and the storage limits for the mailbox.

  Deleted Item Retention Time

  Message Sizes

  Information Store Storage Limits


Deleted Item Retention Time

Sets the number of days that deleted items are retained for this mailbox.

Use Information Store Defaults

If selected, the item retention settings in the private information store General property page are used. If cleared, the deleted item retention period for the mailbox overrides the private information store setting.

Use this Value (Days)

Type the number of days deleted messages are retained in the information store before they are permanently deleted.

Don't permanently destroy items until the store has been backed up

If selected, deleted items are retained until the information store is backed up.


Message Sizes

Sets the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages.

Outgoing

Indicate the size of a message that can be sent from this mailbox. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent from this mailbox, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message this mailbox can send.

Incoming

Indicate the size of a message that can be received in this mailbox. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be received in this mailbox, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message this mailbox can receive.


Information Store Storage Limits

Sets the information store storage limits for this mailbox.

Use information store defaults

If selected, the default limit settings in the private information store General property page are used. If cleared, the mailbox storage limit overrides the private information store storage limit.

Issue Warning (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space the mailbox can occupy before a warning message is sent.

Prohibit send (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space that a mailbox can occupy before the system prevents the owner of the mailbox from sending more messages.

Note

This option is not used when messages are sent by Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) clients because these protocols do not support this functionality.

Prohibit Send and Receive (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space a mailbox can occupy before the system prevents the owner of the mailbox from sending or receiving more messages. The value you specify should be greater than the value you set for the Prohibit send (K) option. For example, you should do this if users will be out of the office for extended periods of time.


General (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the mailbox agent General property page to specify the name and location of the mailbox agent and to add administrative notes.

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Computer Name

  Notes


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this mailbox agent as you want it to appear in the Address Book. An alias is another identifier for this mailbox agent.


Computer Name

Name of the computer on which Microsoft Exchange Server is installed.


Notes

Type any information (up to 1024 characters).


Permissions (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this mailbox agent. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this mailbox agent. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this mailbox agent.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this mailbox agent.
Send As	Send messages as this mailbox agent.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this mailbox agent.


Distribution Lists (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Distribution List property page to specify the distribution lists that the mailbox agent belongs to. When mailbox agents are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Delivery Restrictions (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which the mailbox agent will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Delivery Options (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Options property page to specify the Send On Behalf Of permission or alternate recipients.

  Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

  Alternate Recipient


Give Send On Behalf Of Permission To

Choose Modify to change the list of users who can send mail on behalf of this mailbox agent. When mail is sent using this option, the messages indicate that it was sent on behalf of another mailbox user.

Note

Send On Behalf Of permission differs from Send As permission, which does not indicate the actual sender. Use the Permissions property page to grant Send As permission.


Alternate Recipient

Sets an alternate recipient for the mailbox agent that will receive all incoming mail for this mailbox and indicates whether the mailbox owner will receive messages.

None

Choose None to have no alternate recipient for the mailbox agent.

Modify

Choose Modify to select an alternate recipient.

Deliver Messages to Both Recipient and Alternate Recipient

Once an alternate recipient is chosen, you can select this check box to deliver messages to the alternate recipient and to the mailbox agent owner.


Security (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Security property page to enable or disable advanced security for this mailbox agent, to recover a security key, or to view the current advanced security status.

  Valid From/To

  Current Status

  Enable Enhanced Security Button

  Recover Security Key Button

  Revoke Advanced Security Button

  Forget Remembered Password Button


Custom Attributes (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called Employee ID# on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, specify Microsoft Internet Locator Service (ILS) server and account names, and determine if the mailbox appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  On-line Listings Information

  Home Server

  Hide From Address Book

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this mailbox agent to appear in the Address Book.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the mailbox agent is stored.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer on which this mailbox agent will reside. The mailbox is stored in the selected server's private information store.


On-line Listings Information

You can specify Microsoft Internet Locator Service (ILS) server and account names to enable other users to locate the mailbox agent and set up online meetings. If your organization uses Microsoft NetMeeting, you can specify ILS information for individual mailbox agents. This enables other NetMeeting users to locate the mailbox agent and set up an online meeting.

ILS Server

Type the name of the ILS server.

ILS Account

Type the name of the ILS account.


Schedule (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to specify the time that the mailbox agent is operating.

  Never

  Always

  Detail View

  Selected Times

  Schedule Grid


Never

Mailbox agent is stopped.


Always

Mailbox agent is always running.


Limits (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Limits property page to set the number of days deleted messages are retained, the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages, and the storage limits for the mailbox agent.

  Deleted Item Retention Time

  Message Sizes

  Information Store Storage Limits


Deleted Item Retention Time

Sets the number of days that deleted items are retained for this mailbox agent.

Use Information Store Defaults

If selected, the item retention settings in the private information store General property page are used. If cleared, the deleted item retention period for the mailbox agent overrides the private information store setting.

Use this Value (Days)

Type the number of days deleted messages are retained in the information store before they are permanently deleted.

Don't permanently destroy items until the store has been backed up

If selected, deleted items are retained until the information store is backed up.


Message Sizes

Sets the size limits for outgoing and incoming messages.

Outgoing

Indicate the size of a message that can be sent from this mailbox agent. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent from this mailbox agent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message this mailbox agent can send.

Incoming

Indicate the size of a message that can be received in this mailbox agent. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be received in this mailbox agent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message this mailbox agent can receive.


Information Store Storage Limits

Sets the information store storage limits for the mailbox agent.

Use Information Store Defaults

If selected, the default limit settings in the private information store General property page are used. If cleared, the mailbox storage limit overrides the private information store storage limit.

Issue Warning (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space the mailbox can occupy before a warning message is sent.

Prohibit send (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space that a mailbox can occupy before the system prevents the owner of the mailbox from sending more messages.

Note

This option is not used when messages are sent by Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4) clients because these protocols do not support this functionality.

Prohibit Send and Receive (K)

Select and type a value (in kilobytes) to specify the maximum amount of space a mailbox can occupy before the system prevents the mailbox owner from sending or receiving more messages. The value you specify should be greater than the value you set for the Prohibit send (K) option. For example, you should do this if users will be out of the office for extended periods of time.


Options (Mailbox Agent)

  Overview

Use the Options property page to configure the following options.

Option	Description
Topic root folder name	Type the name of the root folder for the mailbox agent. A subfolder is created under this folder for each new topic.
Topic root folder comment	Type a comment describing the root folder.
Poll Inbox every N milliseconds	Type the amount of time that should elapse between the mailbox agent’s polling of its Inbox.
Public Topic Folder	Select to create a public folder in the public information store. If not selected, the topic root folder is created in the mailbox agent’s private information store.
If the topic root folder is created as a public folder, then the following options specify the access granted to folder users.

Option	Description
Read Any	Allow users to read messages posted to the folder.
Edit Any	Allow users to modify messages posted to the folder.
Delete Any	Allow users to delete messages from the folder.
Create Messages	Allow users to post new messages directly to the folder (for example, from an e-mail client).
Owner	Allow users ownership rights to the folder. This allows the user to change access rights to the folder.
Contact	Add every subscriber as a contact to be notified if a replication conflict occurs or a user requests additional rights for the folder.


General (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the distribution list name and the distribution list owner and to add and delete members.

  Display Name

  Alias Name

  Owner

  Modify Owner Button

  Clear Owner Button

  Expansion Server

  Notes

  Members

  Modify Members Button


Display Name

Type the distribution list name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Address Book.


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this distribution list. The alias name is another identifier for this distribution list.


Owner

The owner of the distribution list. A mailbox owner can modify distribution list members using the client. Typically, only an administrator can modify distribution list memberships using the Administrator program.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note

You provide the directory name when you first create the distribution list. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to identify the distribution for routing purposes. Once a distribution list has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Modify Owner Button

Opens the Address Book where you can select an owner for the distribution list. A mailbox owner can modify distribution list members using the client. Typically, only an administrator can modify distribution list memberships using the Administrator program.


Clear Owner Button

Clears the Owner box.


Expansion Server

Choose the server in your site where this distribution list will always be expanded. When a user in your site sends a message to a distribution list, Microsoft Exchange Server must expand the list, resolve the names of all recipients in the list, and determine the most efficient routing for the message. For large distribution lists, expansion can be processor-intensive. You can force the distribution list to be expanded on a specific server (for example, a server with a more powerful processor, or one that handles less messaging traffic) by specifying an expansion server.


Members

Lists all recipients on this distribution list. All distribution list members, which can include mailboxes, custom recipients, and other distribution lists, receive messages sent to the distribution list.


Modify Members Button

Opens the Address Book. Use this window to add or delete distribution list members. Choose OK to confirm your selection and return to the General property page. The recipients you select appear in the Members box.


Notes

Type any information (up to 1024 characters) that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Permissions (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this distribution list. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this distribution list. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this distribution list.
Send As	Send messages as this distribution list.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this distribution list.


Distribution Lists (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this distribution list belongs to. When a distribution list is a member of another distribution list, it is called a nested distribution list. For example, if a distribution list called Corporate is a member of a distribution list called North-East Employees, all messages sent to the North-East Employees list will be sent to all members of the Corporate list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Delivery Restrictions (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this distribution list will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Distribution List)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called Employee ID# on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Distribution List)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set distribution list message transfer limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine whether the distribution list appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Message Size

  Container Name

  Distribution List Options

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note

You provide the directory name when you first create the distribution list. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses to identify the distribution for routing purposes. Once a distribution list has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this distribution list is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the distribution list's trust level exceeds the trust level you set for the container, information about the distribution list will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Message Size

Indicate the size of messages to be sent to this distribution list. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size to be sent, or select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that can be sent to the distribution list.

Large messages sent to large distribution lists can adversely impact performance.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the distribution list is stored.


Distribution list options

Select any of the following options:

Report To Distribution List Owner

Select this option to send notification reports to the distribution list owner when a message sent to the distribution list has requested delivery notification or is undeliverable.

Report To Message Originator

Select this option to send notification reports to the message originator that indicate the delivery status for each member of the list when a message sent to the distribution list has requested delivery notification or is undeliverable. When this option is not selected, the message originator receives reports from the list itself, not notification for each member.

Note

When Hide Membership From Address Book is selected, Report To Message Originator is overridden to ensure the secrecy of the member list of the distribution list.

Allow Out of Office Messages to Originator

Select this option to respond with an Out of Office message for any registered user who is a member of the distribution list.

Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this distribution list to appear in the Address Book.

Hide Membership From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want the members of the distribution list to appear in the Address Book.


General (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify the folder name and Address Book display name, to set an age limit for messages contained in replicas of the public folder, to view or modify client permissions, and to enter an optional note.

  Folder Name

  Address Book Display Name

  Alias Name

  Limit administrative access to home site

  Client Permissions

  Propagate these properties to all subfolders

  Notes

  Folder Path


Folder Name

The name of the public folder as it appears in the public folder hierarchy. This is the name that was provided when the folder was created using the client.


Address Book Display Name

Specify how the folder name will appear in the Address Book. Select Same As Folder Name if you want the name that appears in the Address Book to match the name in the Folder Name box. Select Use This Name and type the public folder name as you want it to appear in the Address Book.


Alias Name

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) for this public folder. The name entered here can be used in the To box when sending mail to the public folder.


Directory Name

Displays the name that is used for routing purposes. The directory name is set when the public folder is created using the client.


Limit administrative access to home site

Ensures that the public folder cannot be rehomed to another site. If this option is selected, only users with administrative permissions in the public folder’s home site who are connected to the home site can rehome the public folder and create public folder replicas.


Client Permissions

Opens the Client Permissions dialog box, where you can view or modify client permissions for the folder. Client permissions are different from Administrative permissions, which are set in the public folder Permissions property page.


Folder Path

Displays the complete address of this public folder, which is generated when the public folder is created using the client.


Notes

Type descriptive information about this public folder that you want to appear in the Address Book.


Propagate these properties to all subfolders

Allows the current properties to be in effect for all subfolders.

Note  This option appears only if this folder has subfolders.

Client permissions

Replication schedule

Replicas

Replication message importance

Age limit for all replicas

Hide from the address book

Deleted item retention time

Limit administrative access to home site


Client permissions

Applies the Client permissions properties of the selected folder to all subfolders. You can set these properties for the selected folder in the General property page.


Replication schedule

Applies the Replication schedule properties of the selected folder to all subfolders. The replication schedule indicates when this public folder will be replicated to replicas of the folder throughout your organization. You can set these properties for the selected folder in the Replication Schedule property page.


Replicas

Applies the Replicas settings of the selected folder to all subfolders. When a replica of a public folder exists on another server in your site, the information it contains is updated during public folder replication. You can set these properties for the selected folder in the Replicas property page.


Replication message importance

Applies the Replication msg importance property of the selected folder to all subfolders. The importance is the priority for replication messages sent by this public folder. You can set this property for the selected folder in the Advanced property page.


Age limit for all replicas

Applies the Age limit for replicas (days) property of the selected folder to all subfolders. You can set the age limit for all replicas of the folder in your organization. This property can be set for the selected folder in the Limits property page.


Hide from the address book

Applies the Hide from address book property of the selected folder to all subfolders. This property determines whether this public folder appears in the Address Book. You can set this property for the selected folder in the Advanced property page.


Deleted item retention time

Applies the Deleted item retention properties of the selected folder to all subfolders. These properties determine the amount of time that deleted items in the information store are retained before they are permanently deleted. You can set this property for the selected folder in the Limits property page.


Limit administrative access to home site

Applies the Limit administrative access to home site property of the selected folder to all subfolders. This property ensures that the public folder cannot be rehomed to another site. If this option is selected, only users with administrative permissions in the public folder’s home site who are connected to the home site can rehome the public folder and create public folder replicas. You can set this property for the selected folder in the General property page.


Replicas (Public Folder)

  Overview

Public folders can be copied (replicated) to other servers in your site. When a replica of a public folder exists on another server, the information it contains is updated with current information during public folder replication.

Use the Replicas property page to create replicas of a public folder on other servers within your site.

Note

You can also replicate public folders to servers in other sites using the public information store Instances property page.

  Servers

  Replicate Folders To

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

Replicating public folders to other servers in your site can be useful in balancing the load of users accessing a particular public folder at any given time. For example, suppose you have 100 users and two servers in your site. If there is a popular public folder called Classified Ads on one server, and all 100 users access that folder numerous times each day, heavy traffic is created on the server. By creating a replica of the Classified Ads public folder on the second server, you can effectively balance the load of users accessing the public folder at any given time. For more information about planning public folder replicas, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


Servers

A list of all servers in the selected site.


Replicate Folders To

A list of servers that contain a replica of this public folder.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of servers where a replica of this public folder will be created during public folder replication.


Remove Button

Removes the selected server from the list of servers that contain a replica of this public folder. During the next round of public folder replication, the public folder replica is removed from the selected server.


Site

A list of the messaging sites in your organization. When you select a site, all servers in that site appear in the Servers list.


Permissions (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this public folder. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this public folder. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

Note

The permissions you set on a public folder in the Permissions property page are different from client permissions, which are set using the client, or by choosing Client Permissions in the public folder General property page.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this public folder.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this public folder.
Send As	Send messages as this public folder.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this public folder.


Folder Replication Status (Public Folder)

  Overview

By verifying the replication status of public folders and servers, you can determine whether public folders are up-to-date. Use the Folder Replication Status property page to view all servers that a specific public folder is replicated on.

In addition, you can view the replication status of:

All public folders for a specific server (use the public information store Folder Replication Status property page for that server).

All servers that a specific server replicates public folders with (use the public information store Server Replication Status property page for that server).

Column heading	Description
Server Name	Name of the server.
Last Received Time	Last time the local server received updates from the selected server.
Average Transmission Time	Average time it takes to send updates from the local server to the selected server.
Replication Status	In Sync indicates that there have been no changes to local public folder replicas since changes were last sent. Local Modified indicates that there have been changes made to local public folder replicas that have not yet been sent.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the latest public folder replication information.


Columns Button

Opens the Columns dialog box where you can change the type and order of information shown on the Folder Replication Status property page. Choose OK to confirm your selection.


Replication Schedule (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Replication Schedule property page to indicate the times at which this individual public folder will be replicated to other replicas of the folder that exist throughout your organization.

To set the replication schedule for all public folders on a server, use the public information store Replication Schedule property page.

Note

If a schedule is set for a specific public folder, it overrides the schedule set for a server.

  Use Information Store Schedule

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Use Information Store Schedule

Uses the schedule set in the public information store Replication Schedule property page.


Never

Disables replication.


Always

Runs replication every 15 minutes.


Distribution Lists (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this public folder belongs to. When a public folder is a member of a distribution list, it receives all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Public Folder)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called Employee ID# on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Limits (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Limits property page to set the number of days deleted messages are retained and to set the information store storage limits for this public folder. You can also use this property page to set an age limit for replicas.

  Deleted Item Retention Time

  Information Store Storage Limits

  Age Limit for Replicas


Deleted Item Retention Time

Sets the number of days that deleted items are retained for this public folder.

Use Information Store Defaults

If selected, the default limit settings in the public information store General property page are used. If cleared, the public folder storage limit overrides the public information store storage limit.

Use this Value (Days)

Type the number of days that deleted items in the information store are retained before they are permanently deleted.


Information Store Storage Limits

Sets the number of days that deleted items are retained for this public folder.

Use Information Store Defaults

If selected, the default limit settings in the public information store General property page are used. If cleared, the storage limit for the selected public folder overrides the public information store storage limits.

Issue Warning (K)

If selected, type a number representing the maximum amount of space that the public folder can occupy before a warning message is sent.


Age Limit Replicas (Days)

Select and type a value (in days) to set an age limit for messages in this public folder.


Advanced (Public Folder)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and set the priority of replication messages. Replication messages contain updated information that is sent to other replicas of this public folder.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  Replication Msg Importance

  Home Server

  Hide From Address Book

  Container Name

  Administrative Note


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

The identifying part of the public folder's distinguished name. This can be used to identify a specific public folder when there are multiple public folders with the same name in different parts of the hierarchy.


Replication Msg Importance

Select a priority for replication messages sent by this public folder. Priority determines the order in which messages are sent by Microsoft Exchange Server. Messages with High priority are delivered first.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about a public folder is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the public folder's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the public folder will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


Home Server

Select the Microsoft Exchange Server computer this public folder will reside on. The folder is stored in the selected server's public information store.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this public folder to appear in the Address Book. You can still send messages to a public folder that is hidden from the Address Book if you know the full e-mail address of the public folder.


Container Name

The name of the container where the replica is stored.


General (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the General property page to record basic information, such as name, location, and e-mail address, for the custom recipient.

Note

Microsoft Exchange Server supports only the original 128 ASCII characters.

  First Name

  Initials

  Last Name

  Display Name

  Alias

  Additional Information

  E-mail Button


First Name

Type the custom recipient's first name (up to 64 characters).


Initials

Type the custom recipient's middle initials (up to 6 characters).


Last Name

Type the custom recipient's last name (up to 64 characters).


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 characters) as you want it to appear in the Administrator window and in the Address Book.


Alias

Type an alias (up to 64 characters) that can be used for this custom recipient. The alias name can be used to generate the e-mail address for this recipient.


Additional Information

Specify the following optional address information.

In the	Type
Address box	User's street address.
City box	User's city.
State box	User's state.
Zip code box	User's zip code (if any).
Country box	User's country.
Specify the following optional company information.

In the	Type
Title box	User's title.
Company box	User's company name.
Department box	User's department name.
Office box	User's office number.
Assistant box	Phone number of the user's assistant.
Phone box	User's phone number.


E-mail Button

Changes the custom recipient's full e-mail address. A dialog box of address options appears. This dialog box varies according to the type of address that you specified when you first created this custom recipient. When you are finished modifying the address options, choose OK to return to the General property page.


Organization (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Organization property page to enter optional information about the custom recipient's manager and direct reports (if any).

  Manager

  Direct Reports


Manager

Specify the mailbox owner's manager.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book in which you can select the name of the mailbox owner's manager.

Clear Button

Choose Clear to clear the Manager field.


Direct Reports

Specify a list of the people who report to the mailbox owner.

Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book in which you can select one or more recipients to add to the Direct Reports list.


Phone/Notes (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Phone/Notes property page to enter detailed telephone number information for a custom recipient and to enter an optional note.

  Phone numbers

  Notes


Phone numbers

Specify the following optional phone numbers.

In the	Type
Business box	User's alternate office phone number.
Business2 box	User's second alternate office phone number.
Fax box	User's fax number.
Assistant box	Phone number of the user's assistant.
Home box	User's home phone number.
Home2 box	User's second home phone number.
Mobile box	User's mobile phone number.
Pager box	User's pager number.


Notes

Type any additional information about this user.


Permissions (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this custom recipient. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this custom recipient. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with this custom recipient.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with this custom recipient.
Send As	Send messages as this custom recipient.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this custom recipient.


Distribution Lists (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Distribution Lists property page to specify the distribution lists that this custom recipient belongs to. When custom recipients are members of a distribution list, they receive all messages addressed to that distribution list.

  Distribution List Membership

  Modify Button


Protocols (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Specifies which protocols a custom recipient can use to connect to Microsoft Exchange Server. You can also specify message formats and character sets for Internet Message Access Protocol, Version 4rev1 (IMAP4), Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP), and Post Office Protocol Version 3 (POP3).

Select a protocol and choose Settings.


Delivery Restrictions (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to specify addresses from which this custom recipient will or will not accept messages. All rejected messages are returned to the originator.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Custom Attributes (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

The Custom Attributes property page contains 10 unique fields that you can use to track any information about the recipients in your site. You define custom attribute fields using the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The fields you define on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page appear on the Custom Attributes property page for all recipients in your site. For example, suppose your company uses an employee ID numbering system. You can create a custom attribute field called Employee ID# on the DS Site Configuration object Custom Attributes property page. The Employee ID# field then appears on the Custom Attributes property page of every recipient.


Advanced (Custom Recipient)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to provide a simple display name, set custom recipient message transfer limits, set trust levels for directory replication and directory synchronization, and determine whether this custom recipient appears in the Address Book.

  Simple Display Name

  Directory Name

  Trust Level

  On-line Listings Information

  Message Size

  Container Name

  Allow Rich Text in Messages

  Hide From Address Book

  Primary Windows NT Account

  Administrative Note


Primary Windows NT Account

Select the Windows NT account that will have Owner permission on this custom recipient object. The user logged on with the primary Windows NT account can use this custom recipient address to send and receive messages. You can associate more than one Windows NT account with a particular custom recipient address and assign permissions to additional accounts using the Permissions property page.


Simple Display Name

Type the display name that will be used by systems that cannot interpret all the characters in the normal display name.


Directory Name

Type a unique name (up to 64 characters).

Note

You provide the directory name when you first create the custom recipient. This is the name that Microsoft Exchange Server uses when routing messages. Once a custom recipient has been created, you cannot modify this name.


Trust Level

Determines whether information about this custom recipient is replicated to other mail systems during directory synchronization. If the custom recipient's trust level exceeds the trust level that you set for the container, information about the custom recipient will not be replicated during directory synchronization.


On-line Listings Information

You can specify Microsoft Internet Locator Service (ILS) server and account names to enable other users to locate the custom recipient owner and set up online meetings. If your organization uses Microsoft NetMeeting, you can specify ILS information for individual mailboxes. This enables other NetMeeting users to locate the mailbox owner and set up an online meeting.

ILS Server

Type the name of the ILS server.

ILS Account

Type the name of the ILS account.


Message Size Limit

Indicates the size of messages that can be sent to this custom recipient. Select No Limit to allow messages of any size. Select Max (K), and type a value representing the largest message that this custom recipient can receive.


Container Name

The name of the container in which the custom recipient is stored.


Allow Rich Text in Msgs

Select to allow outbound messages to this custom recipient to use rich text characters such as bold, color, and italic. Rich text also provides the ability to position attachments.


Hide From Address Book

Select this option if you do not want this custom recipient to appear in the Address Book.


Permissions (Recipient Container)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Recipients container. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Recipients container. This property page provides various default roles.

Permissions you set on the recipients container are inherited by all recipients in the container.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects under this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify user-level attributes associated with a recipient.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete objects.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this recipient.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector Options

  Overview

Use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector Options property page to configure Microsoft Exchange Server to exchange Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy information between Microsoft Exchange Server sites and MS Mail (PC) postoffices. Once you have configured the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector, you can start it by choosing the Services icon in Control Panel.

Note

The Microsoft Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector is installed with the Microsoft Mail Connector. Only one Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector will be installed in a site.

  Administrator’s Mailbox

  Schedule+ Distribution List

  Update Frequency

  Send updates for this site only

  Logging Level

  Full Export


Administrator’s Mailbox

Displays the mailbox or distribution list used for the administrator's mailbox. Any mail addressed to this Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector that the connector cannot process, such as status reports or non-delivery reports (NDRs), is forwarded to this mailbox. To specify a different recipient, choose Change. An administrator’s mailbox must be specified to use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.


Recipient Mailbox
Schedule+ Distribution List

Contains all the MS Mail (PC) and PROFS postoffices that exchange free and busy information with this site. A Schedule+ distribution list must be specified to use the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.


Update Frequency

Specifies how often the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector sends free and busy information to the postoffices in the Schedule+ distribution list. The default is every 15 minutes.


Send updates for this site only

Configures this Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector to send free and busy information updates for this site only to the postoffices in the Schedule+ distribution list. Use this option if your organization has more than one Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector and you want to control the exchange of free and busy information between Microsoft Exchange Server and the postoffices in the distribution list.


Logging Level

Select the logging level for the connector. The logging level determines which events are written to the Windows NT application event log. When Microsoft Exchange Server generates an event less than or equal to the logging level, the event is logged.

Logging Level	Description
None	Only critical events and error events are logged, including initiations and terminations, NDRs, and shutdowns. Only events with a logging level of 0 are logged. This is the default. Change it only if a problem occurs.
Minimal	Equivalent to None.
Basic	Events with a logging level of 2 or lower are logged. This level adds to the log the number of messages received and the number of information messages created.
Extensive	Events with a logging level of 3 or lower are logged. This level adds to the log the number of changes made and the names of users receiving messages from the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector.
Verbose	For the Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector, this level is equivalent to Extensive.
Internal	All events are logged, including debug strings, configuration changes received, unknown address notifications, and validations of accounts.


Full Export

Choose Full Export to update the Schedule+ distribution list after new members have been added. The Schedule+ Free/Busy Connector will send free and busy information for all Schedule+ users to all members of the distribution list.


Allow Rich Text in Msgs

Select to allow messages from this mailbox to contain rich text format.


Retaining Deleted Items

You can configure Microsoft Exchange Server so that messages deleted from mailboxes are retained for a specified amount of time before they are permanently deleted. When a user deletes messages and you’ve set a deleted item retention period, the items are marked as hidden until they are permanently deleted from the private information store. Users can recover deleted items by using the Recover Deleted Items command (in Microsoft Outlook version 8.03 or later) and then moving them to a specified location.

You can set deleted item retention periods for the public or private information store or individual mailboxes and public folders. Deleted item retention periods set on individual mailboxes override the setting on the private information store by default.


Setting Storage Limits

You can set an optional storage limit for mailboxes, mailbox agents, and public folders to control how much space is occupied in a server’s information store. When a mailbox, mailbox agent, or public folder exceeds the storage limit (indicated in kilobytes), a warning message is sent to the mailbox, mailbox agent, or public folder contacts.

You can use the General property page of the private and public information stores to set default storage limits. You can use the Limits property page of mailboxes, public folders, and mailbox agents to override the storage limits for individual mailboxes, public folders, and mailbox agents.


General (Server)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view the Directory Name, select the server location, or add an administrative note.

  Directory Name

  Server Location

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

The directory name is defined during installation and cannot be changed.


Server Location

Users can access public folder replicas more efficiently by grouping servers within a site into locations. You can also use locations to limit the scope of users who can access the services of a connector.

Microsoft Exchange Server automatically searches for public folder replicas within its own location. If it can't locate the public folder replica in its own location, it searches servers outside of the location.

If you want users to access public folder replicas on certain servers by default, you can create a wildcard location called "*." Microsoft Exchange Server searches for public folder replicas on "*" servers unless you've specified another location for accessing the public folder replicas.

Type or select the name in the Server Location box. To add a server to "*," type a * in the Server Location box.


Permissions (Server)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this server. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this server. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

Note

When you give users or groups permissions on a server object, they automatically inherit the same level of permissions for all subordinate objects in the directory. For example, if you give a user administrator permissions on the server object, they inherit administrator permissions on all components below the server in the directory hierarchy, such as the directory and the MTA.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the members of a distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete an object.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on existing objects. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new mailboxes but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Services (Server)

  Overview

Use the Services property page to specify the services on the server that are checked by a server monitor. Server monitors track services on a specified server and can perform a variety of actions if they detect that a service is not running (such as attempting to restart the service). Only those services specified in the Services property page are monitored.

  Installed Services

  Monitored Services

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  None Button

  Default Button

  All Button


Installed Services

Lists all services installed on the server.


Monitored Services

Lists all services on the server that are monitored by a server monitor.


Add Button

Adds the selected service to the list of services that are monitored by other server monitors.


Remove Button

Removes the selected service from the list of services that are monitored by other server monitors.


None Button

No services are monitored by other server monitors.


Default Button

Default services are monitored by other server monitors. Default services include:

Microsoft Exchange Server directory

Microsoft Exchange Server information store

Microsoft Exchange Server MTA


All Button

All installed services are monitored by other server monitors.


Locales (Server)

  Overview

Locales determine how date, currency, and time values are displayed, and controls other international settings, such as sorting order. When a specific locale, such as French, is selected for a server, French language clients connecting to that server see information that is properly sorted and formatted in French.

  Installed Locales

  Selected Locales

  Add Button

  Remove Button


Installed Locales

Lists all locales. You can select one or more locales used on the server.


Selected Locales

Lists all the locales that you have selected for the server. Foreign language clients that use the languages listed in the Selected Locales box can connect to the server and see information that is properly sorted and formatted for their language.


Add Button

Adds the selected locale to the Selected Locales box. Foreign language clients that use the languages listed in the Selected Locales box can connect to the server and see information that is properly sorted and formatted for their language.


Remove Button

Removes the selected locale from the list of locales available to foreign language clients connecting to the server.


IS Maintenance (Server)

  Overview

Use the IS Maintenance property page to schedule online maintenance for each server, including deleting messages in public folders and cleaning up indexes that have been cached from user views. Information store response times are slower while maintenance tasks are being performed.

Set the information store maintenance schedule to the least busy time of day, but make sure it runs at least once each day.

Options	Description
Always	Performs maintenance tasks every 15 minutes. This option is not recommended because it can affect server performance.
Selected times	Assigns specific maintenance times in the schedule grid. Select a time or block of time when maintenance should occur.
1 Hour	Displays the schedule grid in one-hour increments.
15 Minute	Displays the schedule grid in 15-minute increments.


Database Paths (Server)

  Overview

Use the Database Paths property page to set the paths to the directory and the public and private information store files on this server. If your server has multiple drives, you can spread the data files across different drives to enhance performance by reducing the amount of required drive-seeking time.

The private database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the private information store.

To set the location of the private database, choose Modify, and then indicate a path.

The public database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the public information store.

To set the location of the public database, choose Modify, and then indicate a path.

The system database is one of the two linked database elements that make up the information store.

To set the location of the system database, choose Modify, and then indicate a path.

The transaction log keeps track of all information store events and transactions. Transaction log files are used during incremental backups of the information store.

To set the location of the transaction log, choose Modify, and then indicate a path.

The working path points to the location where various temporary files are stored. These temporary files are created during normal operation of the information store.

To set the working path, choose Modify, and then indicate a path.

  Name and Location

  Modify button


Name and Location

Displays the database filename and location.


Modify Button

Displays the Directory Database dialog box. Use this dialog box to change the database filename and location.


Advanced (Server)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to enable circular logging for directory or information store database files and to adjust inconsistencies between the directory and the information store files.

Database Circular Logging

Circular logging automatically writes over transaction log files after the data they contain has been committed to the database. It reduces disk storage space requirements; however, if circular logging is enabled, you cannot perform differential and incremental backups.

Select the Directory option to enable circular logging of directory files. Select the Information Store option to enable circular logging of database files in the information store.

Data Consistency

Choose Consistency Adjuster to configure and run the DS/IS Consistency Adjuster.


DS/IS Consistency Adjustment

Use the DS/IS consistency adjuster to ensure that the directory and the information store are synchronized. Inconsistencies between the directory and information store occur when there is an entry for a public folder or mailbox in the information store that does not have a corresponding entry in the directory database or vice versa.

Caution  Do not run the DS/IS consistency adjuster after deleting a directory replication connector to another site unless you never plan to reconnect the sites. Do not run the DS/IS consistency adjuster after joining a site unless directory replication within the site has completed. Using the DS/IS consistency adjuster on the public information store can result in undesirable changes to the public folder hierarchy that are difficult to recover from. Unless the Limit administrative access to home site option is set on a public folder, the DS/IS consistency adjuster does the following.

Resets the home server for any public folders that are currently homed in an unknown site to the server where the DS/IS consistency adjuster is being run.

Eliminates unknown users from the list of users who have permissions on the public folder.

If you have deleted a directory replication connector and you never plan to reconnect to that site, you can run the DS/IS consistency adjuster so that directory objects are created for all folders in the public folder hierarchy. The DS/IS consistency adjuster makes the break from the organization transparent to users. Those who had access to folders when the site was part of the organization still have access when the site is removed.

Private Information Store

Options	Description
Synchronize with the directory, and create new directory entries for mailboxes that do not have a corresponding directory entry.	Creates an entry in the directory if a mailbox entry exists in the information store, but not in the directory. Choosing this option does not delete mailbox entries from the directory.
Remove unknown user accounts	Choose this option to remove users that are no longer valid from private information store folder permissions.
Public Information Store

Options	Description
Synchronize with the directory and reset the home server value for public folders homed in unknown sites.	Creates an entry in the directory if a public folder entry exists in the information store. It deletes entries from the directory for any public folder entries that do not exist in the information store. Resets the home server for any public folders that are currently homed in an unknown site to the server where the DS/IS consistency adjuster is being run.
Remove unknown user accounts from public folder permissions.	Choose this option to remove users that are no longer valid from public information store folder permissions.

All Inconsistencies

Select All Inconsistencies, and then choose Adjust to adjust all inconsistencies.

Important  After joining a site, be sure that directory replication within the site has finished completely before selecting All Inconsistencies.

Inconsistencies More Than (Days)

Select Inconsistencies More Than, type a value for days, and then choose Adjust to adjust only those inconsistencies that are older than a specified period of time.

For more information, see Microsoft Exchange Server Maintenance and Troubleshooting.


General (Directory Service)

  Overview

Microsoft Exchange Server synchronizes directory information within a site every five minutes. You can synchronize directory information manually by choosing Update Now if you have made changes to directory information on the server and don't want to wait for automatic synchronization.

  Update Now Button

  Check Now Button

  Administrative Note


Update Now

Notifies the server to request directory updates from all other servers within the site.

Note

Directory information within a site is updated automatically every five minutes.


Check Now

Enabling this option checks for other connected servers within a site and for new sites within the organization. For example, if server A is down while server B is added to your site, server A will have no knowledge of server B. Similarly, if server A is down while a new site is added to the organization, server A will have no knowledge of the new site. You can choose Check Knowledge Consistency to rectify both of these situations. Checking knowledge consistency also sets up the required replication links with any new servers or sites.

Note

Knowledge consistency is checked automatically once a day. If you manually check knowledge consistency and discover a new server or site, you should choose Synchronize Now in the General (Directory) property page to update your local directory. Once directory synchronization is complete, you should rebuild the routing table by choosing Recalculate Routing in the General (MTA) property page.


Administrative Note

You can enter information (up to 1024 characters) that pertains to the object. This information is visible only in the Administrator program.


Permissions (Directory Service)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this directory. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this directory. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

Note

Administrators with Admin or View Admin roles can view directory objects regardless of whether Search permissions are set for those objects. Therefore, you can't set permissions so administrators can view just a portion of a directory.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below the selected object in the directory hierarchy.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this directory.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this directory.
Modify Permission	Change permissions on existing objects.
Delete	Delete objects in this directory.
Send As	Send messages with the sender's return address.
Mailbox Owner	Read and delete messages in this mailbox.
Logon Rights	Access the directory.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


General (MTA)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Local MTA Name

  Local MTA Password

  Message Size

  Recalculate Routing

  Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally

  Convert Incoming Messages To MS Exchange Contents

  Only Use Least Cost Routes

  Administrative Note


Local MTA Name

Type a name up to 32 characters. This name is used to identify the message transfer agent (MTA) to foreign systems. If no name is provided, it defaults to the name of the server where the MTA is installed.

Note

Changing an established MTA name can potentially break connections from foreign X.400 systems.


Local MTA Password

Type a password up to 64 characters (optional). This is the password that foreign systems use when connecting to this message transfer agent (MTA).


Message Size

Select No Limit if you want this message transfer agent (MTA) to process messages of any size. Select Maximum (K), and type a value between 0 and 2,097,151 to limit the message size that this MTA can process. All messages that exceed the limit are returned to the originator.


Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally

A remote distribution list is one that is created on a server in another site and made available to users in your site through directory replication. If you select Expand Remote Distribution Lists Locally and a user sends a message to a remote distribution list, the distribution list is expanded locally (on the server to which they are currently connected). Microsoft Exchange Server determines the best routing for the message based on the location of recipients in the list. This method guarantees the most efficient message handling. However, processing large distribution lists can affect server performance.


Recalculate Routing

This option rebuilds the routing table manually. The routing table contains all the information that the message transfer agent (MTA) needs to determine how to route messages. It can take a few minutes to replicate routing changes across the site.


Convert Incoming Messages To MS Exchange Contents

Changes the address and content for incoming messages to a format compatible with Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) and the underlying Microsoft Exchange Server system.


Only Use Least Cost Routes

Configures an individual message transfer agent (MTA) to send messages using only least-cost routes. Only the least-cost route for each message will be attempted. This allows you to prevent messages from being routed to connectors in other sites when a connector in the local site is unavailable. If a message cannot be routed through the least-cost route, Microsoft Exchange Server generates a non-delivery report (NDR).


Permissions (MTA)

  Overview

The Permissions property page specifies user or group rights on the message transfer agent (MTA). You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define the type of access a user or group has on the MTA. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this MTA .
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this MTA.
Delete	Delete this MTA.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this MTA.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Queues (MTA)

  Overview

The Queues property page displays the status of all messages that are waiting to be delivered by the message transfer agent (MTA). Microsoft Exchange Server creates different queues for each server in a site, as well as queues for installed gateways. Once you select a queue, you can view or change the priority of individual messages.

  Queue Name

  Message List

  Details Button

  Refresh Button

  Priority Button

  Delete Button


Queue Name

Lists all queues on this message transfer agent (MTA). It displays the queue name and the number of items contained in the queue. Select the queue you want to view, and a list of all messages is displayed in the Message List box.


Message List

Lists all messages in the selected queue. The Message List box displays the originator of the message, the time that the message was submitted, and the size (in kilobytes) of the message.


Delete Button

Removes the selected message from the queue.


Refresh Button

Updates the queue with the most current information.


Priority Button

View the priority of the selected message. You can leave the message's priority as it is or change it to either High, Medium, or Low. Messages with the highest priority are sent first.

You cannot change the priority of messages in the Internet Mail Service or Microsoft Mail Connector queues.


Details Button

You can view the following read-only information about a selected message.

This option	Shows
Originator	Address from which the message was sent.
MTSID	Message ID of the message.
Submit Time	Time that the message arrived in the queue.
Size	Size of the message in kilobytes.
Priority	Message priority (High, Medium, or Low).


General (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set a default for the number of days that deleted messages are retained as well as the default limits for the amount of disk space that each mailbox on the private information store can occupy. You can also use this property page to specify the public folder server for mailboxes on this private information store.

Note

All mailboxes will use this limit as the default unless you override the limit in the mailbox Limits property page.

  Deleted Item Retention Time

  Issue Warning

  Prohibit Send

  Prohibit Send and Receive

  Public Folder Server

  Outlook Web Access Default Server


Deleted Item Retention Time

Type the number of days that deleted items in the information store are retained before they are deleted permanently.

Don't Permanently Delete Items Until the Store Has Been Backed Up

Select to ensure that items are not permanently deleted until the information store has been backed up (even if the number of days specified in the Deleted item retention time option has been exceeded).


Issue Warning

Sets a storage limit default for mailboxes on the private information store. Once a mailbox exceeds the designated size, a warning message is sent to the mailbox owner.


Prohibit Send (K)

Sets a storage limit default for mailboxes on the private information store. Once a mailbox exceeds the designated size, the mailbox owner can no longer send messages.

Note

The mailbox can still receive mail after the Prohibit Send value is exceeded.


Prohibit Send and Receive (K)

Sets a storage limit default for mailboxes on the private information store. Once a mailbox exceeds the designated size, the mailbox owner can no longer send or receive messages.


Public Folder Server

Specify the server where all public folders created by users with mailboxes on the private information store are located. Designating a different public folder server assigns the responsibility for creating and managing public folders to that server.

For example, you can set up a single server in your site with the storage capacity and processing power to handle all public folders. You can then designate that server as the public folder server for your site.

Note

The default location is the server where this information store is located.


Outlook Web Access Default Server

The name of the default Outlook Web Access server for all mailboxes in the selected private information store. If an Outlook Web Access server name is specified, users can use a POP3 or IMAP4 client for e-mail, and Outlook Web Access for calendaring and custom form retrieval. Meeting requests and custom forms are received in a user's Inbox as messages containing a URL that displays the meeting request or custom form. If a server name is not specified for the private information store or individual mailboxes, a message containing a URL will not be sent for meeting requests or custom forms.

The Outlook Web Access server name can also be specified for individual mailboxes in the mailbox's Advanced property page. If a server name is not specified for the private information store or individual mailboxes, meeting requests and custom forms are not received as messages with embedded URLs.

Note

The Outlook Web Access server is typically different from the Microsoft Exchange Server computer containing the POP3 or IMAP4 user's mailbox.


Permissions (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this private information store. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the private information store. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this private information store.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this private information store.
Delete	Delete this private information store.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this private information store.


Logons (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Logons property page to see information about the users who have logged on to the server's private information store.

Column heading	Description
User Name	The network user name. This is included in the default column view.
Mailbox	The mailbox display name. This is included in the default column view.
Windows NT Account	The Windows NT account name of the user who last logged on to this mailbox or public folder. This is included in the default column view.
Logon Time	The date and time that a user last logged on. This is included in the default column view.
Last Access Time	The date the user last logged on. This is included in the default column view.
Client Version	The version of the client that was used to log on to this mailbox or public folder. This is included in the default column view.
Code Page	The code page that the client is using.
Folder Ops	The total number of folder operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as opening or closing a folder.
Full Mailbox Directory Name	The full e-mail address of the mailbox being accessed. This option is available only for the private information store.
Full User Directory Name	The name of the mailbox that is accessing the private information store.
Host Address	The Internet protocol (IP) address of the client.
Locale ID	The locale ID for the language the client is using.
Messaging Ops	The total number of messaging operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as opening or closing a message.
Open Attachments	The total number of open attachments.
Open Folders	The total number of open folders.
Open Messages	The total number of open messages.
Other Ops	The total number of miscellaneous operations performed in the last 60 seconds.
Progress Ops	The total number of progress operations performed in the last 60 seconds. Progress operations inform the user about how long it will take to complete a task.
Stream Ops	The total number of stream operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as viewing or changing an attachment.
Table Ops	The total number of table operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as viewing the contents of a folder.
Total Ops	The total number of operations performed in the last 60 seconds.
Transfer Ops	The total number of transfer operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as copying or moving a message.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the Logons property page display.


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify which columns you want to display in the Logons property page, and the order in which you want them to appear.


Mailbox Resources (Private Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Mailbox Resources property page to see resource information about mailboxes on the private information store, such as the total amount of storage space being used by a particular mailbox, and the total number of items in a mailbox.

You can customize the display of information in the Mailbox Resources property page by choosing Columns and selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which you want them to appear.

Column heading	Description
Mailbox	The name of this mailbox. This is included in the default column view.
Windows NT Account	The Windows NT account name of the user who last logged on to this mailbox. This is included in the default column view.
Total K	The total amount of disk space in kilobytes that this mailbox occupies on the private information store, including space consumed by messages, attachments, and hidden system information in the form of associated messages. This is included in the default column view.
Total no. Items	Total number of non-associated messages that are stored in the mailbox. This is included in the default column view.
Last Logon Time	Time that a user last logged on to this mailbox. This is included in the default column view.
Last Logoff Time	Time that a user last logged off this mailbox. This is included in the default column view.
Deleted Items K	The total amount of disk space in kilobytes occupied by retained, deleted items for this mailbox.
Full Mailbox Directory Name	The full e-mail address of the mailbox being accessed.
Storage Limits	The status relative to the storage limit.
Total no. Associated Messages	Total number of messages in the mailbox that represent hidden system information, such as forms, views, reply templates, and deferred action messages.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Refresh Button

Updates the display with the latest information.


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify which columns you want to display in the Mailbox Resources property page, and the order in which you want them to appear.


General (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the default storage limit for all new public folders created on this server. The storage limit represents the largest amount of space (in kilobytes) that a public folder and the information it contains can occupy in the public information store. Once the storage limit is reached, a warning message is sent to the public folder owner.

Note

All public folders will default to these limits unless you override them in the public folder Limits property page

  Deleted Item Retention Time

  Issue Warning


Deleted Item Retention Time

Type the number of days that deleted items in the information store are retained before they are deleted permanently.

Don't Permanently Delete Items Until the Store Has Been Backed Up

Select to ensure that items are not permanently deleted until the information store has been backed up (even if the number of days specified in the Deleted item retention time option has been exceeded).


Issue Warning

Specify a storage limit default for public folders on this public information store. Once a public folder exceeds the designated space, a warning message is sent to all public folder contacts.


Instances (Public Information Store)

  Overview    [image]  See Also

Use the Instances property page to create replicas of public folders that exist on other servers. A public folder replica is a duplicate of a public folder that you create on the local public information store of the server you are administering. You can create replicas of public folders from any site in your organization. Users within your site can view and access the public folder replica just as they would other public folders created within the site. During replication, changes made to the replica are sent out to all other replicas of the public folder throughout the organization.

Note

You can also replicate public folders to servers in other sites on a per-folder basis using the Public Folder Replicas property page.

  Public Folders

  Folders On This Information Store

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Site

  Folder Path


See Also

Public Folder Replicas Property Page


Public Folders

Lists the public folders available within the selected site that are not replicated to the server.


Folders On This Information Store

Lists the public folders on this public information store that are configured to replicate to the server.


Add Button

Adds the selected public folders to the list displayed in the Folders On This Information Store box. All folders on this list are replicated to the public information store.


Remove Button

Removes the selected public folder replica from the public information store.

Note

You cannot remove the last replica of a public folder in its home site. To delete a folder completely, you must use Microsoft Outlook.


Site

Displays the sites in your organization.


Folder Path

Displays the path to the public folder.


Replication Schedule (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Replication Schedule property page to indicate the times at which public folders in the public information store are replicated to other public folder replicas in your organization. The times you set in this page determine when replication occurs for all replicated public folders in this information store. You can override this schedule on a per-folder basis from the Public Folder Replication Schedule property page.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Never

Disables replication.


Always

Runs replication at the interval specified in the Replicate Always Interval box in the Public Information Store Advanced property page.


Permissions (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this public information store. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this public information store. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this public information store.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this public information store.
Delete	Delete this public information store.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this public information store.


Age Limits (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Age Limits property page to set a time limit for storing messages in public folders and to set a default time limit for any newly created public folders in the public information store. Time limits determine how long messages can remain in a public folder before they expire and are deleted. They ensure that public folders don't get cluttered with outdated information.

You can view information about age limits for specific folders that exist on the public information store. You can also modify age limit settings for a particular public folder by double-clicking the entry.

Column heading	Description
Folder	Folder display name.
This Replica (days)	Current age limit for the replica of the folder in this public information store only.
All Replicas (days)	Current age limit for all replicas of the folder that exist throughout your organization.
Removed Older Than	Messages older than the number of days displayed have been deleted.
Delete Pending	Displays "True" when the public folder replica is about to be deleted, "False" if no deletion is pending. Public folder replica deletion occurs the next time public folders are replicated.
Total K	Total size of messages in kilobytes in the folder.
Folder Path	Organization and domain name in which the folder is located.
  Age Limit For All Folders On This Information Store

  Modify Button

  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information in the Age Limits property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which you want them to appear.


Modify Button

Displays the Modify Age Limits dialog box. Use this dialog box to modify age limit settings for public folders.


Age Limit For All Folders On This Information Store

To set a message age limit default for all new public folders created on this public information store, select the check box, and then type a value (in days) in the edit box. To override this value on a per-folder basis, double-click a specific folder's entry in the Folder list and change the age limit settings.


Server Replication Status (Public Information Store)

  Overview

By verifying the replication status of public folders and servers, you can determine whether public folders are up-to-date. Use the Server Replication Status property page to view the replication status of all servers.

In addition, you can view the replication status of:

All servers that a specific public folder is replicated on. Use the public folder Folder Replication Status property page for that folder.

All public folders for a specific server by using the public information store Folder Replication Status property page for that server.

Column heading	Description
Server Name	The name of the server. This is included in the default column view.
Replication Status	In Sync indicates that there have been no changes to this replica since the last changes were sent. Local Modified indicates that the replica of the public folder on this server has changed and the changes have not yet been replicated throughout the site. This is included in the default column view.
Last Received Time	The last time the local server received updates from the selected server. This is included in the default column view.
Average Transmission Time	The average time it takes to send updates from the local server to the selected server. This is included in the default column view.
Last Transmission Time (sec)	The amount of time of the last transmission from the local server to the selected server. This is included in the default column view.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information in the Server Replication Status property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which they appear.


Folder Replication Status (Public Information Store)

  Overview

By verifying the replication status of public folders and servers, you can determine whether public folders are up-to-date. Use the public information store Folder Replication Status property page to view the replication status of public folders for a specific server.

In addition, you can view the replication status of:

All servers that a specific public folder is replicated on. Use the public folder Folder Replication Status property page for that folder.

All servers that a specific server replicates public folders with. Use the public information store Server Replication Status property page for that server.

Column heading	Description
Display Name	The public folder name as it appears in the Address Book. This is included in the default column view.
Last Received Time	The time the last update was received. This is included in the default column view.
Number of Replicas	The total number of replicas of this folder throughout the site. This is included in the default column view.
Replication Status	In Sync indicates that there have been no changes to this replica since the last changes were sent. Local Modified indicates that the replica of the public folder on this server has changed and that the changes have not been replicated throughout the site. This is included in the default column view.
Folder	The public folder name.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information in the Folder Replication Status property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which you want them to appear.


Logons (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Logons property page to see information such as who is currently logged onto a public folder, and the time they logged on.

Column heading	Description
User Name	The network user name. This is included in the default column view.
Windows NT Account	The Windows NT account name of the user who last logged on to this mailbox or public folder. This is included in the default column view.
Logon Time	The date and time that a user last logged on. This is included in the default column view.
Last Access Time	The date the user last logged on. This is included in the default column view.
Client Version	The version of the client that was used to log on to this mailbox or public folder. This is included in the default column view.
Code Page	The code page that the client is using.
Folder Ops	The total number of folder operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as opening or closing a folder.
Full User Directory Name	The name of the mailbox that is accessing the information store.
Host Address	The Internet protocol (IP) address of the client.
Locale ID	The locale ID for the language the client is using.
Messaging Ops	The total number of messaging operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as opening or closing a message.
Open Attachments	The total number of open attachments.
Open Folders	The total number of open folders.
Open Messages	The total number of open messages.
Other Ops	The total number of miscellaneous operations performed in the last 60 seconds.
Progress Ops	The total number of progress operations performed in the last 60 seconds. Progress operations inform the user about how long it will take to complete a task.
Stream Ops	The total number of stream operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as viewing or changing an attachment.
Table Ops	The total number of table operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as viewing the contents of a folder.
Total Ops	The total number of operations performed in the last 60 seconds.
Transfer Ops	The total number of transfer operations performed in the last 60 seconds, such as copying or moving a message.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information in the Logons property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which you want them to appear.


Public Folder Resources (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Public Folder Resources property page to view information about public folder resource usage.

Column heading	Description
Display Name	The name of the public folder. This is included in the default column view.
Total K	The total amount of disk space in kilobytes that this folder occupies on the public information store, including space consumed by messages, attachments, and hidden system information in the form of associated messages. This is included in the default column view.
Total no. Items	Total number of non-associated messages that are stored in the folder. This is included in the default column view.
Created	The date the folder was created. This is included in the default column view.
Last Access Time	The date the folder was last accessed. This is included in the default column view.
No. of Owners	The number of users who have Folder Owner permission. This is included in the default column view.
No. of Contacts	The number of users who are designated as folder contacts for this folder. This is included in the default column view.
Folder	The name of the folder where messages are stored.
Folder Path	The name of the path where the folder is located.
Total no. Associated Messages	Total number of messages in the folder that represent hidden system information, such as forms, views, and reply templates.
Deleted Items K	The total amount of disk space in kilobytes occupied by retained, deleted items for this public folder.
  Refresh Button

  Columns Button


Columns Button

Displays the Columns dialog box. Use this dialog box to customize the display of information in the Public Folder Resources property page by selecting the columns you want to see and the order in which you want them to appear.


Advanced (Public Information Store)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify replication options.

  Replicate Always Interval

  Replication Message Size Limit

  Defaults Button


Replicate Always Interval

Sets the frequency at which public information store replication occurs when you select Always in the public information store Replication Schedule property page. Type a value (in minutes) in the Replicate Always Interval box.


Replication Message Size Limit

During replication, public folders communicate changes between replicas by sending mail messages. Type a value (in kilobytes) in the Replication Message Size Limit box to set a limit for the size of these messages.


Defaults Button

Use the system default values for Replication Always Interval and Replication Message Size Limit.


General (System Attendant)

  Overview

Use the system attendant General property page to view the display and alias names and to maintain the message tracking log files. The system attendant generates e-mail addresses for new recipients and maintains message tracking log information. In addition, the system attendant monitors the connection status among Microsoft Exchange Server computers.

  Message Tracking Log Files Maintenance

  Administrative Note


Message Tracking Log Files Maintenance

Message tracking log files store messages based on a variety of criteria. To maintain these files, you can specify not to remove the old log files, or you can remove old log files after a specific number of days.


Permissions (System Attendant)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this system attendant. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this system attendant. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this system attendant.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this system attendant.
Send As	Send messages as this system attendant.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this system attendant.


General (Organization)

  Overview

Use the General property page to change the display name (up to 256 characters), which is the name that appears in the Address Book and in the Administrator window.

You provide the directory name when setting up Microsoft Exchange Server. This name cannot be changed.


Permissions (Organization)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the organization object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on the organization object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects below this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the members of a distribution list.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Delete	Delete an object.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on existing objects. For example, without this permission, a user could grant permissions to new mailboxes but could not modify permissions on existing ones.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


General (Messaging Site)

  Overview

Use the General property page to change the display name (up to 256 characters), which is the name that appears in the Address Book and in the Administrator window.

You provide the directory name when setting up Microsoft Exchange Server. This name cannot be changed.


Permissions (Messaging Site)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the messaging site. Permissions you set on the messaging site are inherited by the site Recipients container. For example, a user with Mailbox Owner rights at the messaging site level automatically inherits Mailbox Owner rights for all recipients in the Recipients container.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this messaging site. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create additional recipient containers within this site.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox. This is different from send on behalf of permissions because the person receiving the message cannot tell that the message has been sent by someone else. You delegate send on behalf of permissions using the Delivery Options property page.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Logon Rights	Log on to any server in the site using the Administrator program.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Modify permissions on this object. For example, without this permission, a user can grant permissions to new objects but cannot modify permissions on existing ones.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Permissions (Configuration Container)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Configuration container. Permissions you set on the Configuration container are inherited by all objects and containers in the Configuration container. For example, a user with Modify Permissions rights on the Configuration container can modify permissions on all subordinate containers and objects.

You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Send As	Send messages as a mailbox.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to a mailbox, and use it to send and receive messages.
Replication	Replicate directory information with other servers.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Service Account Password (Configuration Container)

  Overview

Allows you to change the password for the service account that is used to start Microsoft Exchange Server services. Changing the password in the Service Account Password property page updates all servers in the site with the new password information. Any errors encountered while attempting to update the service account password are logged to the Windows NT Event Log.

If you change the service account password on a clustered server, you must go to each secondary node and change the password associated with each service.

1.	Go to Control Panel on the secondary node and choose Services.

2.	Choose a service, and then choose Startup.

3.	Under Log On As, select the service account and type the new password.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each service.

This enables each service to start correctly on each cluster node.

  Account Name

  Password

  Confirm Password


Clustered Server

An enterprise-edition Windows NT Server that is running Microsoft Cluster Server software. Microsoft Cluster Server provides a high degree of reliability and protection against hardware failure on mission-critical systems.

A cluster comprises an active node and a secondary node. If the active node goes down, or if a critical service on the active node fails, the secondary node takes its place without interrupting service or dropping client connections. This transition is called a failover.


Account Name

Displays the name of the service account used to start Microsoft Exchange Server services on the servers in your site.


Password

Type the new service account password.


Confirm Password

Type the new service account password again.


General (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Routing Calculation Server

  Share Address Space with Other X400 Systems


Routing Calculation Server

Designate the server that is responsible for recalculating the routing table. The routing table contains all information about the gateways and connectors that are used to route messages outside the site. Routing information changes any time you perform an action that affects routing, such as adding a new gateway or removing an existing gateway. The routing table calculation takes all these changes into consideration and produces an updated routing table that is then replicated to every other server in the site as soon as the change is detected. Routing table calculation occurs at the interval you specify in the Routing Calculation Schedule property page.

Note

The routing table is automatically recalculated every time a change is made that affects routing within a site.


Share Address Space with Other X400 Systems

Lets another non-Microsoft Exchange Server system share the same address space as the Microsoft Exchange Server site. This is particularly useful when you are transitioning from another system to Microsoft Exchange Server. For example, if Microsoft Exchange Server receives a message from an X.400 system and cannot find the recipient in Microsoft Exchange, the message can be routed to the system that is sharing the address space. This prevents the server from sending unnecessary non-delivery reports (NDRs).


Permissions (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Site Addressing object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts with Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts with Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Site Addressing (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Use the Site Addressing property page to create, edit, or remove partial e-mail addresses for this site. Partial e-mail addresses contain information specific to a site. For example, you can define an X.400 address for a site that contains only X.400-specific information. The next time you create a mailbox, this part of the address is used to generate a full X.400 e-mail address for the mailbox.

In addition, you can disable automatic e-mail address generation for individual address types you don’t need. By specifying only those address types that you need, you can reduce network traffic and disk space usage when creating users.

  E-Mail Addresses

  Check Box

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


E-Mail Addresses

A list of all partial e-mail addresses that exist for this site. This information is used by various address generators to create full e-mail addresses for Microsoft Exchange recipients.


Check Box

Clear the check box next to an e-mail type that you want to disable partial e-mail generation for.

Note

If your users send messages to or receive messages from a particular e-mail system, do not disable the partial e-mail addresses for that system unless you plan to create e-mail messages manually.


Edit Button

Select the partial e-mail address you want to modify, and choose Edit to open a dialog box containing various addressing options. When you edit an existing partial e-mail address, you can update addressing information for all Microsoft Exchange Server recipients with the new information.


Remove Button

Opens a dialog box in which you can specify the e-mail address type to remove from all recipient objects in the site.


Routing Calculation Schedule (Site Addressing)

  Overview

The routing table must be recalculated after any change is made to routing. For example, if you add or remove a gateway or connector or change a Connected Sites or Address Space property page, you must recalculate for messages to be sent correctly. There are three ways to calculate the routing table.

Use the automatic system update, which recalculates the table anytime a change is detected that affects routing.

Set up a schedule and indicate the times at which the system automatically calculates the routing table.

Manually force recalculation at any time.

The MTA automatically reads the routing table when it detects a change. There may be a delay between the time when the routing table is rebuilt and the time when the message transfer agent (MTA) starts using the new information to route messages.

Note

The routing table is automatically rebuilt every time a change is made that affects routing in the site. You can manually rebuild the routing table on any server at any time by choosing the Recalculate Routing button in the MTA General property page or the Recalculate Routing button in the Site Addressing Routing property page.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Schedule Grid


Routing (Site Addressing)

  Overview

Routing allows you to send mail to a certain range of addresses. For example, you can specify an address space, such as X.400 or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), and a value for the address space, such as the postoffice or network, and routing automatically generates the address table.

The Routing property page contains the following columns:

Column	Description
Type	Indicates the type of address space.
Value	Shows the values for the address space.
Cost	Shows the cost of sending a message to this site.
  Recalculate Routing

  Save As

  Details


Recalculate Routing

Regenerates the address table.


Save As

Opens the Save As dialog box.


Details

Opens the Routing Details dialog box, where you can view detailed routing information.


General (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to define a display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Display name

  Directory name

  Tombstone Lifetime (Days)

  Garbage Collection Interval (Hours)

  Anonymous Account Button

  Password

  Confirm Password


Display name

Type a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters, which can include spaces and special characters. If no name is provided, the system prompts for a value.


Directory Name

The name is defined during installation. It cannot be changed.


Tombstone Lifetime (Days)

Type the number of days that a tombstone exists before expiring. Tombstones are created any time you delete an object from the directory. It is the tombstone that is replicated to other servers, effectively deleting the corresponding directory entry on the other servers. The number that you enter here should be large enough to account for the time it takes the tombstone to be replicated throughout the organization and the length of time between server backups.


Garbage Collection Interval (Hours)

Type the number of hours representing the interval at which garbage is collected. During garbage collection, expired tombstones are permanently deleted from the system, and the directory is compacted for maximum efficiency.


Anonymous Account Button

Opens the Anonymous Access Account dialog box that allows you to set up an Anonymous account directory. This account allows the directory to access containers when anonymous users connect to Microsoft Exchange Server. This account is an internal account, such as the Guest account, used only by the directory. It is different from the account you set on individual containers for anonymous users.

Specify an existing anonymous Windows NT user account, or create a new anonymous user account. You must confirm a password for a new anonymous account.


Password

Type the password for the new anonymous account.


Confirm Password

Type the password for the new anonymous account again.


Permissions (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the DS Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Offline Address Book Schedule (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

The offline Address Book must be generated before clients can download it to their local computers. There are two ways to generate the offline Address Book:

Set up a schedule and indicate the times at which the system automatically generates the offline Address Book.

Manually force offline Address Book generation at any time.

Note

If you select Always to update the offline Address Book, the update begins at the beginning of the first grid block that you select. If you specify three two-hour intervals with only one hour in between, and it takes four hours to update your Address Book, the next regeneration starts at the beginning of the third two-hour cycle.

You can use the Offline Address Book Schedule property page to schedule the times at which a new off-line Address Book is automatically generated. If recipients are added, removed, or updated frequently, you can schedule offline Address Book generation more frequently to ensure that the offline Address Book is always current.

The Offline Address Book Schedule property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the offline Address Book is generated.

  Always

  Selected Times

  Schedule Grid


Offline Address Book (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

You can configure multiple offline Address Books that remote users can use to get information about other users in the organization. When connecting to a Microsoft Exchange Server computer remotely, users can download offline Address Books containing lists of recipients that you specify. Users can also download only the changes that occurred since the last download.

Remote users typically send messages to a regular group of addresses and require a subset of the global address list rather than the entire global address list for their organization.

  Offline Address Book Server

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Generate All Button

  Microsoft Exchange 4.0 and 5.0 compatibility Button


Off-Line Address Book Server
Offline Address Book Server

The offline Address Book server is the computer where the actual offline Address Book files are generated and stored. When users download the offline Address Book remotely to their local computers, a connection is made to a hidden offline Address Book public folder, and the files are read and copied from there.

If you have a large number of recipients in offline Address Books, for best performance, specify a server that is not busy doing other tasks.


Off-Line Address Book Server
Add Button

Opens the Offline Address Book Container dialog box that allows you to select the recipient container you want to use to generate the offline Address Book.


Off-Line Address Book Server
Remove Button

Removes selected offline Address Books from the Address Books box if you no longer want them to be available for download. All the offline Address Books can be removed except the default global address list.


Generate All Button

You can quickly generate an offline Address Book at any time. For example, if you have just added a number of new recipients to your organization and the offline Address Book schedule is configured to automatically generate the offline Address Book once a week, you can manually generate the offline Address Book to account for the newly added recipients.


Generate All Button
Microsoft Exchange 4.0 and 5.0 compatibility Button

By default, Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 generates offline Address Books that are incompatible with the Microsoft Exchange Client versions 4.0 and 5.0. If users in your site are running these clients, select the Microsoft Exchange 4.0 and 5.0 compatibility button to configure Microsoft Exchange Server so it generates offline Address Books in a format that your clients support.


Custom Attributes (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Custom attributes are particular characteristics associated with a recipient object. For example, property pages contain predefined attributes such as the mailbox name, address, city, state, and zip code. If you want to add more fields to a recipient, you can define up to 10 custom attributes. These attributes provide additional information about the recipient object, such as an employee identification number, that is specific to your organization.

Create custom attribute fields by typing any text in the Values column adjacent to the custom attribute (numbered 1 through 10) that you want to modify. The text you type appears as the custom attribute field label in the Custom Attributes property page for every recipient in your site.


DS Site Configuration Protocols
Attributes (DS Site Configuration)

  Overview

Attributes are particular characteristics associated with a recipient object. For example, property pages contain predefined attributes such as the mailbox name, address, city, state, and zip code.

You can determine which site directory attributes users can access based on their request type. For example, you can grant authenticated users access to all mailbox and public folder attributes, but grant anonymous users access only to mailbox attributes. Based on the request type, you can specify that certain attributes are available to individual requestors.

You can also specify whether an attribute should be replicated between sites. Because not all attributes are necessary for every site, you can save system resources by replicating only those attributes that are necessary.

  Configure

  Show attributes for


Configure

Select one of the following request types.

Option	Description
Anonymous requests	Select to configure or view the attributes that will be available to anonymous Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory requests.
Authenticated requests	Select to configure or view the attributes that will be available to authenticated LDAP directory requests.
Inter-site replication	Select to configure or view the attributes that will be replicated between sites.
You use the Show attributes for box to select the specific recipients to view or configure attributes for.


Show attributes for

Select one of the following recipients:

All mail recipients

Distribution List

Mailbox

Public Folder

Remote Address

You view or configure the attributes in the attributes list. Select the checkboxes for those attributes you want the selected recipients to access.


General (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following options:

  Public Folder Container

  Enable Message Tracking


Public Folder Container

Select the recipient container where all new public folders created in this site will appear. For example, you can group all public folders in a recipient container called Public Folders. Grouping public folders makes it easier to locate a specific public folder in the Address Book and in the Administrator window.

Note

Changing the public folder container changes the location where all new public folders are stored. This does not affect the public folders that have already been created. If no container is specified, the default is the recipient container for the site.


Enable Message Tracking

When message tracking for the information store is enabled, the system attendant creates a daily log file that contains routing information about all messages processed by the information store. You enable message tracking for messages processed by the message transfer agent (MTA) in the MTA Site Configuration General property page.

Daily tracking log files are stored in the Exchsrvr\Tracking.log directory and use the following file naming convention:

YYYYMMDD.log

where YYYY is year, MM is month, and DD is day. For example, a file created on June 1, 1995, is called 19950601.log.

Note

The date used to create log files is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages. Message tracking is turned off by default. You must turn message tracking on if you want log files generated. The Message Tracking Center cannot search for messages processed on days where no daily log file is present.


Permissions (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the Information Store Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Top Level Folder Creation (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Top Level Folder Creation property page to specify which users can create top-level public folders in Microsoft Outlook. Top-level public folders are those that exist at the highest tier of the public folder tree. Limiting the number of people who can create top-level public folders lets you control the public folder hierarchy. Once a top-level folder is created, the owner of that folder can set permissions that allow other users to create subordinate folders below the top-level folder.

  Allowed to Create Top Level Folders

  Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders

  Modify Button


Allowed to Create Top Level Folders

A list of all users who can create top-level public folders. Select All to allow all users to create top-level public folders, or select List, and then choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can specify a list of users who can create top-level folders.

If you use a distribution list, you can specify that certain people in that list cannot create top-level folders by entering their names in the Not allowed to create top level folders box.

Once you have entered a name in the Allowed to create top level folders box, all other users are automatically prevented from creating top-level folders.

Note

When both the Allowed to create top level folders and the Not allowed to create top level folders boxes are empty, everyone in the global address list can create top-level folders.


Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders

A list of all users that cannot create top-level public folders. Select None to allow anyone to create top-level public folders. Or select List, and then choose Modify to open the Address Book where you can specify a list of users who cannot create top-level folders.


Modify Button

Choose Modify to open the Address Book, where you can select one or more users to add to either the Allowed To Create Top Level Folders or the Not Allowed To Create Top Level Folders boxes.


Storage Warnings (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Storage Warnings property page to set the times at which notification messages are sent to mailbox owners or public folder contacts who have exceeded the maximum amount of space allotted for their mailbox or public folder. You can set limits for mailboxes in the private information store General property page or in the mailbox Advanced property page. You can set limits for public folders in the public information store General property page or the public folder Advanced property page.

The Storage Warnings property page contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks (depending on the detail view you select). You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when notification is to occur.

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Public Folder Affinity (Information Store Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Public Folder Affinity property page to configure Microsoft Exchange so that clients in your site can connect to public folders in other sites. By associating a cost with each site, you can determine the order in which the client attempts to connect to other sites. For example, if a client attempts to connect to a public folder that has multiple replicas in other sites, a connection is made to the site with the lowest cost first.

  Sites

  Public Folder Affinity

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Connected Site Cost


Sites

A list of all sites in your organization.


Public Folder Affinity

A list of all sites to which connections can potentially be established when a client attempts to connect to a public folder outside the site.


Add Button

Select a site in the Sites box, and choose Add to add it to the Public Folder Affinity box. When a client tries to connect to a public folder outside the site, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to establish connections only with public folder replicas in sites that appear in the Public Folder Affinity box.


Remove Button

Select a site in the Public Folder Affinity box, and choose Remove to remove it from the Public Folder Affinity box. When a client tries to connect to a public folder outside the site, Microsoft Exchange Server attempts to establish connections only with public folder replicas in sites that appear in the Public Folder Affinity box.


Connected Site Cost

Connected site cost determines the preference between sites if a public folder replica is available in more than one site. Specify the routing cost of each site using the following steps:

1.	In the Public Folder Affinity box, select a server.

2.	In the Connected Site Cost box, specify the routing cost (0 to 100) for the selected site.

The default is 1. Public folders in sites with a cost of 0 are used first; public folders in sites with a cost of 100 are used only when all other replicas of the public folder are unavailable.

3.	Choose Set Value.


General (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the General property page to modify the display name (the name that appears in the Administrator window), to view the directory name, and to set the following option:

  Enable Message Tracking


Enable Message Tracking

When message tracking for the message transfer agent (MTA) is enabled, the system attendant creates a daily log file that contains routing information about all messages processed by the MTA. You enable message tracking for messages processed by the information store from the Information Store Site Configuration General property page.

Daily tracking log files are stored in the Exchsrvr\Tracking.log directory and use the following file naming convention:

YYYYMMDD.log

where YYYY is year, MM is month, and DD is day. For example, a file created on June 1, 1995, is called 19950601.log.

Note

The date used to create log files is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

These daily log files are used by the Message Tracking Center to determine routing information for specific messages. Message tracking is turned off by default. You must turn message tracking on if you want log files generated. The Message Tracking Center cannot search for messages processed on days where no daily log file is present.


Permissions (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on the MTA Site Configuration object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on an object. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Add Child	Create objects subordinate to this object.
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with an object.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with an object.
Delete	Delete an object.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions on this object.
Search	Enable the selected user account to view the contents of the container.


Messaging Defaults (MTA Site Configuration)

  Overview

Use the Messaging Defaults property page to set the criteria for sending messages. This includes setting values such as association parameters, time-outs for sending urgent messages, connection retry times, and checkpoint sizes. The values apply to all messages processed in your site.

  RTS Values

  Association Parameters

  Connection Retry Values

  Transfer Timeouts

  Reset Default Values


RTS Values

Reliable Transfer Service (RTS) values determine how often you want to verify information as it is being transferred, how long you want to wait after an error to restart the transfer, and how often you want a verification that another system has received your transfer.

Option	Description
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be retransferred, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Checkpointing slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the link is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	The amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning. The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Association Parameters

Associations are paths that are opened to other systems. Each association is contained within a connection and is used to transfer messages to a system. You may have multiple associations in each connection. You can determine how long to keep an association, how long to wait for a response before disconnecting, and the number of messages you will let wait before you open another association.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait for a response to a disconnect request before terminating the connection. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50.


Connection Retry Values

Connection retry values determine how many times you want to try to open a connection and send a message and how long you want to wait to reopen a connection or resend a message after an error.

Option	Description
Max open retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max transfer retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Transfer Timeouts

Messages of different priorities require different levels of attention. For example, an urgent message is processed more quickly than a non-urgent message. If a transfer fails, you must determine how long to wait before sending a non-delivery report (NDR). The transfer time-out is the amount of time to wait before sending that NDR. You can assign a different amount of time for each message priority.

Option	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Reset Default Values

Resets each of the values in the Messaging Defaults property page to its default setting.


General (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to view the name of the site to which you are connecting, specify the connection cost, and add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Target Site

  Cost

  Administrative Note

  Messaging Bridgehead in the Local Site


Directory name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters). This permanent name identifies the Site Connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a Site Connector. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Target Site

Displays the name of the site that contains the server that you specified when you created the Site Connector. This name cannot be modified.


Cost

Type a cost between 1 and 100. The lowest cost of all active connections is chosen. The default is 1.


Messaging Bridgehead in the Local Site

Select one server to be dedicated to sending messages to remote sites.

Any Server

Any server in the local site can send messages to the remote site. This is the default setting.

Specific Server

Select a specific server in the local site to send messages to the remote site.


Permissions (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Site Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Site Connector. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this Site Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this Site Connector.
Delete	Delete this Site Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this Site Connector.


Target Servers (Site Connector)

  Overview

A target server is a server in a remote site selected to handle message transfer for that site. Target server costs determine the preference between servers in a target site if more than one is available. All mail is sent to the server with the lower cost. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal.

  Site Servers

  Target Servers

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Target Server Cost

  Set Value


Set Value

Configures the value you type in Target server cost box.

The default is 1. Servers with a cost of 0 are used first; servers with a cost of 100 are used only when all other servers are unavailable. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal.


Site Servers

Lists all servers in the remote site. The server you specified when you configured the new Site Connector is automatically entered in the Target Servers box with a routing cost of 1.


Target Servers

Lists all servers in the remote site selected to handle message transfer for that site and the cost associated with that server. The server you specified when you configured the new Site Connector is automatically entered in the Target Servers box with a routing cost of 1.


Add Button

Adds the selected server to the list of target servers.


Remove Button

Stops the selected server from being used as a target server in the remote site.


Target Server Cost

Target server costs determine the preference between servers in a target site if more than one is available. Specify the routing cost of each target server using the following steps:

1.	In the Target Servers box, select a server.

2.	In the Target Server Cost box, specify the routing cost (0 to 100) for the selected server.

The default is 1. Servers with a cost of 0 are used first; servers with a cost of 100 are used only when all other servers are unavailable. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal.

3.	Choose Set Value.


Address Space (Site Connector)

  Overview

The X.400 address of the remote site is automatically entered in the Address Space property page when the Site Connector is created. You can define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to specify only the address space options that uniquely identify the route to the site.

Specify only as much of the address information as necessary to distinguish messages that should be routed to the connected site. For example, if you want to route every message with a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) address to the remote site, you should create a new Internet entry with an asterisk (*) in the address field. This matches all messages with a non-local SMTP address type and routes each to the remote site.

Note

An asterisk (*) can be used for a multicharacter wildcard in an address space. A percent symbol (%) can be used for a single character wildcard.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Type Column

Displays the type of address (such as X.400 or SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address space for which the connector is responsible.


Cost Column

Routing costs determine the preference between multiple routes to a remote site. The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Address space costs range from 1 to 100.


New General Button

Opens the General Address dialog box to add a new general address for the remote site. Enter the address type, full address information for the site, and the routing cost.


New X.400 Button

Opens the X.400 Address dialog box to add a new X.400 address space. In the various address information boxes, type the X.400 address space. For information and guidelines on X.400 address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


New MS Mail Button

In the various address information boxes, type the required Microsoft Mail address information. For information and guidelines on Microsoft Mail address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


New Internet Button

Adds a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) address space. Enter the domain name or IP address that this connector will be responsible for.


Edit Button

Modifies addressing information for the selected address space.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address space.


Override (Site Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page when the service account of the local site lacks service account permissions in the remote site. If a target server does not have a Windows NT Server trust relationship with the local site, it may be necessary to provide access permissions in order for the message transfer agents (MTAs) to send mail. To avoid any permissions-related problems, use the Microsoft Exchange Server service account for the remote site.

The Connect As options are:

  Windows NT Username

  Password

  Confirm Password

  Windows NT Domain Name


Windows NT Username

Type the name used to log on to the target server.


Password

Type the user's password.


Confirm Password

Type the user's password again.


Windows NT Domain Name

Type the name of the target server's Windows NT Server domain.


General (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to specify connector names, server names, and message size. You can also select a transport stack and add an administrative note.

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Remote Server Name

  MTA Transport Stack

  Phone Book Entry

  RAS Phone Book

  Refresh List

  Message Size

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters). This permanent name identifies the Dynamic RAS Connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a new transport stack. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote Server Name

Type the name of the server to which you want to connect.


MTA Transport Stack

The MTA transport stack that will be used for the Dynamic RAS Connector.


Phone Book Entry

Type the RAS phone book name for the remote server, select a phone book from the list, or choose RAS Phone Book to add a RAS phone book entry. Choose Refresh List to update the list with your new phone book entries.


RAS Phone Book Button

Displays the Remote Access window. Use the window to add or edit a RAS Phone Book entry.


Refresh List

Updates the list with new phone book entries.


Message Size

Configures the maximum size of messages transported through the Dynamic RAS Connector. Choose No Limit to enable transfer of any message size. To limit the message size, choose Maximum (K) and specify a number between 1 and 9,999,999 KB.


Permissions (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this Dynamic RAS Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this Dynamic RAS Connector. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the Administrator attributes associated with this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Delete	Delete this Dynamic RAS Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this Dynamic RAS Connector.


Schedule (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this Dynamic RAS Connector becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view that you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the Dynamic RAS Connector will become active.

  Remote Initiated

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Remote Initiated

Select Remote Initiated to send messages queued at this message transfer agent (MTA) only when the remote MTA connects to this MTA. Only one of the two MTAs can be configured for remote initiation; otherwise, messages will not be delivered.


RAS Override (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page to provide authentication credentials to connect to the remote site.

The Connect As options are as follows:

  Windows NT Username

  Password

  Confirm Password

  Windows NT Domain Name

  Optional Phone Numbers


Optional Phone Numbers

MTA Callback Number

Type the number for the remote MTA to call back into the local MTA.

Overriding Phone Number

Type the number for connecting to the remote site, instead of the phone number listed in the RAS phone book.


MTA Override (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page to change the default Microsoft Exchange Server MTA attributes for the Dynamic RAS Connector. Override options should be used only when necessary to match the configuration of the remote Microsoft Exchange Server.

  RTS Values

  Connection Retry Values

  Association Parameters

  Transfer Timeouts

  Reset Default Values Button


RTS Values

Use the MTA Override property page to match the configuration of the remote Microsoft Exchange Server. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values.

Option	Definition
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets the amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be transferred again, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Using a checkpoint slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the connection is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	Determines the amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning.  The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Connection Retry Values

Use the MTA Override property page to specify how many times the MTA should try to establish a connection.

Option	Description
Max Open Retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max Transfer Retries	The maximum number of times the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Association Parameters

Use the MTA Override property page to set or modify the association parameters between MTAs.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait before terminating a connection due to a previously terminated association. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50.


Transfer Timeouts

Type the number of seconds between transfer retries for each of the following types of messages:

Message Type	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Reset Default Values Button

Resets all current values to the defaults.


Connected Sites (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

When the Dynamic RAS Connector is used to connect to an existing Microsoft Exchange Server organization, use the Connected Sites property page to ensure that directory replication can take place and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed.

Note

Connected sites should list only those sites that are directly adjacent to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites will be inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization Column

  Site column

  Routing address column

  Cost Column

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Routing address
Routing address column

Displays the e-mail routing address for the connected site. In the Properties dialog box for the connected site, select the Routing Address tab and choose Edit to make changes to the routing address.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected connected site.


Edit Button

Displays the Properties dialog box for the connected site. Use the General and Routing Address property pages to make changes.


New Button

Displays the Properties dialog box. Use the General and Routing Address properties pages to specify information for the new connected site.


Site Column

Displays the connected site name.


Organization Column

Displays the name of the organization associated with the connected site.


Address Space (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

The X.400 address of the remote site is automatically entered in the Address Space property page when the Dynamic RAS Connector is created. You can define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to specify only the necessary address space options that uniquely identify the route to the site.

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Address space costs range from 1 to 100.

Note

An asterisk (*) can be used for a multicharacter wildcard in an address space. A percent symbol (%) can be used for a single character wildcard.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  New General Button

  New X.400 Button

  New MS Mail Button

  New Internet Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Delivery Restrictions (Dynamic RAS Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a remote Microsoft Exchange Server site, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject messages from box.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Options (Exchange Menu)

You can specify default settings that will be used when you create Microsoft Exchange Server mailboxes using Windows NT User Manager. For example, you can specify that Microsoft Exchange Server always deletes a mailbox when its associated Windows NT account is deleted.


Properties (Exchange Menu)

Enables you to view or modify properties for the mailbox associated with the selected Windows NT account.


Help on Creating Mailboxes (Exchange Menu)

  See Also

You can create new mailboxes using Windows NT User Manager or the Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator program. The Microsoft Exchange Server extension to Windows NT User Manager allows you to automatically create new mailboxes at the same time as you create new Windows NT accounts. You can also set other defaults that will be used when setting up Windows NT accounts and mailboxes.

For more information about creating mailboxes, see Microsoft Exchange Server Getting Started.


See Also

Creating New Mailboxes


Creating New Mailboxes

Use one of the following mailbox creation options:

Creating a Mailbox Using the Administrator Program

Creating a Mailbox Using the Windows NT User Manager

Creating a Mailbox Using a New Windows NT User Account


Creating a Mailbox Using the Administrator Program

You use the Administrator program to create a mailbox for one or more existing Windows NT user accounts, or you can use it to create a new Windows NT account as part of creating the mailbox. Whether you create a mailbox in the Administrator program or directly in Windows NT, the configuration process is the same.

1.	In the Administrator window, choose Recipients.

2.	From the File menu, choose New Mailbox.


Creating a Mailbox Using the Windows NT User Manager

You can use the Windows NT User Manager program to create a mailbox. When a new account is created, you can configure it for the user. The configuration specifies the user’s name, password, access to account groups, a user profile, time duration for accessibility, logon, and account information.

1.	From the User menu in the Windows NT User Manager, choose New User.

2.	Type the account information, and then choose Add.

3.	In the Connect to server dialog box, type the name of the Microsoft Exchange Server where you want to create the mailbox.

Option	Description
User name	A unique name of up to 20 characters to identify the user account.
Full Name	The user’s complete name.
Description	Any text describing the user account or the user.
Password	A unique password for this user account. A password can be up to 14 characters (and a minimum of 4 characters) and is case-sensitive.
Confirm Password	Type the password again to confirm that you have entered it correctly.
User Must Change Password at Next Logon	The user must create a new password at the next logon.
User Cannot Change Password	The user cannot change the assigned password.
Password Never Expires	Does not prompt the user to change the password because the password never expires.
Account Disabled	Stops access to the account.


Creating a Mailbox Using a New Windows NT User Account

Before setting up the mailbox, determine if more than one Windows NT user will access it. If you configure a mailbox for a single user, the mailbox is associated with the Windows NT user account. If you configure a mailbox for several users, the mailbox is associated with each member’s Windows NT user account.

1.	In the Windows NT Program Manager, open the Administrative Tools program group.

2.	Double-click User Manager for Domains.

3.	From the Exchange menu, choose Options.

4.	Select an option.

Option	Description
Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts	Sets up a new mailbox recipient at the same time as a new Windows NT account is created.
Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts	Deletes the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox when the associated Windows NT account is deleted.
Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server	Prompts for a server name to connect to when the mailbox is created.
Default Microsoft Exchange Server	Uses the server you designate as the default server for each new mailbox created.
Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container	If None is selected, no default recipient container is displayed. If None is cleared, the default Microsoft Exchange Server recipient container is displayed.


About Microsoft Exchange User Manager Extension... (Exchange Menu)

Displays information about your copy of Microsoft Exchange User Manager Extension, including the version number, and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.


Exchange (Help Menu)

Displays the Help Finder window. The Help Finder window contains three tabbed pages that provide access to all topics in the Microsoft Exchange Server Help system.

Contents

Displays a graphical outline of Help topics.

Index

Displays an alphabetical index of Help topics.

Find

Provides access to full-text search capabilities.

Note

For more information on using the Help Finder window, open the window and press F1.


General (Options)

The General property page enables you to specify default settings that will be used when you use the Windows NT User Manager to create Windows NT accounts that are associated with Microsoft Exchange Server mailboxes.

  Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts

  Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts

  Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server

  Default Microsoft Exchange Server

  Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container


Always create an Exchange mailbox when creating Windows NT accounts

Sets up a new mailbox recipient at the same time as a new Windows NT account is created. This option is selected by default.


Always delete the Exchange mailbox when deleting Windows NT accounts

Deletes the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox when the associated Windows NT account is deleted. This option is selected by default.


Always prompt for Microsoft Exchange server

Prompts for a server name to connect to when the mailbox is created. You can use this option to specify the mailbox's home server.


Default Microsoft Exchange Server

Uses the server you designate as the default server for each new mailbox.


Mailbox Creation Container

Select the container that Microsoft Exchange Server will use when creating or deleting mailboxes during Windows NT account creation or deletion.


Default Microsoft Exchange Recipients Container

If None is selected, new mailboxes will be available in the recipient container of the server to which you are currently connected. Clear None to select another recipient container that will be used for new mailboxes.


General (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Display Name

  Directory Name

  Remote MTA Name

  Remote MTA Password

  MTA Transport Stack

  Message Text Word-Wrap

  Remote Clients Support MAPI

  Administrative Note


Directory Name

Type an informative and descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) for the message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. This permanent name identifies the connector in the directory and is used in event log messages. You can modify this name only when creating a new connector. This name is not case-sensitive.


Display Name

Type the name (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed for the connector in the Administrator window. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote MTA Name

Specify the name of the remote message transfer agent (MTA). Type a name of up to 32 characters. This name is not case-sensitive.


Remote MTA Password

Specify the password (up to 64 characters) of the remote message transfer agent (MTA). This password is case-sensitive.


Transport Stack

Select an X.400 message transport. The message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack is used to provide a network connection between two sites, or between a site and a foreign X.400 system. You can use an MTA transport stack installed on any computer in your site running Microsoft Exchange Server. Messages are automatically routed through the server where the MTA transport stack is installed.

If the transport stack you want to use does not appear in this list, you must install it or verify that information about an installed stack has been replicated to this server.


Message Text Word-Wrap

Indicate whether to insert a carriage return at a specific column in outgoing message text. Select Never (default) if you do not want to insert carriage returns in the text of outgoing messages. Or select At Column, and type a value representing the column number where a carriage return will be inserted.


Remote Clients Support MAPI

You can configure the X.400 Connector to send outbound messages with rich text characters such as bold, color, and italic. Rich text also provides the ability to position attachments. Rich text is a feature that should be used only when the recipient client software is MAPI compliant.

If you do not select the Remote Clients Support MAPI check box, attachments will be sent to the foreign system as separate X.400 messages. Rich text format, icons and their rendering positions, and OLE attachments and their rendering positions are discarded before message transfer. If you select this option and the foreign system does not support MAPI, the foreign system displays an extra attachment called WINMAIL.DAT.


Permissions (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this X.400 Connector. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this X.400 Connector. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this X.400 Connector.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this X.400 Connector.
Delete	Delete this X.400 Connector.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this X.400 Connector.


Schedule (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Schedule property page to control when and how often this X.400 Connector becomes active. It contains a schedule grid with rows representing days and columns representing 1-hour blocks or 15-minute blocks depending on the detail view you select. You can use the schedule grid to designate specific times or blocks of time when the X.400 Connector will become active.

  Remote Initiated

  Never

  Always

  Selected Times

  Detail View

  Schedule Grid


Remote Initiated

Select Remote Initiated to send messages queued at this message transfer agent (MTA) only when the remote MTA connects to this MTA. Both MTAs must have the two-way alternate option selected. Only one of the two MTAs can be configured for remote initiation; otherwise, messages won't be delivered.


Override (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Override property page to change the default Microsoft Exchange Server message transfer agent (MTA) attributes when using a specific X.400 Connector. Override options should be used only when necessary to establish communication with a foreign system. For example, you can configure an override MTA name and/or password to be used when connecting to a foreign system if the local MTA name and/or password are longer than the foreign system can accept. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector.

You also use this property page to configure message transfer to a particular foreign system manually. This does not affect message transfer over any other connector. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values when connecting to a foreign system.

  Local MTA Name

  Local MTA Password

  RTS Values

  Connection Retry Values

  Association Parameters

  Transfer Timeouts


Local MTA Name

The name to be used when the Microsoft Exchange Server name is too long or contains characters that the foreign system message transfer agent (MTA) cannot accept.

Note

The Local MTA Name and Local MTA Password can be used to override what is specified in the MTA General property page under the Servers container.


Local MTA Password

The local password that the foreign X.400 message transfer agent (MTA) uses to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server computer.

Note

The Local MTA Name and Local MTA Password can be used to override what is specified in the MTA General property page under the Servers container.


RTS Values

Use RTS values to modify values for checkpoint size, recovery timeout, and window size. If you do not specify an override value, the message transfer agent (MTA) uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Definition
Checkpoint size (K)	Sets the amount of data to be transferred before a checkpoint is inserted. If an error occurs and the message must be retransferred, the process restarts from the most recent checkpoint. If you specify zero, no checkpoint is set. The default is 30. Using a checkpoint slightly reduces transmission speed. You should decrease the checkpoint size when the connection is less reliable.
Recovery timeout (sec)	Determines the amount of time after an error occurs that the MTA waits for a reconnection before deleting checkpointed information and restarting the transfer from the beginning. The default is 60.
Window size	The number of checkpoints that can go unacknowledged before data transfer is suspended. The greater the window size, the greater the transfer rate. The window size determines the amount of resources set aside for the receiving station. Specify window size only if the checkpoint size is greater than zero. The default is 5.


Connection Retry Values

Use the Override property page to specify how many times the message transfer agent (MTA) should try to establish a connection. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Max Open Retries	The maximum number of times that the system tries to open a connection before it sends a non-delivery report (NDR). The default is 144.
Max Transfer Retries	The maximum number of times that the system tries to transfer a message across an open connection. The default is 2.
Open Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before attempting to reopen a connection after an error. The default is 600.
Transfer Interval (sec)	The amount of time to wait before resending a message across an open connection after a previous attempt failed. The default is 120.


Association Parameters

Use the Override property page to set or modify the association parameters between message transfer agents (MTAs). If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Lifetime (sec)	The amount of time to keep an association open to a remote system after a message is sent. The default is 300.
Disconnect (sec)	The amount of time to wait before terminating a connection due to a previously terminated association. The default is 120.
Threshold (msgs)	The maximum number of queued messages to a remote system. When this is exceeded, the MTA opens another association. The default is 50. The threshold value is used to avoid messages being submitted to the Microsoft Exchange Server MTA queue faster than they are dispatched. When the threshold value is exceeded, the MTA opens another association to the remote system MTA.


Transfer Timeouts

Use the Override property page to set the number of times the message transfer agent (MTA) will try to transfer urgent, normal, or nonurgent messages. If you do not specify an override value, the MTA uses the default values or negotiates a configuration automatically when connecting to a foreign system.

Option	Description
Urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for an urgent message. The default is 1000.
Normal	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a normal message. The default is 2000.
Non-urgent	The amount of time (in sec/K) to wait before sending an NDR for a non-urgent message. The default is 3000.


Connected Sites (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

When the X.400 Connector is used to connect to an existing Microsoft Exchange Server organization, use the Connected Sites property page to ensure that directory replication can take place, and that other connectors in the organization can be accessed.

Note

Connected sites should list only those sites that are directly adjacent to the connector. Knowledge of all other sites will be inherited automatically through directory replication.

  Organization

  Site

  Routing Address

  Cost

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Organization

The name of the organization using Microsoft Exchange Server. This is the directory name of the organization container.


Site

The name of the site with which to connect.


Routing Address

Displays the e-mail routing address for the connected site. In the Properties dialog box for the connected site, select the Routing Address tab, and choose Edit to make changes to the routing address.


New Button

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so you can add the selected site to the list of connected sites.


Edit Button

Displays the General and Routing Address property pages so you can edit the selected site to the list of connected sites.


Remove Button

Removes the selected connected site from the Connected Sites box.


Cost

Type a number from 1 through 100. Connected site costs determine the preference between bridgehead servers if more than one is available. If two or more servers are available with the same cost, the load placed on servers in the remote site is roughly equal. The default is 1.


Address Space (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Address Space property page to define the type and format of addresses used to identify messages to another site or foreign system. Each entry is called an address space and contains only as much of the address as is necessary to distinguish messages that should be sent through this connector. You need to configure only the necessary X.400 address space options to uniquely identify the route to the site or foreign system.

For example, if you want to use this connector to route only X.400 messages to a foreign system called Ferguson and Bardell (FAB), you type the following in the Address Space property page:

Private Management Domain Name (p) = FAB

Administrative Management Domain Name (a) = mci

Country (c) = us

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.

Note

The Connected Sites property page also contains address information but is used only when connecting to other Microsoft Exchange Server sites.

  Type Column

  Address Column

  Cost Column

  Scope Column

  New Button

  Edit Button

  Remove Button


Type Column

Displays the type of address (such as X.400 or SMTP).


Address Column

Displays the address for which this connector is responsible.


Cost Column

The cost associated with each address space is used to optimize message routing to the foreign system but does not affect message reception. All mail is sent using the address with the lowest cost. If two or more routes are available with the same cost, the load placed on the routes is roughly equal. Routing costs range from 1 to 100.


New Button

Opens the New Address Space dialog box where you can select the address type for which you wish to create a new address space.


New General Button

Opens the General Address Properties dialog box so you can define a general address space. Enter the address type, full address information, and the routing cost.


New X.400 Button

Opens the X.400 Address Properties dialog box so you can define an X.400 address space.

In the various address information boxes, type the X.400 address. For information and guidelines on X.400 address formats, see Microsoft Exchange Server Concepts and Planning.


New MS Mail Button

Opens the MS Properties dialog box so you can define a Microsoft Mail address space.


New Internet Button

Displays the SMTP Properties dialog box so you can define an Internet address space.


Edit Button

Modifies addressing information for the selected address.


Remove Button

Deletes the selected address.


Delivery Restrictions (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Delivery Restrictions property page to accept or reject messages from any sender listed in the directory. For example, if a message is addressed to a foreign system, it is returned to the sender if the sender's address is in the Reject Messages From box or does not appear in the Accept Messages From box.

Delivery restrictions are optional and do not affect incoming messages. The default is to accept messages from all senders and reject messages from none. These are senders that are listed in the Microsoft Exchange Server directory.

Note

If a distribution list is specified, the members of the distribution list are used for the restriction, not the distribution list itself.

  Accept Messages From

  Reject Messages From

  Modify Button


Advanced (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Advanced property page to specify a message transfer agent (MTA) conformance mode, X.400 link options, message size limits, X.400 body parts, and the remote global domain identifier (GDI). The settings in this property page do not restrict incoming messages to Microsoft Exchange Server.

  MTA Conformance

  Message Size

  X.400 Bodypart Used for Message Text

  Use the GDI from Site Addressing

  Use the GDI Specified Below

  X.400 Link Options

  Remote X.400 Global Domain Identifier


MTA Conformance

MTA conformance must match the conformance of the foreign system.


Message Size

Specify a maximum size for messages sent to another site or foreign system.

No Limit. This is the default. Select this to send messages of any size.

Set a maximum message size from 0 to 2,097,151 bytes.


Use the GDI from Site Addressing

Choose the site addressing global domain identifier if the remote contains the same global domain identifier (PRMD, ADMD, Country) as your Microsoft Exchange Server global domain identifier. If not, choose Use the GDI specified below and complete the fields in Remote X.400 global domain identifier.


Use the GDI Specified Below

When selected, enables the X.400 Link option. Choose this option and complete the fields in Remote X.400 global domain identifier when the relay message transfer agent (MTA) is not in the same management domain as the originating MTA.


X.400 Bodypart Used for Message Text

You can specify the body part type to be used for the content of an outbound message. This body part type must be supported by the foreign system and primarily affects outbound messages. This body part specification pertains to inbound IA5 messages if you select the Convert Incoming Messages to Microsoft Exchange Contents check box on the message transfer agent (MTA) object General property page. This allows inbound conversion from IA5 Swedish, Norwegian, or German on inbound messages.


X.400 Link Options

Additional parameters may be needed to operate with the other site or foreign system. These parameters affect outbound messages only.

Option	Description
Allow BP-15 (in addition to BP-14)	Select to send BP-15 attachments formatted as file transfer body part (FTBP). Clear to send all attachments as BP-14 attachments.
Allow MS Exchange contents	Select to send message content formatted in the Microsoft Exchange Server internal format (MDBEF) when possible. Clear to convert the message format to the standard P2/P22 X.400 format. Note If the remote system is not a Microsoft Exchange Server computer, do not select this option.
Two way alternate	Select to specify that the two communicating message transfer agents (MTAs) take turns sending and receiving messages.


Remote X.400 Global Domain Identifier

The remote global domain identifier is used to prevent message transfer loops. The global domain identifier is used in a relay scenario and affects outbound messages only.

Option	Description
PRMD (p)	The private messaging domain (PRMD) name.
ADMD (a)	The administrative management domain (ADMD) name.
Any	Allow the local message transfer agent (MTA) to select any available ADMD.
Specific	Specify a particular ADMD to use.
Country (c)	Country name of the directly connected foreign X.400 system's global domain identifier.


Stack (X.400 Connector)

  Overview

The Stack property page is different for each of the following:

X.400 TCP/IP Connector

X.400 TP4 Connector

X.400 X.25 Connector


Stack (X.400 TCP/IP Connector)

  Overview

Use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note

Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Remote host name

  IP address

  Address

  Outgoing OSI address information

  Incoming OSI address information

  Display fields as hex

  Display fields as text

  Use expedited data


Remote host name

Select to use the name of the remote server. Type the name in the Address box.


IP address

Select to use the static Internet protocol (IP) address of the remote server. Type the IP address in the Address box.


Address

Type the name or the Internet protocol (IP) address of the remote server.

Note

For Domain Name System (DNS), use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), use the NetBIOS name. For the IP address, use the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where XXX is a decimal value from 0 to 255.


Outgoing OSI address information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string) to specify the transport service access point (TSAP).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string) to specify the session service access point (SSAP).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string) to specify the presentation service access point (PSAP).


Incoming OSI address information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string) to specify the transport service access point (TSAP).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string) to specify the session service access point (SSAP).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string) to specify the presentation service access point (PSAP).


Display fields as hex

Display address information as hexadecimal values.


Display fields as text

Display address information as text.


Use expedited data

Select to increase the speed of communications over networks that recognize data packets identified for accelerated transfer. Some networks require the use of expedited data. For more information, see your TCP/IP documentation.


Stack (X.400 TP4 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note

Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Address

  Outgoing OSI Address Information

  Incoming OSI Address Information

  Display Fields As Hex

  Display Fields As Text

  Use Expedited Data


Address

The network service access point (NSAP).


Outgoing OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string) to specify the transport service access point (TSAP).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string) to specify the session service access point (SSAP).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string) to specify the presentation service access point (PSAP).


Incoming OSI Address Information

In the T Selector box, type up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string) to specify the transport service access point (TSAP).

In the S Selector box, type up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string) to specify the session service access point (SSAP).

In the P Selector box, type up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string) to specify the presentation service access point (PSAP).


Display Fields as Hex

Display address information as hexadecimal values.


Display Fields as Text

Display address information in text mode.


Use Expedited Data

Select to increase the speed of communications over networks that recognize data packets identified for accelerated transfer. Some networks require the use of expedited data. For more information, see the documentation for your X.25, TCP/IP, or TP4 transport stacks.


Stack (X.400 X.25 Connector)

  Overview

Use the Stack property page to specify transport address information about the server or foreign system to which you want to connect. Information displayed on the Stack property page will be based on the message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack type that you selected for the X.400 Connector.

Note

Information in the X.400 Connector Stack property page must match the transport configuration on the server or foreign system for the connection to work.

  Call User Data

  Facilities Data

  X.121 Address

  Outgoing OSI Address Information

  Incoming OSI Address Information

  Display Fields As Hex

  Display Fields As Text

  Use Expedited Data


Call User Data

Type the call user data information (up to 255 hexadecimal characters of user-specified information) as specified by your X.25 service provider.


Facilities Data

Type the facilities data information (up to 218 hexadecimal characters and commas), specifying additional information related to connection initiation, such as a reversal of line charges, as specified by your X.25 service provider.


X.121 Address

Type the X.121 address (up to 16 numeric characters) of the remote server.


General (MTA Transport Stack)

  Overview

The General property page is different for each of the following:

RAS Transport Stack

TCP/IP Transport Stack

TP4 Transport Stack

X.25 Transport Stack


Permissions (MTA Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.


Connectors (MTA Transport Stack)

  Overview

The Connectors property page is different for each of the following:

RAS Transport Stack

TCP/IP Transport Stack

TP4 Transport Stack

X.25 Transport Stack


General (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over public telephone, X.25 packet assembly/disassembly (PAD), or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) networks, you can install one RAS transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the RAS network software running on a Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  MTA Callback Number


Name

The name for this transport stack. You can modify this name only when creating a new transport stack. The default is RAS (servername).


MTA Callback Number

The telephone number used to reach the local server over a dial-up connection when RAS callback security is enabled. Specifying this number is optional.


Permissions (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.


Connectors (RAS Transport Stack)

  Overview

Each Dynamic RAS Connector that you installed on this RAS message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack is displayed in the Connectors property page. You can view all the connectors using the MTA transport stack and make modifications if necessary.

  Connectors That Use This Stack

  Edit


Connectors That Use This Stack

A list of all the connectors using this message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack.


Edit

Allows you to edit the property pages for the connector specified.


General (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over TCP/IP networks, you can install one TCP/IP transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the TCP/IP network software running on the Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Server Name

  OSI Address Information


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is TCP/IP on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack.


Server Name

The name of the server where the stack will be installed. If the server name is not correct, you must cancel the task and specify the correct target server.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


Permissions (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has to this transport stack. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.


Connectors (TCP/IP Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. You can also select a connector and edit its property pages.

  Connectors that use this stack

  Edit Button


Connectors that use this stack

Lists the TCP/IP connectors that use this message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack.


Edit Button

Displays the property pages for the connector you select.


General (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

For communications over TP4 transports, you can install one TP4 transport stack on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer. This transport stack works with the TP4 network software running on the Windows NT server.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  OSI Address Information


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is TP4 on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


Permissions (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.


Connectors (TP4 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. You can select a connector and edit its property pages from this property page.


General (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

To send communications over an X.25 transport stack, you can configure one or more X.25 logical ports. You can install one or more physical X.25 adapters on a Microsoft Exchange Server computer with one or more X.25 logical ports configured per physical adapter.  You must configure a separate X.400 transport stack for each X.25 logical port.

Use the General property page to set the following options:

  Name

  Call User Data

  Facilities Data

  X.121 Address

  OSI Address Information

  I/O Port

  Async Phone Line

  Leased Line

  Eicon X.25

  WinSock X.25


Name

Type a name for this transport stack. The default is Eicon X.25 on (servername). You can edit this name only when creating a new transport stack.


Call User Data

Type the call user data information supplied by your X.25 provider. You may use up to 256 hexadecimal characters.


Facilities Data

Type additional information (up to 218 hexadecimal characters) related to connection initiation, such as a reversal of line charges.


X.121 Address

The local X.121 address, as specified in the X.25 network service setup.


OSI Address Information

This section is used to further define the address in cases where other applications or services are using the same transport stack.

(Optional) In the T Selector box, type the transport service access point (TSAP) of up to 64 hexadecimal characters (32-character text string).

(Optional) In the S Selector box, type the session service access point (SSAP) of up to 32 hexadecimal characters (16-character text string).

(Optional) In the P Selector box, type the presentation service access point (PSAP) of up to 8 hexadecimal characters (4-character text string).

(Optional) Select Hex or Text to specify a format for data in the T, S, and P Selector boxes.


I/O Port

The I/O port where the X.25 adapter is installed.


Async Phone Line

Select Async Phone Line to use an asynchronous X.25 connection.


Leased Line

Select Leased Line to use a leased line X.25 connection.


Eicon X.25

Select Eicon X.25 to access X.25 through an Eicon specific interface.


WinSock X.25

Select WinSock X.25 to access X.25 through a generic Winsock interface.


Permissions (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on this transport stack. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on this transport stack. This property page provides various default roles. You can also create custom roles.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  Windows NT Accounts With Permissions

  Add Button

  Remove Button

  Roles

  Rights


Rights

The following table lists the rights you can use to define roles.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the user attributes associated with this transport stack.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify the administrator attributes associated with this transport stack.
Delete	Delete this transport stack.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this transport stack.


Connectors (X.25 Transport Stack)

  Overview

Use the Connectors property page to display a list of connectors that use this message transfer agent (MTA) transport stack. You can select a connector and edit its property pages from this property page.


General (Connected Site)

Use the General tab to change the organization or site name for the connector.

  Organization

  Site


Organization

The name of the organization using Microsoft Exchange Server. This is the directory name of the organization container.


Site

The name of the site within the organization that you want to connect to.


Routing Address (Connected Site)

Use the Routing Address tab to change the address type, address, or connection cost for the Internet Mail Service or X.400 Connector.

Internet Mail Service Routing Address

  Type

  Cost

  Address

X.400 Connector Routing Address

 Organization (o)

  Organizational units (ou)

  Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

  Private management domain name (p)

  Administrative management domain name (a)

  Country (c)

  Cost


Organization (o)

0 through 64 characters.


Organizational units (ou)

0 through 32 characters.


Org. unit 1 (ou1) - 4 (ou4)

0 through 32 characters.


Private management domain name (p)

1 through 16 characters.


Administrative management domain name (a)

1 through 16 characters.


Country (c)

2 characters or 3 digits.


Cost

Type a routing cost for this address space entry.


Advanced (X.400 Address Properties)
Advanced (X400 Address Properties)

Use the Advanced property page to define the X.400 address of a mailbox.

  Type

  Value

  User agent numeric id (n-id)

  X 121 address (x121)

  Terminal type (t-ty)

  Terminal identifier (t-id)


Type

The custom attribute name, 0 through 8 characters.


Value

The custom attribute value, 0 through 128 characters.


User agent numeric ID (n-id)

A recipient ID from 0 through 32 digits.


X 121 address (x121)

The recipient's X.121 address, up to 16 digits.


Terminal type (t-ty)

The terminal type used to receive messages.


Terminal identifier (t-id)

The terminal ID used to receive messages.


Permissions

  Overview

Use the Permissions property page to specify the rights that users or groups have on a particular object. You delegate permissions to a user or group by assigning them a role. Roles are sets of rights that define how much and what type of access a user or group has on a particular object. For an MTA transport stack, Microsoft Exchange Server provides Administrator, Send As, and User default roles. You can also create custom roles.

The following table lists the rights that you can use to define roles for mailbox permissions.

This right	Gives the associated account rights to
Modify User Attributes	Modify the User attributes associated with this mailbox.
Modify Admin Attributes	Modify administrator-level attributes associated with a mailbox. For example, a user with this permission can modify the job title and display name fields in a mailbox.
Send As	Sends messages with the sender's return address. For example, each user has this permission on their mailbox so they can send messages with that mailbox's return address. This permission is also granted on server objects so directory service processes can send messages to each other.
Mailbox Owner	Log on to this mailbox and use it to send and receive messages.
Modify Permissions	Change permissions for this mailbox.
Note

When you give a user or group permissions on an object, they automatically inherit the same level of permissions for all subordinate objects in the directory. For example, if you give a user Administrator rights on the site object, they inherit Administrator rights on all directory objects below the site.

  Windows NT Accounts With Inherited Permissions

  NT Accounts With Permissions

  Roles

  Add Button

  Remove Button